• Skip to primary navigation
  • Skip to main content
  • Skip to primary sidebar
  • Father's Day
  • Recipes
  • Free Tutorials
  • Sign Up
  • About Liz

Sugar Geek Show logo

menu icon
go to homepage
  • Father's Day
  • Recipes
  • Free Tutorials
  • Sign Up
  • About Liz
subscribe
search icon
Homepage link
  • Father's Day
  • Recipes
  • Free Tutorials
  • Sign Up
  • About Liz
×
Home

Blog

coconut mousse cups

July 8, 2022 Filling

Coconut Mousse Recipe

This Coconut Mousse Recipe with mango puree is a bright burst of flavor in every bite. The tangy mango puree, airy coconut mousse, and crunchy coconut nougatine on top combine for layers of sweet satisfaction. They're perfect for individual wedding desserts, summer BBQs, or just a yummy tropical treat.coconut mousse cups

This recipe is based on Chef Christophe's Mango Mousse Cake. The mousse, nougatine (tuille), and puree are all components in the entremet, but while testing the recipe, we couldn't stop eating these three together! So we decided to make them into mango mousse cups! (I love my job) They look so pretty layered in dessert cups, but you can also use these recipes to fill pavlova, on top of a cheesecake, or just enjoy them plain on their own.

What's In This Blog Post

  • Ingredients
    • Mango Puree
    • Coconut Mousse
    • Coconut Nougatine
    • Ingredients Tips and Substitutions
  • Coconut Mango Dessert Cups Step-By-Step
    • Making the Mango Puree
    • Making The Coconut Mousse
    • Making The Coconut Nougatine
  • Assembling The Dessert Cups
  • FAQ
  • More Recipes You'll Love

Ingredients

For our dessert cups, I recommend making the mango puree first, followed by the mousse, and then the coconut nougatine on top for the perfect combination of creamy, airy, and crunchy. 

Mango Puree

picture of mango compote ingredients

Coconut Mousse

This mousse is basically a crémeux that has been lightened with whipped cream. Some coconut mousse recipes use egg whites, coconut cream, and coconut extract, but egg yolks, heavy cream, and coconut milk make for a very silky texture.

picture of coconut mousse ingredients

Coconut Nougatine

Nougatine is going to serve as our texture in these dessert cups. Crunchy, sweet, and highly addictive.

picture of coconut nougatine ingredients

Ingredients Tips and Substitutions

Mango: Make sure to buy them pretty ripe so they are soft, sweet, and easy to slice. To pick the perfect mango press on them lightly and if they feel slightly soft (not too soft) then they are ready to use! You can also buy frozen mango.

Coconut flakes: To make our coconut nougatine we need coconut flakes for texture and flavor. We are using unsweetened for this recipe because we are adding sugar to our components. You can use sweetened if you would like, just make sure to adjust your sugar measurement so you don't make your recipe too sweet.

Pectin NH: Pectin is a thickening agent that is used in many jams, spreads, and compotes. It is what helps thicken your sauce to become more pliable and gives it that jam texture. You can usually find it in the grocery store in the canning or food preservation aisle or you can order it online.

Gelatin: We are using 200 bloom gelatin sheets because sheets will create a transparent and extra shiny product. You can use gelatin powder since it's easier to find or can order sheets online.

Vanilla: We are using a vanilla bean to produce the best vanilla flavor, but you can use vanilla bean paste or extract. Nielsen Massey has amazing vanilla paste, extract, and beans!

Coconut Mango Dessert Cups Step-By-Step

Making the Mango Puree

  1. To make your simple syrup, add your sugar and water into a small pot over medium heat. Bring it to a boil and cook until the sugar dissolves. Pour into a glass container to cool and store in the fridge.hand pouring bowl of sugar into pot.
  2. Cut up your mangoes and dice them into chunks. Place the diced mangoes into a blender or food processor.hand holding spatula scooping mango into blender
  3. Add your simple syrup and blend everything together until it becomes a thin smoothie-like texture.spatula covered in mango puree.
  4. Strain the mix into a bowl or container to get rid of lumps and extra pulp. This makes the puree super smooth. Set this aside to use later. If you want to make this ahead of time, you can refrigerate it for a week or freeze it for up to a month.hand holding spatula inside strainer of puree.

Making The Coconut Mousse

  1. Add your cold whipping cream into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk Add your cream into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Whip to a soft-medium peak. Do not overmix, I recommend finishing the mixing by hand.
  2. Soak the gelatin in cold water (blooming). Let it absorb for 1-2 minutes.hand pouring measuring cup of water onto gelatin.
  3. Add the coconut milk, and half of the sugar into a small pot over medium heat. The sugar prevents the coconut milk from burning. hand pouring measurement of cream into pot.
  4. Add in the vanilla. Whisk the mix in the pot and bring it to a boil.
  5. Bring the milk to a simmer (just beginning to see bubbles forming) while mixing constantly.
  6. Add the egg yolks and the other half of the sugar into a medium bowl.
  7. Whisk together until you reach a smooth texture and the sugar is dissolved. hand using whisk to whisk together yolks and sugar.
  8. Once your coconut milk mixture is boiling, temper your yolks with some of the milk by pouring ⅓ of the hot mixture into the yolks while whisking constantly. Pour everything back into the pot. potnof cream being poured into container of yolks.
  9. Cook everything while whisking constantly until it reaches 181ºF (83ºC). About 2-5 minutes or until the mix no longer drips from your whisk. hand holding whisk and wooden spoon over pot.
  10. Add in your gelatin and mix to combine. If you're using gelatin sheets, squeeze out the excess water first. hand adding gelatin to pot.
  11. OPTIONAL: Pour your mix into a separate bowl over ice to cool down the mix quickly to 20ºC-25ºC (Around 70ºC). hand pouring mix into bowl over ice bath
  12. Add ⅓ of your whipped cream into your cooled coconut milk mix to make the mixture lighter. Whisk together. spoon scooping whipped cream into egg yolk mixture.
  13. Lightly fold in the rest of your whipped cream using a spatula. Set it aside for about an hour so the mousse can thicken. Once it becomes thick and fluffy it's ready to use. Don't let it completely set up before you pipe it into your cups.

Making The Coconut Nougatine

  1. Preheat your oven to 325º F (162ºC).
  2. Combine your sugar and pectin in a small bowl. Mix together. hand pouring container of pectin into container of sugar.
  3. Add your butter, corn syrup, and sugar/pectin mixture into a medium-sized pot over medium heat until it begins to simmerhand pouring container of corn syrup into bowl.
  4. Reduce your heat to low, then add in your coconut. Mix with a spatula until combined.hand adding bowl of coconut into saucepan
  5. Pour the nougatine onto a silicone mat over a sheet pan and spread out with an offset spatula as thin as the coconut flakes are. You can use parchment if you don't have a silicone mat.hand using spatula to spread nougatine on tray.
  6. Bake in the oven for about 10 minutes or until golden brown. tray of baked nougatine
  7. Using a circle cutter or a knife, cut the nougatine right away. (Once it cools down it will set and be too hard to cut.) hand using circle cutters to cut the nougatine.
  8. (Optional) Brush the nougatine with a thin layer of melted cocoa butter using a pastry brush. This protects the nougatine from getting soggy. Set aside for decoration later.hand using pastry brush to brush cocoa butter onto nougatine.

Assembling The Dessert Cups

  1. When the mousse has thickened, pour it into a piping bag fit with a medium piping tip or just cut the end of your bag.pouring mango mousse into a piping bag
  2. Pipe the mousse into your cups about ¾ of the way full.
  3. Put your mango puree into a piping bag and pipe a thin layer on top of the mousse.
  4. Refrigerate the cups for a minimum of 1 hour to set up the mousse and puree.picture of completed mango mousse cup.
  5. (Optional) Cut a banana into slices and top them each with a pinch of sugar in the raw.hand adding sugar in the raw on top of banana slices.
  6. Lightly caramelize the sugar on top of the banana with a culinary torch.
  7. Place the banana on top of the mango puree and add a slice of the coconut nougatine on top. You can decorate your Coconut Mango Dessert Cups how you'd like. Chef Christophe added some gold leaf and lime zest for an extra touch.picture of mango mousse cups

FAQ

What can I use coconut mousse for? This mousse is great for piping into a mold to use for an entremet cake, or for dessert cups like this. It's not immediately as stable as some other types of mousse, so I wouldn't pipe it directly onto a layer of cake, but let it set up in a mold, and then add it to your dessert.

Can I make the mousse without gelatin? Gelatin is the thickening agent so I'd recommend not skipping it out entirely. However, you can substitute any gelatin for vegetarian gelatin.

What is the shelf life of these dessert cups? These can last for about 1 week in the fridge and up to a month in the freezer

How do you store coconut mousse? These coconut mousse dessert cups must be refrigerated after a few hours. Cover them in plastic wrap or store them in an airtight container. To prevent the coconut crisp from getting soggy, store it at room temperature and add it to the mousse when you're ready to serve. 

Can I add flavors to this mousse? This recipe would be delicious as a chocolate coconut mousse or strawberry coconut mousse. Just add some chocolate ganache, white chocolate shavings, or strawberry puree on top.

More Recipes You'll Love

Mango Entremet Cake

Southern Coconut Cake

Chocolate Mousse

Dole Whip

Coconut Custard

FAQ

What can I use coconut mousse for?

This mousse is great for piping into a mold to use for an entremet cake, or for dessert cups like this. It's not immediately as stable as some other types of mousse, so I wouldn't pipe it directly onto a layer of cake, but let it set up in a mold, and then add it to your dessert.

Can I make the mousse without gelatin?

Gelatin is the thickening agent so I'd recommend not skipping it out entirely. However, you can substitute any gelatin for vegetarian gelatin.

What is the shelf life of these dessert cups?

These can last for about 1 week in the fridge and up to a month in the freezer

How do you store coconut mousse?

These coconut mousse dessert cups must be refrigerated after a few hours. Cover them in plastic wrap or store them in an airtight container. To prevent the coconut crisp from getting soggy, store it at room temperature and add it to the mousse when you're ready to serve.

More Recipes You'll Love

Mango Entremet Cake

Southern Coconut Cake

Chocolate Mousse

Dole Whip

Coconut Custard

Recipe

coconut mousse cups
Print Recipe
4.50 from 2 votes

Coconut Mango Dessert Cups

Light and creamy coconut mango dessert cups are a delectable gluten-free summer treat. They're very easy to make and are a favorite for coconut lovers!
Prep Time15 minutes mins
Cook Time28 minutes mins
Chilling time2 hours hrs
Total Time2 hours hrs 45 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: French
Servings: 8 cups
Calories: 332kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 1 Blender or food processor
  • 1 medium saucepan
  • 1 silicone mat optional, can use parchment
  • Parchment Paper
  • 1 Sheet pan
  • 1 Whisk
  • 1 Spatula
  • 8 Dessert cups for serving
  • Food Scale for weighing ingredients

Ingredients

Mango Puree

  • 400 grams fresh or frozen mango diced
  • 2 tablespoons simple syrup ½ cup water + ½ cup sugar

Coconut Mousse

  • 7.5 grams gelatin sheets if using powder add 45 grams of water to soak in
  • 62 grams egg yolks
  • 45 grams sugar
  • 312 grams coconut milk
  • 300 grams heavy whipping cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla

Coconut Nougatine

  • 15 grams sugar
  • 0.5 grams pectin NH
  • 15 grams glucose or corn syrup
  • 27.5 grams unsalted butter
  • 27.5 grams coconut flakes unsweetened

Instructions

Mango Puree

  • To make your simple syrup, add your sugar and water into a small pot over medium heat. Bring it to a boil and cook until the sugar dissolves. Pour into a glass container to cool and store in the fridge.
  • Once the sugar syrup boils, take it off the heat and set it aside to cool down to room temperature.
  • Once it's at room temperature, pour your syrup into a container and set it aside. You can also store this on your shelf for many months, so it never hurts to make a lot and keep it stored.
  • Cut up your mangoes and dice them into chunks. Place the diced mangoes into a blender or food processor.
  • Add your simple syrup and blend everything together until it becomes a thin smoothie-like texture.
  • Strain the mix into a bowl or container to get rid of lumps and extra pulp. This makes the puree super smooth. Set this aside to use later. If you want to make this ahead of time, you can refrigerate it for a week or freeze it for up to a month.

Coconut Mousse

  • Add your cream into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Whip to a soft-medium peak.  Do not overmix, I recommend finishing the mixing by hand.
  • Soak the gelatin in cold water (blooming). Let them absorb for 1-2 minutes.
  • Add the coconut milk, and half of the sugar into a small pot over medium heat. The sugar prevents the coconut milk from burning.
  • Add in the vanilla. Whisk the mix in the pot and bring it to a boil.
  • Add the egg yolks and the other half of the sugar into a separate bowl. 
  • Whisk together until you reach a smooth texture and the sugar is dissolved.
  • Once your coconut milk mixture is boiling, temper your yolks with some of the milk by pouring ⅓ of the hot mixture into the yolks while whisking constantly. Pour everything back into the pot. 
  • Cook everything while whisking constantly until it reaches 181ºF (83ºC). About 2-5 minutes or until the mix no longer drips from your whisk. 
  • Add in your gelatin. If you're using gelatin sheets, squeeze out the excess water first.
  • OPTIONAL: Pour your mix into a separate bowl over ice to cool down the mix quickly to 20ºC-25ºC (Around 70ºC).
  • Add ⅓ of your whipped cream into your cooled coconut milk mix to make the mixture lighter. Whisk together.
  • Lightly fold in the rest of your whipped cream using a spatula. Set it aside for about an hour so the mousse can thicken. Once it becomes thick and fluffy it's ready to use. Don't let it completely set up before you pipe it into your cups.

Coconut Nougatine

  • Preheat your oven to 325º F (162º C).
  • Combine your sugar and pectin in a small bowl. Mix together.
  • Add your butter, corn syrup, and sugar/pectin mixture into a medium-sized pot over medium heat until it begins to simmer.
  • Reduce your heat to low, then add in your coconut. Mix with a spatula until combined.  
  • Pour the nougatine onto a silicone mat over a sheet pan and spread out with an offset spatula as thin as the coconut flakes are. You can use parchment if you don't have a silicone mat.
  • Bake in the oven for about 10 minutes or until golden brown. 
  • Using a circle cutter or a knife, cut the nougatine right away. (Once it cools down it will set and be too hard to cut.)
  • (Optional) Brush the nougatine with a thin layer of melted cocoa butter using a pastry brush. This protects the nougatine from getting soggy. Set aside for decoration later.

Assembling the Dessert Cups

  • Pipe the mousse into your cups about ¾ of the way full.
  • Put your mango puree into a piping bag and pipe a thin layer on top of the mousse.
  • Refrigerate the cups for a minimum of 1 hour to set up the mousse and puree.
  • (Optional) Cut a banana into slices and top them each with a pinch of sugar in the raw.
  • Lightly caramelize the sugar on top with a blow torch.
  • Place the banana on top of the mango puree and add a slice of the coconut nougatine on top. You can decorate your Coconut Mango Dessert Cups how you'd like. Chef Christophe added some gold leaf and lime zest for an extra touch.

Notes

*** I recommend making the mango puree first, followed by the mousse and then the coconut nougatine while the mousse is setting.
  • Weigh your ingredients to avoid failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  • Make sure all your cold ingredients are room temperature or slightly warm (butter, milk, eggs, to create a cohesive batter. Curdled batter causes cakes and fillings to collapse or split.
  • Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
Ingredients Tips And Substitutions
Mango: Make sure to buy them pretty ripe so they are soft, sweet, and easy to slice. To pick the perfect mango press on them lightly and if they feel slightly soft (not too soft) then they are ready to use! You can also buy frozen mango.
Coconut flakes: To make our coconut nougatine we need flakes for texture and flavor. We are using unsweetened for this recipe because we are adding sugar to our components. You can use sweetened if you would like, just make sure to adjust your sugar measurement so you don't make your recipe too sweet.
Pectin NH: Pectin is a thickening agent that is used in many jams, spreads, and compotes. It is what helps thicken your sauce to become more pliable and gives it that jam texture. You can usually find it in the grocery store or you can order it online.
Gelatin: We are using 200 bloom gelatin sheets because sheets will create a transparent and extra shiny product. You can use gelatin powder since it's easier to find, but you can order sheets online.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cup | Calories: 332kcal | Carbohydrates: 16g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 29g | Saturated Fat: 20g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 0.1g | Cholesterol: 133mg | Sodium: 28mg | Potassium: 154mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 13g | Vitamin A: 749IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 45mg | Iron: 2mg
Stacked cake with homestead-style textures and topiary treats

July 1, 2022 Course Preview

Homestead Cake Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Jennifer Reese from Good Gosh Ganache brings us a clean and classic cake design featuring several homestead textures that will make your traditional wedding and birthday cakes stand out and wow the party-goers.

Jennifer breaks down several unique techniques and textures on each tier including: a custom 3D monogram, a beautiful fondant gradient technique that doesn't use an airbrush, a decorated cake board made to look like cobblestone with edible moss, a painted wooden shiplap texture, and topiary treats.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

1:11:44 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a cake featuring home-finisihed styles and textures
  • Learn how to make a custom 3D monogram
  • How to make a fondant gradient without an airbrush
  • Learn how to make edible cobblestones and edible moss
  • How to make shiplap texture and topiary treats

Stacked cake with homestead-style textures and topiary treats

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Making The Cakeboard 0:51
  2. Adding The Moss To The Cakeboard 7:23
  3. Paneling The Shiplap Tier 12:20
  4. Adding Shiplap Impressions 19:56
  5. Adding Dust And Glaze 22:03
  6. Applying The Crest 25:17
  7. Building The Crest 36:29
  8. Making The Fondant Gradient 41:49
  9. Paneling The Cake 51:16
  10. Adding Edible Moss 57:29
  11. Making The Chocolate Pot 59:53
  12. Filling The Treat 1:03:15
  13. Building The Plant 1:05:15
  14. Adding Edible Moss To The Plant 1:09:20

Downloads

Materials List

Monogram Template

Homestead Cake Sketch

Stacked cake with homestead-style textures and topiary treats

July 1, 2022 Paid Video

Homestead Cake

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Jennifer Reese from Good Gosh Ganache brings us a clean and classic cake design featuring several homestead textures that will make your traditional wedding and birthday cakes stand out and wow the party-goers.

Jennifer breaks down several unique techniques and textures on each tier including: a custom 3D monogram, a beautiful fondant gradient technique that doesn't use an airbrush, a decorated cake board made to look like cobblestone with edible moss, a painted wooden shiplap texture, and topiary treats.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

1:11:44 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a cake featuring home-finisihed styles and textures
  • Learn how to make a custom 3D monogram
  • How to make a fondant gradient without an airbrush
  • Learn how to make edible cobblestones and edible moss
  • How to make shiplap texture and topiary treats

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Making The Cakeboard 0:51
  2. Adding The Moss To The Cakeboard 7:23
  3. Paneling The Shiplap Tier 12:20
  4. Adding Shiplap Impressions 19:56
  5. Adding Dust And Glaze 22:03
  6. Applying The Crest 25:17
  7. Building The Crest 36:29
  8. Making The Fondant Gradient 41:49
  9. Paneling The Cake 51:16
  10. Adding Edible Moss 57:29
  11. Making The Chocolate Pot 59:53
  12. Filling The Treat 1:03:15
  13. Building The Plant 1:05:15
  14. Adding Edible Moss To The Plant 1:09:20

Downloads

Materials List

Monogram Template

Homestead Cake Sketch

cake sculpted to look like a six-pack of soda or beer

June 15, 2022 Course Preview

Portable Six-Pack Cake Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Mitchie Curran is back for another edible creation featuring a pick-up-and-go six-pack cake! In this tutorial, Mitchie breaks down how to make a portable six-pack cake, featuring edible isomalt bottles, hand-made edible labels and designs using Canva and how to put it all together to create a fabulous cake perfect for Father's Day.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

1:46:42 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make an edible six-pack cake that you can actually pick up and carry around
  • Learn how to make the edible soda bottles
  • How to hand-letter and paint the labels and signage
  • Learn how to use Canva to quickly make custom edible designs

Cake sculpted to look like a portable six-pack of soda or beer

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Supplies And Ingredients 1:03
  2. Building Structure 3:44
  3. Stacking Cake 11:19
  4. Coloring The Modeling Chocolate 18:07
  5. How To Cast Isomalt Into Molds 19:18
  6. Cutting The Templates 38:01
  7. Creating Graphics 41:22
  8. Hand Painting Labels 47:22
  9. Paneling Cake 1:03:28
  10. Attaching Labels 1:23:52
  11. Decorating Bottles 1:28:24
  12. Final Assembly 1:42:39

Downloads

Materials List

Six-Pack Template 01

Six-Pack Template 02

cake sculpted to look like a six-pack of soda or beer

June 15, 2022 Paid Video

Portable Six-Pack Cake

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Mitchie Curran is back for another edible creation featuring a pick-up-and-go six-pack cake! In this tutorial, Mitchie breaks down how to make a portable six-pack cake, featuring edible isomalt bottles, hand-made edible labels and designs using Canva and how to put it all together to create a fabulous cake perfect for Father's Day.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

1:46:42 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make an edible six-pack cake that you can actually pick up and carry around
  • Learn how to make the edible soda bottles
  • How to hand-letter and paint the labels and signage
  • Learn how to use Canva to quickly make custom edible designs

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Supplies And Ingredients 1:03
  2. Building Structure 3:44
  3. Stacking Cake 11:19
  4. Coloring The Modeling Chocolate 18:07
  5. How To Cast Isomalt Into Molds 19:18
  6. Cutting The Templates 38:01
  7. Creating Graphics 41:22
  8. Hand Painting Labels 47:22
  9. Paneling Cake 1:03:28
  10. Attaching Labels 1:23:52
  11. Decorating Bottles 1:28:24
  12. Final Assembly 1:42:39

Downloads

Materials List

Six-Pack Template 01

Six-Pack Template 02

close up of a slice of s'mores cake

June 14, 2022 4th of July

Ultimate S'mores Cake With Toasted Marshmallow Fluff Frosting

This S'mores Cake is three moist cake layers of graham cracker cake, filled with toasted marshmallow frosting, graham cracker crumble, and milk chocolate ganache. One bite of this cake and you'll be transported straight back to your summer campfire.

Close up of s'mores cake with a slice being removed

I didn't want this S'mores cake to just look like a giant S'more, I really wanted it to FEEL like you're biting right into a freshly toasted S'more. To achieve this, not only did I include actual graham cracker crumbs that give you that satisfying crunch but I also added toasted marshmallow fluff to the buttercream and more toasted marshmallows to the top of the cake. The more you toast them, the more flavor you will have in your buttercream. This is the secret ingredient to the ultimate S'mores cake!

Did you know? The "S" in S'mores is short for "some more" as in "give me some more of that yummy dessert!" Originally called a graham cracker sandwich. It became very popular with boy scouts and girl scouts and soon after, an American tradition.

What's In This Blog Post

  • S'mores Cake Ingredients
  • Tips For Success
  • How to Make S'mores Cake
    • Making The Graham Cracker Cake
    • Making The Graham Cracker Crumble
    • Making The Toasted Marshmallow Frosting
    • Making The Hershey's Chocolate Ganache
  • Assembling The S'mores Cake
  • Decorating The S'mores Cake
  • FAQ
  • Related Recipes

S'mores Cake Ingredients

smores cake ingedients

Graham Crackers: No S'mores cake is complete without some graham crackers. To me, Honey Maid graham crackers are the only choice but feel free to use any graham crackers you like.

Hershey's Chocolate: Again, we are going with that classic S'mores flavor and to me, nothing but Hershey's milk chocolate will do but again, you can use any kind of chocolate that you really like. If you want more chocolate flavor inside your cake, sprinkle some chocolate chips in between the layers with the graham cracker crumbs.

Marshmallow Fluff: This is the secret to the best tasting S'mores cake! You can buy a jar of marshmallow creme from the store and toast it just like regular marshmallows. Marshmallow fluff is much softer than a regular marshmallow so it's easy to mix into your buttercream.

Tips For Success

  1. Is this your first time decorating a cake? Watch my free video tutorial on how to decorate a cake for the first time.Click on this image to go to the how to decorate your first cake tutorial
  2. This cake uses a mixing method called the reverse creaming method. The dry ingredients are coated in the butter before being mixed with the liquid ingredients and you mix for much longer than you do with a traditional mixing method.
  3. Use a kitchen scale to weigh your ingredients for the best results. Baking is a science!
  4. I used a stand mixer to make my cakes but you can also use a hand-held electric mixer. If you use a hand-mixer then you may need to mix for longer to achieve the same batter consistency.
  5. Room temperature ingredients are important. Make sure your buttermilk and eggs are slightly warm and your butter is soft but not melted so that your ingredients mix together properly.
  6. I like using a kitchen torch to toast my marshmallows but if you don't have one you can toast them in the broiler the same as you do with the fluff.

How to Make S'mores Cake

There are 4 different components of this cake, the graham cracker cake, graham cracker crumble, toasted marshmallow buttercream, and chocolate ganache. I recommend making the cake layers a day in advance, or at least first so that they have time to cool.

Making The Graham Cracker Cake

  1. Preheat your oven to 350º F and prep three 6-inch cake pans (or two 8-inch pans) with cake goop or your preferred pan release. 
  2. Add your milk, eggs, yolks, vegetable oil, and vanilla into a small bowl. Give it a quick whisk with a hand whisk and set aside. hand pouring measuring cup filled with eggs into measuring cup filled with buttermilk.
  3. Add your flour, sugar, crushed graham crackers, baking soda, baking powder, and salt into the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment. hand pouring bowl of graham crackers into stand mixer bowl.
  4. Mix your flour mixture for a couple of seconds on low speed to incorporate all the ingredients together.hand holding mixed dry ingredients above stand mixer bowl.
  5. Add your room temperature butter to your flour mixture. Mix on low speed for 1-2 minutes or until the texture begins to look like coarse sand
  6. Add ⅓ of your wet ingredients into your flour mixture and mix on medium speed for 2 minutes. Make sure to stop and scrape the bowl in between.hand pouring measuring cup of wet ingredients into bowl.
  7. While mixing on low, stream in the rest of your milk mixture and then increase the speed to medium speed and mix until combined. picture of spatula covered in cake batter.
  8.  Divide your batter evenly into your cake pans. PRO TIP: You can use a scale to divide your cake batter evenly between the cake pans for even layers!picture of cake batter inside pans.
  9. Bake the cake layers for about 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick comes out clean from the center. If you are making a larger cake with more batter then the cake will take longer to bake.
  10. Allow your cakes to cool in the pans until the pans are barely warm to the touch before flipping them out onto a cooling rack to cool fully. I like to put my cake layers into the freezer to cool down faster so I can decorate right away. This takes about an hour. You do not need to wrap your cakes in plastic wrap unless you are freezing them overnight.

Making The Graham Cracker Crumble

  1. Add your crushed graham crackers and melted butter into a large bowl and mix with a spatula to combine. hand pouring bowl of melted butter into graham cracker crust.
  2. Place the crumble onto a baking sheet and bake it in the oven for 6-8 minutes. hand holding spatula spreading graham cracker crust on to sheetpan.
  3. Let it cool down to room temperature and set it aside. We will use this for our crunchy filling and toppings.

Making The Toasted Marshmallow Frosting

  1. Place the marshmallow fluff on a baking sheet and spread it as thin and as even as you can with a spatula (this helps toast the maximum amount of fluff).Hand using spatula to spread marshmallow fluff on to sheet pan.
  2. Turn your oven on broil and place the sheet in the oven for about 2-5 minutes depending on how hot your oven is and how much you want it toasted. (Keep an eye on it and watch until it gets a dark golden brown color, then take it out.)picture of toasted marshmallow on sheet pan.
  3. Once your marshmallow fluff is toasted, let it cool for 2-5 minutes until the pan is cool to the touch, then scrape it into your bowl of buttercream with a spatula (If the marshmallow is too warm, it will melt your buttercream). I'm using my easy buttercream recipe, but you can use any recipe that you like. hands using spatula to scrape marshmallow into buttercream.
  4. To make easy buttercream, place your egg whites, salt, and powdered sugar into the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment.hand pouring egg whites into bowl of stand mixer
  5. Mix on high for five minutes to dissolve the powdered sugar.
  6. Add in your softened butter and vanilla extract. Continue mixing on high for 8-10 minutes or until the buttercream is light and fluffy and no longer tastes like butter.stand mixer whisking frosting
  7. Add in your toasted marshmallow fluff and mix until combined.Spatula covered in marshmallow buttercream.
  8. Switch to the paddle attachment and mix on low for 5-10 minutes to remove air bubbles.

Making The Hershey's Chocolate Ganache

  1. Place your Hershey's Chocolate in a medium bowl and place it in the Microwave for about 15 seconds to soften it.
  2. Heat your cream in the microwave in 30-second increments until it's very warm.
  3. Pour your hot cream onto the chocolate and leave it to melt for about one minute.pouring hot cream onto chocolate chips
  4. Whisk the cream and chocolate together with a whisk until they are combined smoothly. Set it aside until you are ready to use it.close up of ganache in a glass bowl with a whisk

Assembling The S'mores Cake

  1. OPTIONAL: Trim the brown edges off your cakes and the top dome so you get a cleaner look when slicing. 
  2. Place your first cake layer on a cake board matching the size of your cake.
  3. Place a layer of chocolate ganache onto your first layer of cake and smooth it with an offset spatula.spreading ganache onto a cake layer
  4. Add a scoop of marshmallow buttercream on top of the ganache and spread it out evenly. spreading marshmallow frosting onto a cake layer with ganache
  5. Then sprinkle a layer of graham cracker crust on top of the buttercream.graham cracker crumbs on buttercream
  6. Place your second layer of cake on top and repeat the process. adding buttercream on top of ganache cake
  7. Place your third cake layer on top and create a crumb coat by smoothing a thin layer of marshmallow buttercream all around the cake. Place in the fridge for 15-30 minutes until the cake is firm to the touch.adding the buttercream with a bench scraper
  8. Apply a final coat of buttercream to the sides of the cake and smooth it with a bench scraper and offset spatula. Do the same thing to the top. Place the cake in the fridge to set the buttercream before doing your final decoration.adding the final coat of buttercream with an offset spatula

Decorating The S'mores Cake

  1. The ganache drip works best at about 90ºF. If yours is hot, make sure you let it cool down before you use it. If yours is too cold, re-warm it in the microwave until it's about 90ºF.
  2. Fill a piping bag with the ganache and pipe it onto the edges of the chilled cake, letting it drip down the sides.piping ganache around a cake
  3. Use the leftovers to fill in the center and smooth it out with a spoon or offset spatula.
  4. Pick up your cake from the bottom and spread the graham cracker crust all over the bottom rim of your cake. PRO TIP: Have a baking sheet or parchment underneath to catch the escapees.adding graham cracker crumbles to the bottom of the cake
  5. Top with toasted marshmallows and more graham cracker crust crumbles.adding final details to the s'mores cake
  6. This can be served right away or made a few days ahead. It will hold up n the fridge for about a week, and about a month in the freezer, but I would add the marshmallow decor the day of so they don't become stale. close up of a slice of s'mores cake

FAQ

What can I use instead of graham crackers?

The graham crackers are for flavor but if you don't want to use them you can replace them with crushed cookies of your choice. This is also a good way to mix up the flavors of the cake!

Can this be made with chocolate cake instead?

I think the chocolate overwhelms the flavor but if you really like chocolate you can definitely use it instead. I recommend my easy chocolate cake which is made with Hershey's cocoa powder.

Can you use this to make s'mores cupcakes?

Yes, you can make this batter into cupcakes. Fill the cupcake liners half full and bake for 12-15 minutes or until the center is set.

Can I use cake flour instead of all-purpose flour?

I tested this recipe with cake flour and it collapsed. Because we are replacing half the flour with graham crackers we need that extra gluten development from the all-purpose flour.

Related Recipes

Ice Cream Cake

Oreo Cake

Easy Chocolate Cake

Funfetti Birthday Cake

Recipe

close up of a slice of s'mores cake
Print Recipe
4.82 from 65 votes

S'mores Cake With Toasted Marshmallow Frosting

The ultimate S'mores cake! Super soft and moist graham cracker cake layered with a toasted marshmallow fluff frosting, crunchy graham cracker crumbly, and a gooey chocolate drip. You'll be instantly transported to that summer campfire with every bite.
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Total Time55 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8 cups
Calories: 1714kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 1 Kitchen torch
  • 3 6" round cake pans or two 8" cake pans
  • 1 Piping Bag

Ingredients

Graham Cracker Cake Recipe

  • 7 ounces all-purpose flour
  • 7 ounces finely crushed graham cracker crumbs
  • 12 ounces granulated sugar
  • 2 teaspoons baking powder
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 6 ounces unsalted butter room temperature
  • 2 large eggs room temperature
  • 3 large egg yolks room temperature
  • 8 ounces whole milk room temperature
  • 2 ounces vegetable oil
  • 1 Tablespoon vanilla extract

Ganache

  • 12 ounces Hershey's chocolate chips
  • 4 ounces heavy whipping cream

Graham Cracker Crumble

  • 8 ounces roughly crushed graham crackers
  • 4 ounces melted butter

Toasted Marshmallow Fluff Buttercream

  • 13 ounces marshmallow fluff
  • 6 ounces pasteurized egg whites
  • 24 ounces powdered sugar
  • 24 ounces unsalted butter softened but not melted
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ½ teaspoon salt
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Graham Cracker Cake Instructions

  • NOTE: It is SUPER IMPORTANT that all the room temperature ingredients listed above are room temperature and not cold so that the ingredients mix and incorporate correctly. 
  • Preheat your oven to 350º F and prep three 6-inch cake pans (or two 8-inch pans) with cake goop or your preferred pan release. 
  • Add your milk, eggs, yolks, vegetable oil, and vanilla into a small bowl. Give it a quick whisk with a hand whisk and set aside. 
  • Add your flour, sugar, crushed graham crackers, baking soda, baking powder, and salt into the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment. 
  • Mix your flour mixture for a couple of seconds on low speed to incorporate all the ingredients together.
  • Add your room temperature butter to your flour mixture. Mix on low speed for 1-2 minutes or until the texture begins to look like coarse sand.
  • Add ⅓ of your wet ingredients into your flour mixture and mix on medium speed for 2 minutes. Make sure to stop and scrape the bowl in between.
  • While mixing on low, stream in the rest of your milk mixture and then increase the speed to medium speed and mix until combined. 
  • Divide your batter evenly into your cake pans. PRO TIP: You can use a scale to divide your cake batter evenly between the cake pans for even layers!
  • Bake the cake layers for about 35-40 minutes or until a toothpick comes out clean from the center. If you are making a larger cake with more batter then the cake will take longer to bake.
  • Allow your cakes to cool in the pans until the pans are barely warm to the touch before flipping them out onto a cooling rack to cool fully. I like to put my cake layers into the freezer to cool down faster so I can decorate right away. This takes about an hour. You do not need to wrap your cakes in plastic wrap unless you are freezing them overnight.

Graham Cracker Crumble

  • Add your crushed graham crackers and melted butter into a large bowl and mix with a spatula to combine. 
  • Place the crumble onto a baking sheet and bake it in your oven for 6-8 minutes. 
  • Let it cool down to room temperature and set it aside. We will use this for our crunchy filling and toppings.

Toasted Marshmallow Frosting

  • Place the marshmallow fluff on a baking sheet and spread it as thin and as even as you can with a spatula (this helps toast the maximum amount of fluff).
  • Turn your oven on broil and place the sheet in the oven for about 2-5 minutes depending on how hot your oven is and how much you want it toasted. ( Keep an eye on it and watch until it gets a dark golden brown color, then take it out.)
  • Once your marshmallow fluff is toasted, let it cool for 2-5 minutes until it's cool to the touch, then scrape it into your bowl of buttercream with a spatula (If the marshmallow is too warm, it will melt your buttercream). 
  • Place your egg whites, salt, and powdered sugar into the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment.
  • Mix on high for five minutes to dissolve the powdered sugar.
  • Add in your softened butter and vanilla extract. Continue mixing on high for 8-10 minutes or until the buttercream is light and fluffy and no longer tastes like butter.
  • Add in your toasted marshmallow fluff and mix until combined.
  • Switch to the paddle attachment and mix on low for 5-10 minutes to remove air bubbles.

Hershey's Ganache

  • Place your Hershey's Chocolate in a medium bowl and place it in the Microwave for about 15 seconds to soften it.
  • Heat your cream in the microwave in 30-second increments until it's very warm.
  • Pour your hot cream onto the chocolate and leave it to melt for about one minute.
  • Whisk the cream and chocolate together with a whisk until they are combined smoothly. Set it aside until you are ready to use it

How To Decorate The S'MORES CAKE

  • Place your first cake layer on a cake board matching the size of your cake.
  • Place a layer of chocolate ganache onto your first layer of cake and smooth it with an offset spatula.
  • Add a Scoop of marshmallow buttercream on top of the ganache and spread it out evenly.
  • Then sprinkle a layer of graham cracker crust on top of the buttercream.
  • Place your second layer of cake on top and repeat the process. 
  • Place your third cake layer on top and create a crumb coat by smoothing a thin layer of marshmallow buttercream all around the cake. Place in the fridge for 15-30 minutes until the cake is firm to the touch.
  • Apply a final coat of buttercream to the sides of the cake and smooth it with a bench scraper and offset spatula. Do the same thing to the top. Place the cake in the fridge to set the buttercream before doing your final decoration.
  • Fill a piping bag with the ganache and pipe it onto the edges of the chilled cake, letting it drip down the sides.
  • Pick up your cake from the bottom and spread the graham cracker crust all over the bottom rim of your cake. PRO TIP: Have a baking sheet or parchment underneath to catch the escapees.
  • Top with toasted marshmallows and more graham cracker crust crumbles.

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start
  1. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  3. Need more help with making your first cake? Check out my how to decorate your first cake blog post. 
  4. Make sure all of your cold ingredients (e.g. butter, eggs, milk) are at room temperature or a little warm. Why? Because we want to create an emulsion and allow the ingredients to fully mix together. 
  5. Make your own pan release (cake goop!) The best pan release ever! 
  6. Chill your cakes before frosting and filling. You can cover a frosted and chilled cake in fondant if you wish. This cake is also great for stacking!
  7. A Chocolate cake would also be great with marshmallow buttercream if you're not a fan of graham cracker cake. 
  8. If you don't have pasteurized egg whites, you can make Swiss meringue buttercream or pasteurize them yourself. 
 
 

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 1714kcal | Carbohydrates: 188g | Protein: 10g | Fat: 107g | Saturated Fat: 67g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 5g | Monounsaturated Fat: 28g | Trans Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 394mg | Sodium: 756mg | Potassium: 241mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 156g | Vitamin A: 3610IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 137mg | Iron: 1mg
Cake sculpted to look like a flamingo pool floaty with pineapple drink

June 1, 2022 Course Preview

Flamingo Cake Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor and resident Food Producer Erin Fale has an awesome Flamingo pool floaty cake, complete with an awesome pineapple drink and edible umbrella!

If you've wanted to try out sculpting a cake into a magnificent work of art but were feeling nervous about how to start learning sculpting, this tutorial is perfect for you. Erin tackles this tricky cake in a beginner-friendly fashion while offering tips and tricks that make the process a breeze.

1:09:31 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a gravity-defying flamingo pool floaty out of edible materials
  • Learn how to decorate and construct a cake board in a custom backyard pool shape
  • How to make the pineapple drink
  • Learn how to work with wafer paper to make edible umbrellas
  • All of Erin's tips and tricks to get the plastic look of the floaty and pineapple texture just right

Cake sculpted to look like a flamingo pool floaty with a pineapple drink

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Introduction 0:56
  2. Making The Wafer Paper Umbrella 2:46
  3. Shaping The Flamingo Head 11:40
  4. Stacking The Flamingo Cakes 17:36
  5. Carving The Cakes 20:09
  6. Crumb Coating The Cakes 23:08
  7. Covering The Cakes In Fondant 27:14
  8. Covering The Pool Floaty In Fondant 31:05
  9. Texturing The Pool Floaty 33:31
  10. Making The Pina Colada 35:07
  11. Shaving And Trimming The Head 38:51
  12. Covering The Board In Fondant 41:40
  13. Covering The Head In Fondant 47:06
  14. Making The Wings 51:41
  15. Painting The Pineapple 54:02
  16. Putting The Flamingo Together 56:31
  17. Detailing The Flamingo 58:14
  18. Adding The Pina Colada 1:00:10
  19. Making The Garnishes 1:02:14
  20. Adding The Garnishes 1:06:55

Downloads

Materials List

Cake sculpted to look like a flamingo pool floaty with pineapple drink

June 1, 2022 Paid Video

Flamingo Cake

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor and resident Food Producer Erin Fale has an awesome Flamingo pool floaty cake, complete with an awesome pineapple drink and edible umbrella!

If you've wanted to try out sculpting a cake into a magnificent work of art but were feeling nervous about how to start learning sculpting, this tutorial is perfect for you. Erin tackles this tricky cake in a beginner-friendly fashion while offering tips and tricks that make the process a breeze.

1:09:31 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a gravity-defying flamingo pool floaty out of edible materials
  • Learn how to decorate and construct a cake board in a custom backyard pool shape
  • How to make the pineapple drink
  • Learn how to work with wafer paper to make edible umbrellas
  • All of Erin's tips and tricks to get the plastic look of the floaty and pineapple texture just right

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Introduction 0:56
  2. Making The Wafer Paper Umbrella 2:46
  3. Shaping The Flamingo Head 11:40
  4. Stacking The Flamingo Cakes 17:36
  5. Carving The Cakes 20:09
  6. Crumb Coating The Cakes 23:08
  7. Covering The Cakes In Fondant 27:14
  8. Covering The Pool Floaty In Fondant 31:05
  9. Texturing The Pool Floaty 33:31
  10. Making The Pina Colada 35:07
  11. Shaving And Trimming The Head 38:51
  12. Covering The Board In Fondant 41:40
  13. Covering The Head In Fondant 47:06
  14. Making The Wings 51:41
  15. Painting The Pineapple 54:02
  16. Putting The Flamingo Together 56:31
  17. Detailing The Flamingo 58:14
  18. Adding The Pina Colada 1:00:10
  19. Making The Garnishes 1:02:14
  20. Adding The Garnishes 1:06:55

Downloads

Materials List

close up picture of mille-feuille

May 19, 2022 Pastries

Mille-feuille

This super flakey and delicious Mille-feuille is a traditional French pastry with a twist. Chef Christophe Rull's recipe is composed of thin and buttery puff pastry layers, sweet vanilla bean pastry cream, and topped with an airy vanilla chantilly cream. picture of decorated mille-feuille.

Similar to a Napoleon, Christophe decided to add a chantilly cream on top instead of the traditional chocolate icing to give this pastry an all-around airy bite. It pairs great with the smooth pastry cream and flakey puff pastry layers. The layers are crispy enough to stand on their side to show all the components in a sophisticated way.

What's In This Blog Post?

  • Mille-feuille Ingredients
    • Puff Pastry Ingredients
    • Pastry Cream Ingredients
    • Vanilla Chantilly Cream Ingredients
  • Puff Pastry Step-By-Step
  • Pastry Cream Step-By-Step
  • Vanilla Bean Chantilly Cream Step-By-Step
  • Assembling The Mille-feuille
  • FAQ
  • More Recipes You'll Love

Mille-feuille Ingredients

Puff Pastry Ingredients

picture of puff pastry ingredients.

High Gluten Flour: For this recipe we want to use high gluten flour because the more gluten we have the more elasticity will have so the layers can form properly.

Pastry Cream Ingredients

Picture of pastry cream ingredients.

Vanilla Bean: This recipe is very vanilla based, therefore we want an intense vanilla flavor. Using vanilla beans will give us the flavor and look we want, but if you dont have any on hand I recommend using vanilla paste. You can get Neilson Massey vanilla beans or paste.

Vanilla Chantilly Cream Ingredients

picture of vanilla chantilly cream

Puff Pastry Step-By-Step

  1. Place the bread flour, salt, cold water, and melted butter into the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment.  Mix on low speed until everything is just combined. I'm using a high gluten flour (bread flour) to add more structure to the dough, you can also use all-purpose flour.hands holding container of butter placing butter into stand mixer.
  2. Now add your cold, diced butter. Make sure to not over-mix, we want to see pieces of butter in the dough (this will create the flakiness we want). hand holding stand mixer filled with dough.
  3. Use your hands to knead your dough just a little bit to combine it all together. hands kneading dough.
  4. Wrap the dough in plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 2 hours.dough wrapped in plastic wrap
  5. Once your dough is chilled, flour your table, take the dough out of the fridge and roll it out in a long rectangle that is about 24" long and 8" wide.picture of rolled out dough.
  6. Give it the first book fold by folding each end towards the middle making sure the ends meet. hands folding dough.
  7. Do your second book fold by folding the dough in half along the seam and closing the ends like a book. (Hence the term book fold.) Turn it a quarter of a turn.hands folding dough/
  8. Repeat the same process once more by rolling out your dough to do a second book fold. If your dough is bouncing back at the edges and is not rolling out easily, your gluten needs to relax. Wrap the dough and put it back in the refrigerator for an hour and try again. Also if your dough is too soft and warm, put your dough back in the fridge for 30 minutes.hands folding dough.
  9. Once your second book fold is completed, wrap and rest your dough for 30 to 60 minutes in the fridge.
  10. Once your dough is chilled, cut it in half. This recipe will make 8 mille-feuille, but most sheet pans will only be able to fit enough puff pastry dough for 4 at a time.Picture of Puff pastry layers.
  11. With your first half of the dough, flour your table and roll the dough to the size of the sheet pan you will use to bake on. I'm using a 9"x13" sheet pan and am rolling the dough to ⅛" thick. hands rolling dough with rolling pin.
  12. Trim the edges of your dough with a knife. Make sure to cut straight up and down so that it doesn't seal the edges of the layers.hands using knife to trim dough.
  13. Using your rolling pin, roll your dough onto the back side of your sheet pan upside down.hands using rolling pin to roll dough.hands rolling dough on to ssheetpan
  14. Use a docker or a fork to poke small holes in the dough to avoid the dough to over develop in the oven.hand using fork to create small holes in dough.
  15. Place a piece of parchment paper on top of the dough, then place another sheet pan right side up on top. This will make sure your dough remains flat in the oven. dough in between two sheetpans.
  16. Bake at 360°F for 20-30 minutes until the edges are golden brown. While your puff pastry is cooling, make your pastry cream.picture of baked puff pastry.

Pastry Cream Step-By-Step

  1. Place your milk, scraped vanilla bean, and half of your sugar in a medium-sized pot over medium heat. Bring it to a boil.hand pouring milk into pot.
  2. Add your egg yolks, the other half of the sugar, and the cornstarch to a separate bowl. hands adding cornstarch into mixing bowl.
  3. Whisk your yolk mixture together to form a ribbon texture. hands holding bowl of egg yolks with whisk
  4. Once your milk mixture comes to a boil, pour some of the milk into the yolk mixture and whisk together. This is called tempering your yolks. hands pouring yolks into pot.
  5. Pour the yolk mixture back into the pot and boil everything for about 1 minute while constantly whisking. whisk over pot of pastry cream.
  6. Pour your pastry cream into a bowl and cover it with plastic wrap touching the cream to avoid forming a skin. Refrigerate it for at least 30 minutes before using it to let everything set up.  hands covering bowl of pastry cream with plastic wrap.

Vanilla Bean Chantilly Cream Step-By-Step

  1. Add your cream and scraped vanilla bean into a mixing bowl.hand pouring cream into bowl wth vanilla
  2. Strain your cream and vanilla mix by pouring the bowl over a strainer into the bowl of your stand mixer. This will remove the fibers of the vanilla bean while keeping all the good flavor.Hand pouring bowl of cream into stand mixer bowl over strainer.
  3. Add in your powdered sugar.hand pouring bowl of powdered sugar into stand mixer.
  4. Mix everything together on medium-high speed until you reach stiff peaks. You want it to be stable, but not curdled. Use it right away or place it in the fridge until you are ready to use it.spatula covered in chantilly cream.

Assembling The Mille-feuille

  1. Trim the edges of your puff pastry with a serrated knife.hand using knife to trim the edges of puff pastry.
  2. Cut the dough into 1 ½ inches by 4 inch rectangles. (PRO TIP: Use a ruler to ensure you cut straight edges.)hand using knife and ruler to cut rectangles.picture of cut rectangles of puff pastry
  3. Prepare a piping bag with a medium round tip. Fill your piping bag with the pastry cream.Hand using spatula to fill piping bag with pastry cream.
  4. Pipe 3 lines of pastry cream in rows to cover your entire layer of puff pastry. Pro-tip: at the end of the piping, stop squeezing and press down to have clean lines.hand using piping bag to pipe pastry cream onto puff pastry.
  5. Place a rectangle of puff pastry on top and repeat the process. hand piping pastry cream onto puff pastry.
  6. OPTIONAL: Dust a generous amount of powdered sugar on your top layer of puff pastry. Torch it to caramelize the sugar. hand using torch to torch sugar on top of puff pastry.
  7. Prepare a piping bag with a St. Honore metal tip (or you can use a rose tip) and fill with your chantilly cream.hand holding piping bag filled with chantilly cream.
  8. Carefully flip your Mille-feuille onto their side. You can leave them flat if you'd like but this way looks fancier.hands flipping mille-feuille ontoit's side.
  9. Pipe your chantilly cream using a back and forth motion with your hand.hand piping chantilly cream on to mille-feuille.
  10. Decorate however you'd like. Chef Christophe topped his with raspberries! These are best served within 24 hours of making to preserve crispness. They tend to get soggy past this due to the puff pastry soaking up the moisture from the puff pastry.picture of plate of mille-feuilles in a row.

FAQ

Why is it called Mille-feuille?

It's a French term for "a thousand leaves (or sheets)" due to the many thin leaf-like crispy layers in the puff pastry.

What is the shelf life of a Mille-feuille?

These are best served fresh and to be eaten within 24 hours of making. Due to the puff pastry being able to soak up the moisture of its filling, t tends to become soggy past 24 hours. If you want to plan ahead you can make all the components separately and freeze them, then assemble them the day of serving.

Can I fill a Mille-feuille with anything besides pastry cream?

The traditional filling is pastry cream but you can fill it with a mousse, diplomat cream, whipped cream, or anything you'd like. You can top it how you'd like as well.

Is a Mille-feuille the same as a vanilla slice?

When it comes to the components they are pretty much the same. A Mille-feuille is served to be more decorative and can have multiple layers and fillings while a vanilla slice is typically vanilla custard only.

More Recipes You'll Love

Crème Brûlée

Mini Pavlova with Berry Chantilly Cream

Chocolate Soufflé with Crème Anglaise

Lemon Tarts

Recipe

close up picture of mille-feuille
Print Recipe
4 from 3 votes

Mille-feuille

Learn how to make and assemble Chef Christophe Rull's traditional Mille-feuille recipe but with a twist!
Prep Time2 hours hrs
Cook Time20 minutes mins
Chilling Time4 hours hrs
Total Time6 hours hrs 50 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: French
Servings: 8 pastries
Calories: 562kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 1 st honore metal piping tip optional
  • 1 Rolling Pin

Ingredients

Puff Pastry Dough

  • 170 grams water
  • 50 grams melted butter
  • 12 grams salt
  • 340 grams high gluten flour (bread flour) AP flour will also work
  • 230 grams butter cold and diced

Vanilla Bean Pastry Cream

  • 250 grams milk
  • 1 unit vanilla bean scraped
  • 50 grams egg yolks
  • 40 grams sugar
  • 20 grams cornstarch

Vanilla Bean Chantilly Cream

  • 250 grams heavy whipping cream
  • 25 grams powdered sugar
  • 1 unit vanilla bean scraped
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Puff Pastry Step-By-Step

  • Place the bread flour, salt, cold water, and melted butter into the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment.  Mix on low speed until everything is just combined. I'm using a high gluten flour (bread flour) to add more structure to the dough, you can also use all-purpose flour.
  • Now add your cold, diced butter. Make sure to not over mix, we want to see pieces of butter in the dough (this will create the flakiness we want).
  • Use your hands to knead your dough just a little bit to combine it all together.
  • Wrap the dough in plastic wrap and refrigerate for at least 2 hours.
  • Once your dough is chilled, flour your table, take the dough out of the fridge and roll it out in a long rectangle that is about 24" long and 8" wide.
  • Give it the first book fold by folding each end towards the middle making sure the ends meet.
  • Do your second book fold by folding the dough in half along the seam and closing the ends like a book. (Hence the term book fold.) Turn it a quarter of a turn.
  • Repeat the same process once more by rolling out your dough to do a second book fold. If your dough is bouncing back at the edges and is not rolling out easily, your gluten needs to relax. Wrap the dough and put it back in the refrigerator for an hour and try again. Also if your dough is too soft and warm, put your dough back in the fridge for 30 minutes.
  • Once your second book fold is completed, wrap and rest your dough for 30 to 60 minutes in the fridge.
  • Once your dough is chilled, cut it in half. This recipe will make 8 mille-feuille, but most sheet pans will only be able to fit enough puff pastry dough for 4 at a time.
  • With your first half of the dough, flour your table and roll the dough to the size of the sheet pan you will use to bake on. I'm using a 9"x13" sheet pan and am rolling the dough to ⅛" thick.
  • Trim the edges of your dough with a knife. Make sure to cut straight up and down so that it doesn't seal the edges of the layers.
  • Using your rolling pin, roll your dough onto the back side of your sheet pan upside down.
  • Use a docker or a fork to poke small holes in the dough to avoid the dough from over developing in the oven.
  • Place a piece of parchment paper on top of the dough, then place another sheet pan right side up on top. This will make sure your dough remains flat in the oven.
  • Bake at 360°F for 20-30 minutes until the edges are golden brown. While your puff pastry is cooling, make your pastry cream.

Pastry Cream Step-By-Step

  • Place your milk, scraped vanilla bean and half of your sugar in a medium sized pot over medium heat. Bring it to a boil.
  • Add your egg yolks, the other half of the sugar, and the cornstarch to a separate bowl.
  • Whisk your yolk mixture together to form a ribbon texture.
  • Once your milk mixture comes to a boil, pour some of the mixture on to the yolk mixture and whisk together. This is called tempering your yolks.
  • Pour the yolk mixture back into the pot and boil everything for about 1 minute constantly whisking.
  • Pour your pastry cream into a bowl and cover it with plastic wrap touching the cream to avoid forming a skin. Refrigerate it for at least 30 minutes before using it to let everything set up. 

Vanilla Bean Chantilly Cream Step-By-Step

  • Add your cream and scraped vanilla bean into a mixing bowl.
  • Strain your cream and vanilla mix by pouring the bowl over a strainer and into the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment. This will remove the fibers of the vanilla bean while keeping ll the good flavor.
  • Add in your powdered sugar.
  • Mix everything together at medium-high speed until you reach stiff peaks. Use right away or place in the fridge until you are ready to use it.

Assembling The Mille-feuille

  • Trim the edges of your puff pastry with a knife.
  • Cut the dough into 1 ½ inches by 4 inch rectangles. (PRO TIP: Use a ruler to ensure you cut straight edges.)
  • Prepare a piping bag with a medium round tip. Fill your piping bag with the pastry cream.
  • Pipe lines of pastry cream in rows to cover your entire layer of puff pastry. Pro-tip: at the end of the piping, stop squeezing and press down to have clean lines.
  • Place a rectangle of puff pastry and repeat the process. You should have two layers of puff pastry and two layers of pastry cream.
  • OPTIONAL: Dust a generous amount of powdered sugar on your top layer of puff pastry. Torch it to caramelize the sugar.
  • Prepare a piping bag with a St. Honore metal tip ( or you can use a rose tip) and fill with your chantilly cream.
  • Carefully flip your Mille-feuille onto their side. You can leave them flat if you'd like but this way looks fancier.
  • Pipe your chantilly cream using a back and forth motion with your hand.
  • Decorate however you'd like. Chef Christophe topped his with raspberries! These are best served within 24 hours of making to preserve crispness. They tend to get soggy past this due to the puff pastry soaking up the moisture from the puff pastry.

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start:
  • Make sure your Puff pastry dough is really cold when folding and rolling your layers. You do not want the butter to melt during the process.
  • Your pastry cream should be completely chilled at least 30 minutes prior before assembling to ensure its stable enough to hold.
  • Weigh your ingredients to avoid failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  • Make sure all your cold ingredients are room temperature or slightly warm (butter, milk, eggs, to create a cohesive batter. Curdled batter causes cakes to collapse.
  • Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 562kcal | Carbohydrates: 38g | Protein: 8g | Fat: 41g | Saturated Fat: 26g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 11g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 178mg | Sodium: 238mg | Potassium: 45mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 6g | Vitamin A: 1424IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 38mg | Iron: 1mg
mango mousse cake cut in half

May 16, 2022 Blog

Mango Mousse Cake

This Mango Mousse Cake takes summertime desserts to the next level. Fluffy layers of coconut dacquoise, sweet mango compote, silky mango crémeux, and light as air coconut mousse are all layered together beautifully and topped with an orange and yellow mirror glaze and coconut nougatine. Created by Chef Christophe Rull, this tropical entremet will make you feel like you're on vacation.

mango mousse cake cut in half

Making an etremet is not complicated but it does take a lot of time and preparation to make all the individual pieces. Entremet are typically made in multiples because it is so much work to make each component so make sure you give yourself at least two days to complete this task.

Day 1 - Make the components and freeze them

Day 2 - Assemble the entremet and glaze

What's In This Blog Post

  • Mango Mousse Cake Components
    • Mango Compote Ingredients
    • Mango Crémeux Ingredients
    • Coconut Dacquoise Ingredients
    • Coconut Nougatine Ingredients
    • Coconut Mousse Ingredients
    • Mirror Glaze Ingredients
    • Ingredients Tips And Substitutions
  • Mango Puree Step-By-Step
  • Mango Compote Step-By-Step
  • Mango Crémeux Step-By-Step
  • Coconut Dacquoise Step-By-Step
  • Making The Coconut Nougatine
  • Making The Coconut Mousse
  • Assembling The Mango Mousse Cake
  • Making The Mirror Glaze Step-By-Step
  • Preparing The Entremet To Glaze
  • Creating the Chocolate Decor
  • Decorating and Glazing the Mango Mousse Cake
  • FAQ
  • More Recipes You'll Love

Mango Mousse Cake Components

An entremet is composed of multiple recipes. Those components will change with every entremet you make. Usually, you have multiple layers of textures that complement each other. Smooth, creamy, rich, light, crunchy, or chewy. The options are endless.

Mango Compote Ingredients

A compote is made of pieces of fruit and sugar syrup that is cooked together. Sometimes with other spices and flavors added and it can be thickened by pectin, cornstarch, or gelatin if needed. Our compote will also have mango puree added which you can buy or make.

picture of mango compote ingredients.

Mango Crémeux Ingredients

A crémeux means "creamy" in french and is exactly that. Super smooth, silky pudding like texture that is set with gelatin and is often paired with a light and airy mousse in entremet.

picture of mango cremux ingredients

Coconut Dacquoise Ingredients

A Dacquoise cake is a sponge cake made with nut flour and is gluten free. It's the perfect cake to use in entremets because it's never hard even when it's frozen.

picture of coconut dacquoise ingredients

Coconut Nougatine Ingredients

Nougatine is going to serve as our texture in this entremet. Crunchy, sweet and highly addictive.

picture of coconut nougatine ingredients

Coconut Mousse Ingredients

A mousse is basically a crémeux that has been lightened with air (usually from whipped cream) so it goes from silky to light and airy.

picture of coconut mousse ingredients

Mirror Glaze Ingredients

The finishing touch to our entremet is a beautiful shiny mirror glaze. This base recipe can be made with any color and will hold it's shine for days.

picture of white glaze ingredients

Ingredients Tips And Substitutions

Mango: Make sure to buy them pretty ripe so they are soft, sweeter and easy to slice. To pick the perfect mango press on them lightly and if they feel slightly soft ( Not too soft) then they are ready to use! You can also buy frozen mango.

Coconut Cream: This is essential for our coconut mousse. It is what will give it the coconut flavor we want, so do not try to substitute for regular cream. You can find coconut cream in most grocery stores. This is not coconut milk, they are different and coconut milk won't fluff up as nice.

Coconut flakes: to make our coconut nougatine and coconut daquoise we need flakes for texture and flavor. They are found in the grocery store, and we are sing unsweetened for this recipe because we are adding sugar to our components. You can use sweetened if you would like, just make sure to adjust your sugar measurement so you don't make your recipe too sweet.

Pectin NH: Pectin is a thickening agent that is used in many jams, spreads and compotes. It is what helps thicken your sauce to become more pliable and give it that jam texture. You can usually find it in the grocery store or you can order it online.

Gelatin: We are using 200 bloom gelatin sheets because sheets will create a transparent and extra shiny product. You can use powder as well since powder is easier to find, but you can order sheets online.

Vanilla: You can use extract, paste or vanilla beans. I like using beans when I have them because they give the strongest vanilla flavor, but any vanilla will work!

Mango Puree Step-By-Step

The first thing we need to do is make our puree which will be an ingredient used in making the crémeux and the mousse so it's best to make it first.

  1. To make your simple syrup, add your sugar and water into a small pot over medium heat. Bring it to a boil.hand pouring sugar into pot
  2. Once the sugar syrup boils, take it off the heat and set it aside to cool down to room temperature.
  3. Once its at room temperature, pour your syrup into a container and set it aside. You can also store this on your shelf for many months, so it never hurts to make a lot and keep it stored. pot of boiling syrup
  4. Cut up your fresh mangos and dice them into chunks. Place the diced mangos into a blender or food processor.hand holding spatula scooping mango into blender
  5. Add your simple syrup and blend everything together until it becomes a thin smoothie like texture.spatula covered in mango puree.
  6. Strain the mix into a bowl or container to get rid of lumps and extra pulp. This makes the puree super smooth. Set this aside to use later.hand holding spatula inside strainer of puree.

Mango Compote Step-By-Step

  1. Mix your pectin and your sugar in a small bowl or container first. This helps prevent lumps in your compote.hand holding spoon inside small bowl of sugar.
  2. Add your mango puree into a medium-sized pot on medium heat. Bring to a soft boil. spatula over pot of mango puree
  3. When your mango puree starts to bubble, add in your diced mangos and vanilla extract. Constantly stir with a spatula to prevent scorching. spatula inside bowl of diced mangos above saucepan.
  4. Add in your vanilla, then your pectin and sugar mix. Keep stirring.hand pouring container of sugar into pan.
  5. Add in the lime juice.hand pouring lime juice into pan.
  6. Keep stirring and cook your compote for about 5 minutes or until al dente (or until the fruit is soft but still slightly firm in the center).spatula over pan covered in mango compote
  7. Add in your lime zest, and give it a quick mix. hands zesting a lime into bowl of compote
  8. Pour 150 grams into your silicone mold ( or fill your mold about halfway) and freeze it for at least 2 hours.hand using spoon to spread compote in silicone mold.

Mango Crémeux Step-By-Step

A crémeux is very similar to a mousse or pudding. The difference is that it is way creamier and thicker than a mousse (crémeux means creamy in french hense the name). It's commonly used in entremets and plated desserts. Crémeux is made by bring your ingredients to a boil, adding gelatin to thicken it, then blending it all together to create a thick liquid consistency that will eventually set to a pudding texture.

  1. Bloom your water and gelatin in a small bowl or container and leave to sit until the gelatin has fully absorbed the water. (3-5 min).hand pouring measuring cup of water over bowl of gelatin.
  2. Add in the mango puree, cream, and half of the sugar into a medium sized pot.hand pouring cream into pan.
  3. Whisk your yolks and the other half of the sugar into a separate bowl until you reach the ribbon stage.bowl of sugar being added to bowl of egg yolkshand whisking mixture in pan with a hand whisk
  4. Bring your mango mixture to a simmer over medium heat, whisking constantly to prevent burning and then remove it from the heat.
  5. Add ⅓ of the hot mango mixture to the egg mixture and whisk to prevent the eggs from curdling. This is called tempering. hand whisking bowl of yolks with a hand whisk.
  6. Pour the tempered yolk mixture back into your mango mixture while still on medium heat. Keep whisking.hand pouring tempered egg yolks back into pan
  7. Add in your bloomed gelatin. If using sheets make sure to ring out the gelatin of extra water.spatula mixing gelatin into pan.
  8. Cook the crémeux for about 3-5 minutes or until the mixtures about ready to boil (Do not boil).
  9. When the crémeux is done, pour 200 grams into your mold on top of your frozen mango compote and freeze the mold overnight. 

Coconut Dacquoise Step-By-Step

A dacquoise is a type of cake consisting of a meringue base and nut flour (typically almond). It's super a light sponge cake that pairs really well with mousse cakes and even ice cream cakes because meringue does not freeze. It's made by finely grinding nuts such as hazelnuts, almonds, or in this case coconut flakes, then folding them with a meringue and then baking.

  1. Preheat your oven to 360º F (180º C).
  2. Add your egg whites into the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Whisk on low speed until the egg whites reach soft peaks.hand whisk whisking egg whites.
  3. Add in your sugar and continue to mix until you reach medium peaks. hand placing bowl of sugar into egg white mix.
  4. Sift your powdered sugar, almond flour, and coconut flakes into a separate bowl.dry ingredients being sifted into bowl.
  5. Add in ⅓ of your dry ingredients into your meringue along with the lime zest, then fold with a spatula.spatula folding dry ingredients into meringue.
  6. Add in the rest of your dry ingredients and keep folding. ( Do not overmix because the more you fold the more air you lose. More air equals more volume, so fold lightly).hand using spatula to fold meringue.
  7. Prepare a piping bag with a medium ound tip. Pour your batter into the piping bag.hands pouring bowl of batter into piping bag.
  8. Pipe the batter into your mold starting from the center, moving to the outside of the mold in a spiral pattern. Hold the piping tip about ½" away from the mold so that you pipe in a thin layer. (Piping the batter helps create an even layer instead of pouring it straight in.)hand holding piping bag piping batter into mold
  9. Bake for 16 minutes, or until the sponge is golden and bounces back when touching it. hands holding baked coconut dacquoise.
  10. Place the sponge in the freezer right after baking or until you are ready to use it. 

Making The Coconut Nougatine

  1. Preheat your oven to 325º F (162º C).
  2. If your coconut is not toasted, I recommend reading my tutorial on how to toast coconut first.
  3. Combine your sugar and pectin in a small bowl. hand pouring container of pectin into container of sugar.
  4. Combine your butter, corn syrup, and sugar mixture into a medium sized pot over medium heat until it begins to simmer.hand pouring container of corn syrup into bowl.
  5. Reduce your heat to low, then add in your coconut. Mix with a spatula until combined.   spatula covered in nougatine.
  6. Pour the nougatine onto a silicone mat and spread out with an offset spatula as thin as the coconut flakes are. hand using spatula to spread nougatine on tray.
  7. Bake in the oven for about 10 min or until golden brown. tray of baked nougatine
  8. Using a circle cutter of your choice, cut the nougatine right away. (once it cools down it will set and be too hard to cut). hand using circle cutters to cut the nougatine.
  9. Brush the nougatine with a thin layer of melted cocoa butter using a pastry brush. This protects the nougatine from getting soggy. Set aside for decoration later.hand using pastry brush to brush cocoa butter onto nougatine.

Making The Coconut Mousse

  1. Add your cream into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Whip to a soft-medium peak. ( Do not overmix.)bowl of whipped cream.
  2. Soak your gelatin in cold water(blooming). Let them absorb for 1-2 minutes.hand pouring measuring cup of water onto gelatin.
  3. Add in your coconut milk, and half of the sugar into a small pot over medium heat. (this prevents the coconut milk from burning).hand pouring measurement of cream into pot.
  4. Add in your vanilla.hand adding measurement of vanilla into pot.
  5. Whisk the mix in the pot and bring it to a boil.
  6. Add in your yolks and the other half of the sugar into a separate bowl. Whisk together until you reach a ribbon texture.hand using whisk to whisk together yolks and sugar.
  7. Once your coconut milk mix is boiling, temper your yolks with some of the mix by pouring ⅓ of the hot mixture into the yolk mixture while whisking constantly. Pour everything back into the pot. potnof cream being poured into container of yolks.
  8. Cook everything while whisking constantly until it reaches 176º F (80 º C) 2-5 minutes or until the mix no longer drips from your whisk. hand holding whisk and wooden spoon over pot.
  9. Add in your gelatin ( If using sheets don't add in the leftover water, just the sheets).hand adding gelatin to pot.
  10. OPTIONAL: Pour your mix into a separate bowl over ice to cool down the mix quickly to 20º-25ºChand pouring mix into bowl over ice bath
  11. While the mix is cooling down, un-mold your coconut dacquoise insert and your mango compote and cremeux insert. Place it back into the freezer until you are ready to assemble. hand holding tray of mango compote insert and cake.
  12. Add in ⅓ of your whipped cream into your cooled coconut milk mix to make the mixture lighter. Whisk together.spoon scooping whipped cream into egg yolk mixture.
  13. Lightly fold in the rest of your whipped cream using a spatula. Set it aside so the mousse can thicken. Once it becomes thick and fluffy it's ready to use. hand using whisk to whisk mousse

Assembling The Mango Mousse Cake

  1. When the mousse is set, prepare a piping bag, and pipe the mousse about ⅓ of the way full into the bottom of your silicone entremet mold. hand using piping bag to pipe mousse into mold.
  2. Using a spatula spread the mousse around all the sides and to the top edge of the mold.hand using knife to spread mousse around the mold.
  3. Take the mango compote and cremeux insert out of the freezer and push the frozen insert into the mousse until it's about ½" below the top edge of the mold. hands placing insert into mold
  4. Cover the top of the insert with a super thin layer of mousse.hand using spatula to spread mousse over insert.
  5. Take out the coconut dacquoise and place that on top of the mango compote insert. Trim away any excess sponge.hand placing dacquoise into silicone mold
  6. Place the whole entremet in the freezer to set overnight or minimum of 6 hours.

Making The Mirror Glaze Step-By-Step

  1. Soak your gelatin in your cold water ( blooming). Let it absorb for 1-2 minutes and set aside for later.hand pouring measuring cup of water on to container of gelatin.
  2. Pour in your water, corn syrup, and sugar into a medium sized pot over medium heat.hand pouring container of sugar into pot.
  3. Bring the syrup to 222º F (106º C). ( This may take about 10-15 minutes)hand holding thermometer over pot.
  4. Place your condensed milk, and vanilla bean into a tall container. The shape and size is important for mixing without getting any extra air into the mix.hand pouring conainer of vanilla into measuring cup.
  5. Pour your hot syrup over the vanilla and condensed milk.hand pouring pot of syrup into measuring cup.
  6. Add in your gelatin. 
  7. Blend the glaze until it becomes super smooth and combined using an emulsion blender. See the video below for tips on how to avoid adding in air bubbles. hand using bamix to blend mix in measuring cup.
  8. Add one or two drops of your yellow color and about ¼ teaspoon of white food coloring and keep blending.hand holding yellow food color over glaze.
  9. Pour half of the yellow glaze into a separate container, then add one or two drops of orange color to give it a tropical orange color.hand holding orange good coloring over yellow glaze.
  10. Strain your glaze with a strainer so you get rid of any lumps. hand pouring glaze into strainer over a bowl.
  11. Cool the glazes and use at 76-77º F ( 24-25º C). (Pro Tip: You can use an ice bath to cool down the glazes quickly)glaze sitting in a measuring cup in an ice bath.

Preparing The Entremet To Glaze

  1. When it is completely frozen, take the entremet out of the mold, and place it on a cooling rack on top of a pan lined with plastic wrap to catch the glaze. Place everything back in the freezer until you are ready to glaze. It's very important that your entremet is as cold as possible before glazing.frozen entremet sitting on a cooling rack to be glazed.
  2. While the entremet is in the freezer, create your chocolate decor. 

Creating the Chocolate Decor

  1. Temper a small bowl of white chocolate, and in a separate bowl temper some dark chocolate. ( If you don't know how to temper, you can check out my post on How To Temper Chocolate. )
  2. Cut some strips of acetate about the length of your mango mousse cake. You only need one but it is good to have extra in case you make a mistake.
  3. Pour your white tempered chocolate over the sheets of acetate. hand pouring bowl of white chocolate onto acetate sheets.
  4. Place a strip of parchment on top of the melted chocolate. This will prevent the chocolate from sticking to your cake ring.hand using spatula to smooth chocolate over acetate sheets.
  5. Wrap the chocolate strip around a cake ring similar to the size of your mango mousse cake. hand rolling chocolate strips around cake ring.
  6. Make sure the two ends overlap and tape the ends together. hand holding cake ring taping the two ends of chocolate strips together.
  7. Next, prepare a piping bag and fill it with some tempered dark chocolate.hand pouring chocolate into piping bag.
  8. Pipe chocolate into your polycarbonate mold cavities. Fill each cavity to the top and give the mold a few taps to pop air bubbles and make sure the chocolate reaches every part of the cavity. You only need to make two or as many as you'd like.hand using piping bag to pipe chocolate into molds.
  9. Once you fill your cavities, place some parchment underneath the mold and flip the mold over to dump out leftover chocolate.hand holding mold upside down to dump out chocolate.
  10. Tap the sides of the mold with a bench scraper or spatula to remove all the access chocolate. hand using scraper to tap chocolate out of mold.
  11. Scrape the access chocolate off the mold with a scraper to ensure the chocolates will have flat edges. hand using scraper to scrape chocolate from mold.
  12. Place the mold upside down on parchment and leave to set.tray of chocolate inside mold
  13. Once the dark chocolate is set, repeat the process with the white chocolate to create a coconut shape making sure to pour the white chocolate into the dark chocolate. Leave to set again.hand piping white chocolate into mold.hand using scraper to scrape chocolate.
  14. Un-mold the chocolate shells. Then using a warm plate or bottom of a small pot, warm the bottom edges of the bon bons to clean up the bottom and smooth it out. hand using warm pot to melt bottom of chocolate.hand holding chocolate cconuts.
  15. Take a wire brush to create small lines and rough edges on the coconut shells.hand using wire brush to brush chocolate coconut.
  16. place the white part of the coconut in some coconut flakes. You can now glaze and decorate your cake.hand dipping chocolate coconut into shaved coconut.

Decorating and Glazing the Mango Mousse Cake

  1. Double Check your orange and yellow glazes are both at 76-77º F ( 24-25º C). If it's too cold the glaze will set before covering the cake, and if it's too warm it will melt your mousse.
  2. Take your mango mousse cake out of the freezer making sure it's on a cooling rack.
  3. Pour the orange glaze all over the cake right away. hand pouring measuring cup of glaze onto frozen entremet.
  4. Switch to the yellow glaze and pour a little over the orange to create a marble affect. hand pouring glaze onto frozen entremet.
  5. Go back and forth with the glazes until you reach a desired marble affect. hand pouring final layer of glaze onto entremet.picture of glazed entremet.
  6. Scrape off the access with a small offset spatula.hand using spatula to smooth entremet.
  7. Remove the cake from the cooling rack carefully with an offset spatula and scrape off the access underneath.hand using spatula to remove entremet from cooling rack.hand using spatula to scrape glaze from underneath entremet.
  8. Carefully place your cake on your desired plate.hand placing entremet on to tray.
  9. Remove your white chocolate strips from the cake ring and remove the parchment from it.hands removing cake ring from chocolate.
  10. Cut a seam down the center with a hot knife.hands using knife to cut chocolate ring.
  11. Place the chocolate strip around the side of your cake making sure ends meet. hands placing chocolate ring around entremet.
  12. Now place your disc of nougatine on top of the mousse cake in the center.hands placing disc of nougatine on top of entremet.
  13. OPTIONAL: Slice a small mango and use as a garnish.hands placing sliced mango onto entremet.
  14. Place your chocolate coconuts on top and decorate with tropical flowers if you desire. Your mango mousse cake is now complete! You can let it come to room temperature and serve right away or keep in the fridge and freezer until you are ready to serve. Mousse cakes can stay in the freezer for many months. hand placing flower on top of decorated entremet.

FAQ

Can you make mousse cakes without gelatin?

Yes you can you would just need to substitute any gelatin for vegetarian gelatin. Gelatin is the thickening agent so I'd recommend not skipping it out entirely.

Should mango mousse cake be refrigerated or frozen?

It can be either. It will last longer in the freezer but if you are serving it a few days after making any mousse cake, it can stay in the fridge.

What is the difference between mango puree or mango juice, which should I use?

Puree is thicker and made from the blended fruits themselves, so using this would make for better flavor, but if you can't make your own juice will work. It will just be a little thinner and more sweeter.

What is the shelf life of mousse cakes?

They can last for about 2 weeks in the fridge and up to a couple months in the freezer.

More Recipes You'll Love

Chocolate Entremet Cake

Elegant Lemon Tarts

Chocolate Soufflé

Vanila Bean Panna Cotta

Recipe

mango mousse cake cut in half
Print Recipe
4.86 from 7 votes

Mango Mousse Cake

A tropical mango mousse cake made with fluffy layers of dacquoise sponge cake, mango compote, coconut mousse, shiny mirror glaze, coconut nougatine and even tiny chocolate coconuts on top! This is an extremely complex entremet but the taste makes it worth it!
Prep Time4 hours hrs
Cook Time16 minutes mins
Freezing Time2 days d
Total Time2 days d 4 hours hrs
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: French
Servings: 2 entremets
Calories: 4369kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 1 8" cake ring
  • 1 Offset Spatula small
  • 1 Acetate roll or sheets
  • 1 ½" polycarbonate sphere mold
  • 1 Bench scraper
  • 1 Immersion blender
  • 3 silicone mousse cake molds
  • 1 Entremet Mold

Ingredients

Mango Puree

  • 400 grams diced mango fresh or frozen
  • 2 tablespoons simple syrup

Mango Compote

  • 200 grams fresh mango diced
  • 20 grams sugar
  • 2 grams pectin NH
  • 2 grams vanilla extract or paste
  • 50 grams mango puree
  • 20 grams lime juice
  • half lime zest

Mango Cremeux

  • 170 grams cream
  • 85 grams mango puree
  • 30 grams sugar
  • 50 grams egg yolks
  • 3 grams gelatin sheets or powder
  • 18 grams water mjore if using sheets

Coconut Dacquoise

  • 75 grams egg whites
  • 16 grams sugar
  • ¼ lime zest
  • 10 grams almond flour
  • 50 grams powdered sugar
  • 40 grams coconut flakes sweetened or unsweetened

Coconut Nougatine

  • 15 grams sugar
  • 0.5 grams pectin NH
  • 15 grams glucose
  • 27.5 grams butter unsalted
  • 27.5 grams coconut flakes unsweetened

Coconut Mousse

  • 7.5 grams gelatin sheets 200 bloom if using powder add 45 grams of water to soak in
  • 62 grams egg yolks
  • 45 grams sugar
  • 312 grams coconut milk
  • 300 grams heavy cream
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla bean paste or extract

Mirror Glaze

  • 205 grams water
  • 415 grams sugar
  • 415 grams glucose
  • 26 grams condensed milk
  • 25 grams powder gelatin
  • 165 grams water
  • 1-2 drops yellow gel food color
  • 1-2 drops orange gel food color

Instructions

Mango Puree Step-By-Step

  • To make your simple syrup, add your sugar and water into a small pot over medium heat. Bring it to a boil.
  • Once the sugar syrup boils, take it off the heat and set it aside to cool down to room temperature.
  • Once it's at room temperature, pour your syrup into a container and set it aside. You can also store this on your shelf for many months, so it never hurts to make a lot and keep it stored.
  • Cut up your fresh mangos and dice them into chunks. Place the diced mangos into a blender or food processor.
  • Add your simple syrup and blend everything together until it becomes a thin smoothie like texture.
  • Strain the mix into a bowl or container to get rid of lumps and extra pulp. This makes the puree super smooth. Set this aside to use later.

Mango Compote Step-By-Step

  • Mix your pectin and your sugar in a small bowl or container first. This helps prevent lumps in your compote.
  • Add your mango puree into a medium-sized pot on medium heat. Bring it to a soft boil.
  • When your mango puree starts to bubble, add in your diced mangos and vanilla extract. Constantly stir with a spatula to prevent scorching.
  • Add in your vanilla, then your pectin and sugar mix. Keep stirring.
  • Add in the lime juice.
  • Keep stirring and cook your compote for about 5 minutes or until al dente (or until the fruit is soft, but still slightly firm in the center).
  • Add in your lime zest, and give it a quick mix.
  • Pour 150 grams into your silicone mold ( or fill your mold about halfway) and freeze it for at least 2 hours.

Making the Mango Crémeux

  • Bloom your water and gelatin in a small bowl or container and leave to sit until the gelatin has fully absorbed the water. (3-5 min).
  • Add in the mango puree, cream, and half of the sugar into a medium sized pot.
  • Whisk your yolks and the other half of the sugar into a separate bowl until you reach the ribbon stage.
  • Bring your mango mixture to a simmer over medium heat, whisking constantly to prevent burning and then remove it from the heat.
  • Add ⅓ of the hot mango mixture to the egg mixture and whisk to prevent the eggs from curdling. This is called tempering.
  • Pour the tempered yolk mixture back into your mango mixture while still on medium heat. Keep whisking.
  • Add in your bloomed gelatin. If using sheets make sure to ring out the gelatin of extra water.
  • Cook the crémeux for about 3-5 minutes or until the mixtures about ready to boil (Do not boil).
  • When the crémeux is done, pour 200 grams into your mold on top of your frozen mango compote and freeze the mold overnight.

Coconut Dacquoise Step-By-Step

  • Preheat your oven to 360º F (180º C).
  • Add your egg whites into the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Whisk on low speed until the egg whites reach soft peaks.
  • Add in your sugar and continue to mix until you reach medium peaks.
  • Sift your powdered sugar, almond flour, and coconut flakes into a separate bowl.
  • Add in ⅓ of your dry ingredients into your meringue along with the lime zest, then fold with a spatula.
  • Add in the rest of your dry ingredients and keep folding. ( Do not overmix because the more you fold the more air you lose. More air equals more volume, so fold lightly).
  • Prepare a piping bag with a medium round tip. Pour your batter into the piping bag.
  • Pipe the batter into your mold starting from the center, moving to the outside of the mold in a spiral pattern. Hold the piping tip about ½" away from the mold so that you pipe in a thin layer. (Piping the batter helps create an even layer instead of pouring it straight in.)
  • Bake for 16 minutes, or until the sponge is golden and bounces back when touching it.
  • Place the sponge in the freezer right after baking or until you are ready to use it.

Coconut Nougatine Step-By-Step

  • Preheat your oven to 325º F (162º C).
  • If your coconut is not toasted, I recommend reading my tutorial on how to toast coconut first.
  • Combine your sugar and pectin in a small bowl.
  • Combine your butter, glucose, and sugar mixture into a medium sized pot over medium heat until it begins to simmer.
  • Reduce your heat to low, then add in your coconut. Mix with a spatula until combined.
  • Pour the nougatine onto a silicone mat and spread out with an offset spatula as thin as the coconut flakes are.
  • Bake in the oven for about 10 minutes or until golden brown.
  • Using a circle cutter of your choice, cut the nougatine right away. (once it cools down it will set and be too hard to cut).
  • Brush the nougatine with a thin layer of melted cocoa butter using a pastry brush. This protects the nougatine from getting soggy. Set aside for decoration later.

Coconut Mousse Step-By-Step

  • Add your cream into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Whip to a soft-medium peak. ( Do not overmix.)
  • Add in your coconut milk, and half of the sugar into a small pot over medium heat. (this prevents the coconut milk from burning).
  • Add in your vanilla.
  • Whisk the mix in the pot and bring it to a boil
  • Add in your yolks and the other half of the sugar into a separate bowl. Whisk together until you reach a ribbon texture.
  • Once your coconut milk mix is boiling, temper your yolks with some of the mix by pouring ⅓ of the hot mixture into the yolk mixture while whisking constantly. Pour everything back into the pot.
  • Cook everything while whisking constantly until it reaches 176º F (80 º C) 2-5 minutes or until the mix no longer drips from your whisk.
  • Add in your gelatin ( If using sheets don't add in the leftover water, just the sheets).
  • OPTIONAL: Pour your mix into a separate bowl over ice to cool down the mix quickly to 20º-25ºC.
  • While the mix is cooling down, un-mold your coconut dacquoise insert and your mango compote and cremeux insert. Place it back into the freezer until you are ready to assemble.
  • Add in ⅓ of your whipped cream into your cooled coconut milk mix to make the mixture lighter. Whisk together.
  • Lightly fold in the rest of your whipped cream using a spatula. Set it aside so the mousse can thicken. Once it becomes thick and fluffy it's ready to use.

Assembling The Mango Mousse Cake

  • When the mousse is set, prepare a piping bag, and pipe the mousse about ⅓ of the way full into the bottom of your silicone entremet mold.
  • Using a spatula spread the mousse around all the sides and to the top edge of the mold.
  • Take the mango compote and cremeux insert out of the freezer and push the frozen insert into the mousse until it's about ½" below the top edge of the mold.
  • Cover the top of the insert with a super thin layer of mousse.
  • Take out the coconut dacquoise and place that on top of the mango compote insert. Trim away any excess sponge.
  • Place the whole entremet in the freezer to set overnight or minimum of 6 hours.

Mirror Glaze Step-By-Step

  • Soak your gelatin in your cold water ( blooming). Let it absorb for 1-2 minutes and set aside for later.
  • Pour in your water, corn syrup, and sugar into a medium sized pot over medium heat.
  • Bring the syrup to 222º F (106º C). ( This may take about 10-15 minutes)
  • Place your condensed milk, and vanilla bean into a tall container. The shape and size is important for mixing without getting any extra air into the mix.
  • Pour your hot syrup over the vanilla and condensed milk.
  • Add in your gelatin.
  • Blend the glaze until it becomes super smooth and combined using an emulsion blender. See the video below for tips on how to avoid adding in air bubbles.
  • Add one or two drops of your yellow color and about ¼ teaspoon of white food coloring and keep blending.
  • Pour half of the yellow glaze into a separate container, then add one or two drops of orange color to give it a tropical orange color.
  • Strain your glaze with a strainer so you get rid of any lumps.
  • Cool the glazes and use at 76-77º F ( 24-25º C). (Pro Tip: You can use an ice bath to cool down the glazes quickly)

Preparing the Entremet For Glazing

  • When it is completely frozen, take the entremet out of the mold, and place it on a cooling rack on top of a pan lined with plastic wrap to catch the glaze. Place everything back in the freezer until you are ready to glaze. It's very important that your entremet is as cold as possible before glazing.
  • While the entremet is in the freezer, create your chocolate decor.

Creating the Chocolate Decor

  • Temper a small bowl of white chocolate, and in a separate bowl temper some dark chocolate. ( If you don't know how to temper, you can check out my post on How To Temper Chocolate. )
  • Cut some strips of acetate about the length of your mango mousse cake. You only need one but it is good to have extra in case you make a mistake.
  • Pour your white tempered chocolate over the sheets of acetate.
  • Place a strip of parchment on top of the melted chocolate. This will prevent the chocolate from sticking to your cake ring.
  • Wrap the chocolate strip around a cake ring similar to the size of your mango mousse cake.
  • Make sure the two ends overlap and tape the ends together.
  • Next, prepare a piping bag and fill it with some tempered dark chocolate.
  • Pipe chocolate into your polycarbonate mold cavities. Fill each cavity to the top and give the mold a few taps to pop air bubbles and make sure the chocolate reaches every part of the cavity. You only need to make two or as many as you'd like.
  • Once you fill your cavities, place some parchment underneath the mold and flip the mold over to dump out leftover chocolate.
  • Tap the sides of the mold with a bench scraper or spatula to remove all the access chocolate.
  • Scrape the excess chocolate off the mold with a scraper to enure the chocolates will have flat edges.
  • Place the mold upside down on parchment and leave to set.
  • Once the dark chocolate is set, repeat the process with the white chocolate to create a coconut shape making sure to pour the white chocolate into the dark chocolate. Leave to set again.
  • Un-mold the chocolate shells. Then using a warm plate or bottom of a small pot, warm the bottom edges of the bon bons to clean up the bottom and smooth it out.
  • Take a wire brush to create small lines and rough edges on the coconut shells.
  • Place the white part of the coconut in some coconut flakes. You can now glaze and decorate your cake.

Decorating and Glazing the Mango Mousse Cake

  • Double Check your orange and yellow glazes are both at 76-77º F ( 24-25º C). If it's too cold the glaze will set before covering the cake, and if it's too warm it will melt your mousse.
  • Take your mango mousse cake out of the freezer making sure it's on a cooling rack.
  • Pour the orange glaze all over the cake right away.
  • Switch to the yellow glaze and pour a little over the orange to create a marble effect.
  • Go back and forth with the glazes until you reach a desired marble effect.
  • Scrape off the excess with a small offset spatula.
  • Remove the cake from the cooling rack carefully with an offset spatula and scrape off the access underneath.
  • Carefully place your cake on your desired plate.
  • Remove your white chocolate strips from the cake ring and remove the parchment from it.
  • Cut a seam down the center with a hot knife.
  • Place the chocolate strip around the side of your cake making sure ends meet.
  • Now place your disc of nougatine on top of the mousse cake in the center.
  • OPTIONAL: Slice a small mango and use as a garnish
  • Place your chocolate coconuts on top and decorate with tropical flowers if you desire. Your mango mousse cake is now complete! You can let it come to room temperature and serve right away or keep in the fridge and freezer until you are ready to serve. Mousse cakes can stay in the freezer for many months.

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start:
  • This is a 3-day dessert! On day 1, you will prepare the compote, cremux, and nougatine ( the nougatine can be made any day). On day 2, you will prepare the dacquoise, and the mousse. On Day 3 you will make the glaze and finish the entremet. and finish the entremet.
  • Weigh your ingredients to avoid failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  • Make sure all your cold ingredients are room temperature or slightly warm (butter, milk, eggs, to create a cohesive batter. Curdled batter causes cakes and fillings to collapse or split.
  • Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  • Make sure inserts are completely frozen before adding your next layer. They should freeze for a minimum of 6 hours. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1cake | Calories: 4369kcal | Carbohydrates: 704g | Protein: 35g | Fat: 168g | Saturated Fat: 117g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 6g | Monounsaturated Fat: 31g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 588mg | Sodium: 594mg | Potassium: 1051mg | Fiber: 18g | Sugar: 511g | Vitamin A: 26224IU | Vitamin C: 63mg | Calcium: 415mg | Iron: 18mg
roses made out of wafer paper

May 15, 2022 Course Preview

Wafer Paper Roses Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Shruti Saxena is back for another amazing flower tutorial. In this course, you will learn how to create wafer paper roses, a beautiful arrangement of edible flowers using various wafer paper techniques.

Shruti breaks down how to condition wafer paper, the tools and templates needed to make petal and leaves and how to get the various shapes and folded needed to create ornate flowers that look just like the real thing. If you're looking to another another style of edible flower to your disposal, wafer paper is a great alternative to gumpaste.

57:40 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make wafer paper roses
  • Learn how to create petals, leaves and calyx needed out of wafer paper
  • Shruti's tips and tricks to working with wafer paper and getting the look of the roses just right

Roses made out of wafer paper

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Introduction To Wafer Paper 0:41
  2. Making And Storing The Conditioner 2:22
  3. Applying The Conditioner 4:29
  4. Climate Considerations 6:21
  5. Coloring The Paper With Gel Colors 8:25
  6. Coloring The Wafer Paper With Petal Dust 15:20
  7. How To Use The Petal Templates 18:15
  8. Making The Rose Bases 23:43
  9. Veining The Petals 25:29
  10. Making The Rose 27:23
  11. Making The Rose Bud 47:01
  12. Making The Leaves 52:18
  13. Putting It All Together & Storage 55:12

Downloads

Materials List

Petal and Leaf Template

roses made out of wafer paper

May 15, 2022 Paid Video

Wafer Paper Roses

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Shruti Saxena is back for another amazing flower tutorial. In this course, you will learn how to create wafer paper roses, a beautiful arrangement of edible flowers using various wafer paper techniques.

Shruti breaks down how to condition wafer paper, the tools and templates needed to make petal and leaves and how to get the various shapes and folded needed to create ornate flowers that look just like the real thing. If you're looking to another another style of edible flower to your disposal, wafer paper is a great alternative to gumpaste.

57:40 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make wafer paper roses
  • Learn how to create petals, leaves and calyx needed out of wafer paper
  • Shruti's tips and tricks to working with wafer paper and getting the look of the roses just right

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Introduction To Wafer Paper 0:41
  2. Making And Storing The Conditioner 2:22
  3. Applying The Conditioner 4:29
  4. Climate Considerations 6:21
  5. Coloring The Paper With Gel Colors 8:25
  6. Coloring The Wafer Paper With Petal Dust 15:20
  7. How To Use The Petal Templates 18:15
  8. Making The Rose Bases 23:43
  9. Veining The Petals 25:29
  10. Making The Rose 27:23
  11. Making The Rose Bud 47:01
  12. Making The Leaves 52:18
  13. Putting It All Together & Storage 55:12

Downloads

Materials List

Petal and Leaf Template

close up of dole whip in a white bowl

May 13, 2022 Blog

Hawaiian Dole Whip

You can re-create the classic Hawaiian Dole whip recipe right in your own home with a few simple ingredients plus some tricks for getting the perfect Dole whip swirl!

close up of dole whip in a white bowl

If you've ever had a Dole Whip straight from the Dole plantations in Oahu, then count yourself as one of the lucky ones! I recently traveled to Oahu to visit some family that lives there and HAD to make a stop at this iconic Dole Plantation to see what it was all about.

I had a feeling I was going to love the Dole whip but I was not expecting to love it so much! Now I know why so many people try to recreate it at home. This recipe is smooth, creamy, and really captures that real Dole pineapple whip flavor.

So stick with me and learn how to make true Dole whip that tastes like it came straight off the island.

What's In This Blog Post.

  • Dole Whip Recipe Ingredients
  • How To Make Dole Whip Step-By-Step
  • How to Make the Dole Whip Swirl
  • Frequently Asked Questions
  • More Recipes You'll Love

Dole Whip Recipe Ingredients

One of the main reasons that Dole whip is SO good is the fresh pineapple picked at its prime. Because I wanted this recipe to be 100% faithful to the original, I went ahead and ordered two Royal Hawaiian pineapples to be shipped from the Dole plantation straight to my house. Of course, you do not have to do this, any ripe pineapple will do!

woman holding pineapple

You can tell a pineapple is ripe if you smell the bottom and it smells sweet. The fruit should look fresh and the leaves should be green.

I'm also using a Dole banana that I've left on the counter for a few days so it gets nice and ripe! Ripe fruit equals sweet fruit.close up of dole banana

The other crucial ingredient is coconut milk. You want to use unsweetened coconut milk that comes in a can. I usually find it in the Asian food section of the grocery store. Coconut milk will add some amazing creaminess and flavor!

Because we are using coconut milk, this makes the dole whip not only super cream by dairy-free!

You'll also need a fresh lime to bump up the flavor.

How To Make Dole Whip Step-By-Step

Before you begin, make sure your pineapple is nice and ripe. When you buy a pineapple, typically it isn't quite ripe yet. You will know your pineapple is ripe when you can smell the bottom of the pineapple and it smells sweet.

Lay your pineapple horizontally on the countertop for a few days while it ripens. Laying the pineapple horizontal keeps the juice evenly distributed throughout the fruit.

  1. Using a sharp chef's knife, chip the top and the bottom of the pineapple off. hand using knife to cut pineapple ends
  2. Trim the outside skin off the pineapple carefully.hand using knife to trim the sides of a pineapple.
  3. Use a potato peeler to remove any of the hard eyes.hand using potato peeling to peel pineapple.
  4. Cut the pineapple in half length-wise and then in half again. hands using knife to cute pineapple.
  5. Use your knife to cut out the core of the pineapple. hands using knife to cut core out of pineapple.
  6. Dice the pineapple into chunks and freeze them (at least 6 hours or overnight).hand using knife to dice pineapple.bowl of diced pineapple
  7. Dice your banana and freeze those pieces as well. hand using knife to dice banana slices.
  8. Place your frozen pineapple, banana, coconut milk and lime into a blender.dole whip ingredients inside blender.
  9. Blend until smooth.blender full of blended dole whip.
  10. This will make a smoothie consistency Dole whip, if you want it pipe-able then you can add this mixture to an ice cream machine as I did with my Bosch ice cream bowl attachment. picture of bosch ice cream attachment.
  11. Or you place the mixture onto a sheet pan and freeze it for 15 minutes, mix with a whisk and freeze again. Keep doing this until it's thick enough to pipe.dole whip on sheet pan.

How to Make the Dole Whip Swirl

  1. Take your dole whip and place it in a piping bag with a 1M metal star tip. ( you can use any piping tip you'd like but the traditional swirl is created by this star tip).dole whip inside piping bag with 1M star tip.
  2. Start at the bottom of your desired bowl and pipe in a swirl motion until you reached your desired height. bowl of dole whip

Frequently Asked Questions

What if I don't have a blender?

You can use a food processor.

What can I do if I don't have an ice cream machine?

You can pour the Dole whip onto a sheet pan and place it into the freezer for another 30-40 minutes to firm up the filling, then transfer it to a piping bag with a 1M piping tip.

Does it have to be a Dole pineapple?

Technically, yes! You can use any pineapple if you really want to go that route, just know we are all judging you.

More Recipes You'll Love

Margarita Cake

Lemon Tarts

Lemon Blueberry Cake

Mini Pavlovas

Recipe

close up of dole whip in a white bowl
Print Recipe
4.22 from 23 votes

Hawaiian Dole Whip Recipe

Learn how to make the traditianal hawaiian dole whip recipe that you all know and love!
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Freezing Time6 hours hrs
Total Time6 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 4 cups
Calories: 81kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 1 Blender
  • 1 Ice cream machine (optional but helps with the swirl)
  • 1 1M metal star piping tip
  • 1 Piping Bag

Ingredients

  • 10 ounces Fresh Dole Pineapple Chopped and frozen (2 cups)
  • 1 medium Dole banana Peeled, chopped and frozen (1 cup)
  • 4 ounces Unsweetened coconut milk (½ cup)
  • 1 teaspoon Lime juice ½ lime
  • 2 Tablespoons Powdered sugar Optional, if your pineapple isn't very sweet
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Making The Hawaiian Dole Whip

  • Using a sharp chef's knife, chip the top and the bottom of the pineapple off.
  • Trim the outside skin off the pineapple carefully.
  • Use a potato peeler to remove any of the hard eyes.
  • Cut the pineapple in half lengthwise and then in half again.
  • Use your knife to cut out the core of the pineapple.
  • Dice the pineapple into chunks and freeze them (at least 6 hours or overnight).
  • Dice your banana and freeze those pieces as well.
  • Place your frozen pineapple, banana, coconut milk and lime into a blender.
  • Blend until smooth
  • This will make a smoothie consistency Dole whip, if you want it pipe-able then you can add this mixture to an ice cream machine as I did with my Bosch ice cream bowl attachment.
  • Or you place the mixture onto a sheet pan and freeze it for 15 minutes, mix with a whisk and freeze again. Keep doing this until it's thick enough to pipe.

How To Make The Dole Whip Swirl

  • Take your dole whip and place it in a piping bag with a 1M metal star tip. ( you can use any piping tip you'd like but the traditional swirl is created by this star tip)
  • Start at the bottom of your desired bowl and pipe in a swirl motion until you reached your desired height.

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start
  1. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  3. You can add more pineapple if your banana flavor is too strong, or take it out if you want more. Play with it and see what you like.
  4. Make sure your pineapples and bananas are super frozen to ensure a super thick texture. 
  5. This is the original recipe from Dole Whip so it's different than Disneyland Dole Whip. 

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 81kcal | Carbohydrates: 6g | Protein: 1g | Fat: 7g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Sodium: 4mg | Potassium: 76mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 5g | Vitamin A: 1IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 5mg | Iron: 1mg

9 oz (1.5 hefty cups) of pineapple

4 oz (1 banana)

Cake sculpted to look like an ornate book

May 1, 2022 Course Preview

The Book of Brandon Cake Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

For the book-lovers, this cake tutorial is a total treat! In this tutorial, you will learn how to create an ornate book design, with decorative scrollwork, a cool artistic stencil design, how to make all the subtle details that make this cake really look like a book, how to acheive the book cover overhangs, and how to make the delicious entremet inside.

39:59 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to create a realistic book cake
  • Learn how to make the book cover, spine of the book, the decorative scroll work and distressed texture

Cake sculpted to look like a book

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Overview Of The Entremet 0:39
  2. Cutting Out The Book Cover 4:25
  3. Stacking The Entremet 5:55
  4. Crumb Coating The Entremet 8:06
  5. Adding A Square Buttercream Layer 9:16
  6. Making The Chocolate Side 17:10
  7. Curving The Spine With Buttercream 19:28
  8. Trimming The Side Panels 21:49
  9. Adding The Chocolate Book Cover 23:56
  10. Making The Fondant Details 26:21
  11. Adding Details To The Spine 27:06
  12. Spraying The Cake With Cocoa Butter 31:43
  13. Adding The Gold Title 33:21
  14. Adding The Final Details 35:29

Downloads

Materials List

Cake sculpted to look like an ornate book

May 1, 2022 Paid Video

The Book of Brandon Cake

Skill level: Intermediate

For the book-lovers, this cake tutorial is a total treat! In this tutorial, you will learn how to create an ornate book design, with decorative scrollwork, a cool artistic stencil design, how to make all the subtle details that make this cake really look like a book, how to acheive the book cover overhangs, and how to make the delicious entremet inside.

39:59 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to create a realistic book cake
  • Learn how to make the book cover, spine of the book, the decorative scroll work and distressed texture

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Overview Of The Entremet 0:39
  2. Cutting Out The Book Cover 4:25
  3. Stacking The Entremet 5:55
  4. Crumb Coating The Entremet 8:06
  5. Adding A Square Buttercream Layer 9:16
  6. Making The Chocolate Side 17:10
  7. Curving The Spine With Buttercream 19:28
  8. Trimming The Side Panels 21:49
  9. Adding The Chocolate Book Cover 23:56
  10. Making The Fondant Details 26:21
  11. Adding Details To The Spine 27:06
  12. Spraying The Cake With Cocoa Butter 31:43
  13. Adding The Gold Title 33:21
  14. Adding The Final Details 35:29

Downloads

Materials List

slice of rose cake on a plate

April 28, 2022 Cake

Rose Cake

This Rose Cake tastes like rose bushes blooming in the spring. It's filled with my Raspberry Filling and topped with sweet tangy raspberry buttercream making this cake super light, soft, and overall beautiful. It makes for a perfect gift for mothers day, valentines day, or a gift to family and friends. Photo of a rose cake with a slice coming out

This Rose Cake contains rose water and dried rose petals that give this cake a light, beautiful essence of rose. The dried rose petals look adorable in each slice you cut and it blends wonderfully with the tang of the raspberry filling and the raspberry buttercream. This recipe is based on my famous white velvet buttermilk cake!

What's In This Blog Post

  • Rose Cake Ingredients
  • Preparing The Dried Flowers and Petals
  • Making The Rose Cake
  • Making The Raspberry Filling
  • Making The Raspberry Buttercream
  • Assembling The Rose Cake
  • Decorating The Rose Cake
  • More Recipes You'll Enjoy
  • Frequently Asked Questions

Rose Cake Ingredients

picture of ingredients with names

Sour Cream: For this recipe, we are using sour cream instead of buttermilk because it's less tangy than buttermilk but it still gives it enough acidity while adding in extra moisture. 

 Rose Water: Since this is a rose cake we obviously need to add rose flavoring. You can use rose extract also because it's the exact same thing as rose water. I'm using Neilsen Massey , but you can use any brand. You can get them on Amazon or find them usually in a mixer section of the grocery store. Find one you like because each brand has a different strength of flavor and smell.

Dried Rose Petals: We are adding dried rose petals inside the batter because it looks pretty, but this is totally optional. The darker color the rose petals are, the stronger your flavor will be. You can use any that you would like but try and use bright colors because when the cakes bake in the oven, the color will become dull. Rose petals are safe to consume, just make sure you buy them organic to make sure they have no pesticides.

Preparing The Dried Flowers and Petals

  1. Take a plate of your choice and place a paper towel on top. pressed flowers on a plate
  2. Place your rose petals and full flowers on a plate. Spread out the full flowers a little to flatten them out. Use as many as you would like.
  3. Place another paper towel on top of the flowers, then place a second plate on top to weigh the petals down.Flowers in between napkins
  4. Microwave for one minute. 
  5. Use for decoration or crush and use in the cake. Note: if you notice after a minute of microwaving that they are still wet, keep microwaving at 15-second intervals until they are dry to the touch. You can also use the same process for any flowers or even leaves. hand holding dried flowers

Making The Rose Cake

  1. Preheat your oven to 350º F and prepare 3 cake pans with cake goop, or your preferred cake release.hand holding bursh painting pan release on cake pan
  2. Add your cake flour, sugar, salt, baking powder, baking soda, and softened butter into the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment. Set aside.hand pouring bowl of flour into bowl
  3. Place half of your sour cream and all of your vegetable oil into a measuring cup. Give it a quick mix until the oil and sour cream are combined. Make sure your sour cream, eggs, and butter are all room temperature or a little bit warm. hand pouring oil into measuring cup
  4. Add your rosewater and vanilla extract into your sour cream and oil mix. Set aside.hand holding mini bowl over measuring cup
  5. Place the remaining half of your sour cream into your egg whites and mix until combined. hand holding fork mixing ingredients together in bowl
  6. Mix your dry ingredients in a bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment on low speed for 1-2 minutes, or until the texture looks like sand. stand mixer bowl filled with dry mix
  7. Take your oil and sour cream mixture, then stream it into your flour mixture while mixing on medium-low speed (speed 4 on a Kitchen Aid, 2 on a Bosch). Mix for 2 minutes (set a timer!) until the color is pale and the mixture is nice and fluffy.spatula covered in batter
  8. Stream in your egg whites and sour cream mixture in 3 parts while mixing on low speed. Make sure to let each part mix for a couple of seconds before adding in the rest. Don't forget to scrape the bowl!hand pouring bowl of egg whites into stand mixer bowl
  9. Add in your crushed rose petals (optional) and mix on low just to combine. hand sprinkling rose petals into batter
  10. Divide your batter into your 3 cake pans. I'm using three, 6"x2" pans or you can use two, 8"x2" pans. (If making cupcakes add 1-2 spoonfuls of batter into each cupcake liner).spatula folding batter into cake pan
  11. Bake for 35-40 minutes or until you can place a toothpick in the center and it comes out clean. ( If you are making cupcakes bake for 15 minutes.) baked cakes on cooling rack

Making The Raspberry Filling

  1. Combine your cold water and cornstarch or clear gel. Give it a quick mix to combine. hand pouring bowl of cornstarch into bowl of water
  2. Place your raspberries and sugar into a medium-sized saucepan. Bring to a boil and stir once in a while with a spatula. hand pouring bowl of sugar onto stove pot of rasberries
  3. Once your mix starts bubbling, add in your cornstarch and water mixture and cook for 1 minute. The cornstarch mix is what helps to thicken the sauce.hand pouring cornstarch mixture into pot
  4. After it's thickened, add in your lemon zest and lemon juice. Give it a quick stir with a spatula. hand pouring cup of lemon juice into pot
  5. OPTIONAL: Strain the raspberry filling into a bowl to get rid of the seeds. If you like having seeds you can skip this part.Hand holding spatula straining raspberry filling over bowl
  6. Set the mix aside to cool down. You can also place it in the fridge or freezer to cool down faster. It's ready to use when it comes to room temperature or below. raspberry filling inside bowl

Making The Raspberry Buttercream

  1. First, place the egg whites and the powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine the ingredients on low, and then whip them on high for 4-5 minutes (until shiny) to dissolve the powdered sugar.stahnd mixer bowl filled with meringew
  2. Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract. If you are adding in any food coloring, this is the point where you would do that. hand adding chunks of butter into bowl
  3. Next, add in your softened butter piece-by-piece, and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine. It will look curdled at first. This is definitely normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping.bowl of stand mixer with frosting inside
  4. After your buttercream looks like this, remove about 1 cup of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted.
  5. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.hand pouring measuring cup of melted frosting into bowl of frosting
  6. Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until the buttercream is white, light, and shiny. Taste test the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!hand holding whisk covered in frosting
  7. Take ¼ cup of the raspberry filling you just made and add a spoonful at a time while mixing on low speed.hand holding spoon pouring raspberry filling into bowl of buttercream
  8. Mix for about a minute until everything is smooth and combined. We want this batch to be light in color because this will be our buttercream for the outside of the cake. Bowl of buttercream
  9. For the filling between the cake layers, we want a stronger raspberry flavor. Take about 2 cups of buttercream and add it to half of your raspberry filling. hand holding spatula above bowl of frosting
  10. Mix until everything is combined and you have your desired flavor and color.hand holding spatula mixing bowl of buttercream

Assembling The Rose Cake

  1. OPTIONAL: Trim the edges of your cake using a serrated knife. I like to do this because it creates sharp and clean edges, but you don't have to. hand holding knife trimming cake layer
  2. Take the first layer of your cake and place it on a cake board.hand placing cake layer on to cake board
  3. Add a thin layer of the raspberry filling, then add a layer of raspberry buttercream on top.hand holding spatula above cake layer with frosting
  4. Place your second layer of cake on top and repeat the process. hand holding spatula spreading frosting on to cake layer
  5. Stack your third cake layer on top of the second and spread a thin layer of buttercream around the whole cake. Scrape off any excess buttercream to where you can almost see your cake layers through your buttercream with your offset spatula or a bench scraper. This is called a crumb coat.picture of frosted cake
  6. Place your cake in the fridge to chill for about 20 minutes or until the cake is firm to the touch. Learn more about baking, trimming, frosting, and decorating a cake in my beginner tutorial.

Decorating The Rose Cake

  1. Once your cake is chilled, take it out of the fridge and cover it again using the other half of your raspberry buttercream. Spread a thin layer using an offset spatula. I'm using the other half because it has more of a blush pink color, but if you want a deeper color you can add more raspberry filling. cake with frosting around it
  2. Scrape off the excess and smooth it out using a bench scraper or offset spatula. hand holding scaper smoothing cake
  3. Once your cake is smooth, take your dried flowers and petals, then place them wherever you would like on your cake by pressing firmly on the edges to make them stick to the buttercream. If you don't want to decorate with flowers, you can make an extra ½ batch of buttercream and use a 1M piping tip to pipe some pretty rosettes along the side of your cake. hand placing flowers on to cake
  4. Keep placing flowers around your whole cake until you are happy with the design. his cake is best served immediately, but it will last for about 4 days in the fridge. I'd take off the flowers before cutting, but you don't have to. let your cake come to room temperature by taking it out of the fridge for a few hours before serving.decorated rose cake

More Recipes You'll Enjoy

Funfetti Cake

Black Forrest Cake

Charlotte Cake

Pistachio Cake with Raspberry Filling

Frequently Asked Questions

Are rose petals edible?

Yes! Most flowers are. Just make sure they are organic and free of pesticides. Some popular roses that are used in foods are Damask roses (Rosa damascena) and Apothecary rose (Rosa gallica).

Where can I buy rose water?

You can find it in the cocktail section of your grocery store, Mediterranean stores, or online.

What flavors go well with rose?

Some flavors that can pair well with a flora taste are pistachio or any fruit flavors such as strawberry, raspberry, or blueberry. You can also just fill your cake with plain vanilla buttercream.

What is the difference between rose water and rose extract?

Rose extract is made similar to vanilla extract by infusing it with vodka for a certain amount of time. To make rose water, you just infuse water with as many rose petals as you would like depending how strong you want your flavor, then you leave it to sit for a few days to weeks. If you are substituting one or the other, remember that rose extract is more potent, so use 1 teaspoon of extract for about every 2 tablespoons of rose water.

Can you make cupcakes with this recipe?

Yes! it will make 24!

Recipe

slice of rose cake on a plate
Print Recipe
4.81 from 42 votes

Rose Cake

This light and fluffy velvet cake has the perfect hint of rose flavor from rose water. Decorate it with real pressed flowers and raspberry buttercream for the ultimate spring dessert.
Prep Time30 minutes mins
Cook Time35 minutes mins
Decorating Time30 minutes mins
Total Time1 hour hr 35 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 3 6 inch rounds
Calories: 3499kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 3 6 inch cake pans or two 8 inch cake pans
  • 1 Bench scraper optional

Ingredients

Rose Cake

  • 14 ounces cake flour
  • 13 ounces granulated sugar
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 tablespoon baking powder
  • ½ teaspoon baking soda
  • 5 ounces egg whites room temperature
  • 4 ounces vegetable oil
  • 10 ounces sour cream room temperature or slightly warm
  • 6 ounces unsalted butter softened
  • 1.5 teaspoon rose water
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 2 tablespoons dried rose petals crushed

Raspberry Filling

  • 3 cups raspberries fresh or frozen
  • 5 ounces sugar
  • 1 tablespoon lemon juice
  • 1 tablespoon lemon zest
  • 4 tablespoons water
  • 2 tablespoons Clear Jel or cornstarch

Rasberry Buttercream

  • 16 ounces unsalted butter room temperature or softened
  • 16 ounces powdered sugar sifted
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 4 ounces pasturized egg whites room temperature
  • 6 ounces raspberry filling

Decoration

  • 2 cups flowers of choice I'm using roses and camellias
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Preparing The Dried Flowers and Petals

  • Take a plate of your choice and place a paper towel on top.
  • Place your rose petals and full rosebuds on a plate. Spread out the full flowers a little to flatten them out. Use as many as you would like.
  • Place another paper towel on top of the roses, then place a second plate on top to weigh the petals down.
  • Place in the microwave for one minute.
  • Use for decoration. Note: if you notice after a minute of microwaving that they are still wet, keep microwaving at 15 second intervals until they are dry to the touch. You can also use the same process for any flowers or even leaves.

Making The Rose Cake

  • Preheat your oven to 350º F and prepare 3 cake pans with cake goop or your prefered cake release
  • Add in your flour, sugar, salt, baking powder, baking soda, and softened butter into the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment. Set aside.
  • Place half of your sour cream and your vegetable oil into a measuring cup. Give it a quick mix until the oil and sour cream are combined.
  • Add in your rose water and vanilla extract into your sour cream and oil mix. Set aside.
  • Place the remaining half of your sour cream into your egg whites and mix until combined.
  • Mix your dry ingredients in your stand mixer on low speed for 1-2 minutes, or until the texture looks like sand.
  • Take your oil and sour cream mixture, then stream it into your flour mixture while mixing on medium - low speed. Mix for 2 minutes or until the color is pale and the mixture is nice and fluffy.
  • Stream in your egg whites and sour cream mixture in 3 parts while mixing on low speed. Make sure to let each part mix for a couple seconds before adding in the rest.
  • Add in your crushed rose petals and mix on low just to combine.
  • Divide your batter into your 3 cake pans. (If making cupcakes add 1-2 spoonfuls of batter into each cupcake liner)
  • Bake for 35-40 minutes or until you can place a toothpick in the center and it comes out clean. (If you are making cupcakes bake for 15 minutes)

Making The Raspberry Filling

  • Combine your water and cornstarch or clear gel. Give it a quick mix to combine.
  • Place your raspberries and sugar into a medium sized saucepan. Bring to a boil ans stir once in a while with a spatula.
  • Once your mix starts bubbling, add in your cornstarch and water mixture and cook for 1 minute. (The cornstarch mix is what helps to thicken the sauce).
  • Add in your lemon zest and lemon juice. Give it a quick stir with a spatula.
  • OPTIONALS: Strain the raspberry filling into a bowl to get rid of the seeds.
  • Set the mix aside to cool down. You can also place it in the fridge or freezer to cool down faster. It's ready to use when  it comes to room temperature or below.

Making The Raspberry Buttercream

  • Place the pasteurized egg whites and powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine ingredients on low, then whip on high for 4-5 minutes to dissolve the powdered sugar. You do NOT need to whip to a meringue.
  • Add in your salt and vanilla extract.
  • Add in your softened butter in chunks and whip with the whisk attachment on high.
  • Now let the buttercream whip until white and fluffy. This will take 8-10 minutes with a KitchenAid, but taste it to see when it's done. When it no longer tastes like butter and is sweet like ice cream, it's done.
  • Optional: switch to the paddle attachment and mix on low for 15-20 minutes to make your buttercream extra smooth.
  • Take ⅓ of your buttercream and place it in a separate bowl. Add ½ cup or as much as you would like of the raspberry filling to half the buttercream.  This will be used for the filling and crumb coat
  • Now add ¼ of raspberry filling to the rest of your buttercream to create a blush color. This will be used as our final layer of icing around the cake.

Assembling The Rose Cake

  • OPTIONAL: Trim the edges of your cake using a serrated knife. I like to do this because it creates sharp and clean edges, but you don't have to.
  • Take the first layer of your cake and place it on a cake board.
  • Add a thin layer of the raspberry filling, then add a layer of raspberry buttercream on top.
  • Place your second layer of cake on top and repeat the process.
  • Stack your third cake layer on top of the second and spread a thin layer of buttercream around the whole cake. Scrape off any excess buttercream to where you can almost see your cake layers through your buttercream with your offset spatula or a bench scraper. This is called a crumb coat.
  • Place your cake in the fridge to chill for about 20 minutes or until the buttercream is firm to the touch.

Decorating The Rose Cake

  • Once your cake is chilled, take it out of the fridge and cover it again using the other half of your raspberry buttercream. Spread a thin layer using an offset spatula. I'm using the other half because it has more of a blush pink color, but if you want a deeper color, add more raspberry filling.
  • Scrape off the excess and smooth it out using a bench scraper or offset spatula.
  • Once your cake is smooth, take your dried flowers and petals, then place them wherever you would like on your cake.
  • Keep placing flowers around your whole cake until you are happy with the design. his cake is best served immediately, but it will last for about 4 days in the fridge. I'd take off the flowers before cutting, but you don't have to. let your cake come to room temperature by taking it out of the fridge for a few hours before serving.

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start
  1. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  3. Need more help with making your first cake? Check out my how to decorate your first cake blog post. 
  4. Make sure all of your cold ingredients (e.g. butter, eggs, milk) are at room temperature or a little warm. Why? Because we want to create an emulsion and allow the ingredients to fully mix together. 
  5. Make your own pan release (cake goop!) The best pan release ever! 
  6. Chill your cakes before frosting and filling. You can cover a frosted and chilled cake in fondant if you wish. This cake is also great for stacking!
  7. If you are using pasteurized egg whites from the fridge then you might notice this rim of cold butter forming. This is normal and can easily be fixed. Simply stop your mixer and remove about ⅓ cup of the buttercream. Melt this in the microwave for about 20 seconds or until it's just barely melted. You don't want it hot! Pour the mixture back into your whipping buttercream and the warmth from the melted buttercream will cause it all to come together and get creamy. This is honestly easier than taking out the egg whites ahead of time and trying to bring them to room temperature.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cake | Calories: 3499kcal | Carbohydrates: 438g | Protein: 27g | Fat: 191g | Saturated Fat: 117g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 9g | Monounsaturated Fat: 48g | Trans Fat: 7g | Cholesterol: 503mg | Sodium: 1489mg | Potassium: 981mg | Fiber: 11g | Sugar: 328g | Vitamin A: 5828IU | Vitamin C: 37mg | Calcium: 380mg | Iron: 3mg
charlotte cake on a blue plate

April 19, 2022 4th of July

Charlotte Cake

This Charlotte Cake is the perfect summer dessert. Made with homemade vanilla ladyfingers, light and creamy bavarian cream, and fresh juicy strawberries. It's also a great make ahead dessert for those last minute get-togethers. charlotte cake on a blue plate

My Charlotte Cake recipe is perfect for spring and summer, while also being a great treat to make for mothers day, galentines, or just something cute to gift to your friends and family for a special occasion. 

What's In This Blog Post

  • Charlotte Cake Ingredients
  • Making Ladyfingers Step by Step
  • Bavarian Cream Step by Step
  • Simple Syrup Step by Step
  • Assembling The Charlotte Cake
  • Frequently Asked Questions
  • More Recipes You'll Love
  • Notes

Charlotte Cake Ingredientsphoto of ingredients with labels

Lady Fingers: We're making my ladyfingers recipe, but you can use store bought if they are available in your area. 

Flour: You can make these lady fingers gluten free by using gluten free flour or almond flour. 

Vanilla Bean: I buy my vanilla beans in bulk because it's way cheaper in the long run this way. If you don't have beans you can also use vanilla paste which is great. For this recipe I would steer away from extract because it won't give you the pure vanilla flavor we want, but if you have no other option it will work ( honestly, you do you. I'm just here for support.). If you want to buy only a few beans or vanilla paste i get mine from Neilson Massey. Be sure to note if you don't use all your vanilla beans, make sure to freeze them or else they will mold pretty quickly.

Strawberry Reduction: I am using my strawberry reduction recipe as a filling for this recipe, but you can make your own or buy any jam at the store.

Making Ladyfingers Step by Step

  1. Preheat your oven to 350ºF 
  2. Place your egg yolks into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Turn the mixer on low and sprinkle in your first measurement of sugar. hand holding spatula scraping bowl of eggs into stand mixer
  3. Once it's combined, increase the speed to medium-high and whip it until the mixture triples in volume, is pale in color, and forms a thick ribbon on the surface of the batter when you drizzle it onto itself. This should take 3-4 minutes.bowl of batter with stand mixer whisk attachment
  4. Combine your flour and salt together in a bowl. 
  5. Sift half the flour mixture over the egg mixture and gently fold it in using a spatula.hand pouring bowl of flour over sifter
  6. Once it's incorporated, sift in the second half of the flour and continue folding until everything is combined. Set it aside.hand holding spatula while folding batter
  7. In a separate mixer bowl, add in your egg whites with your whisk attachment. hand pouring bowl of egg whites into stand mixer
  8. While mixing on medium speed, sprinkle in the second measurement of sugar, then increase the speed to medium high. hand pouring bowl of sugar into bowl of stand mixer
  9. Continue whipping until you reach medium stiff peaks. hand holdng whisk attachment covered in meringue
  10. Fold in ⅓ of the meringue into the egg yolk mixture using a spatula to lighten its density. This might take a few minutes to work all the meringue in but just keep folding. hand holding spatula covered in meringue over bowl of batter
  11. Add in your vanilla extract.
  12. Add in the rest of your meringue and continue folding carefully until its homogeneous. Be careful not to over mix because you will knock out the air inside your batter and your lady fingers will not rise as much.spatula inside bowl of batter
  13. Place your printed templates under parchment paper on 2 sheet pans (one for rounds and one for fingers).
  14. Fit a large piping bag with an 809 piping tip then fill it with the batter. 
  15. Pipe the batter on top of the circle template while holding the tip about ½" away from the pan so that the batter is not too thick. Stop piping about ¼" away from the outline of the circle because the batter will spread. hand holding piping bag while piping batter onto baking sheet.
  16. Place your 8.5"x11" sheet of paper on top of the baking sheet and place some parchment on top. 
  17. Pipe your batter in 8" long lines, leaving about ⅛" of space in between each line. You will have leftover batter, I suggest piping extra cookies or another tray of lady fingers as a backup just in case you have gaps (like I did). hand holding piping bag piping batter onto baking tray
  18. Sift an even layer of powdered sugar over all of the lady fingers including your circular ones and let it soak in for about 2 minutes. Without the powdered sugar the fingers don't rise as much. hand holding sifter full of powder sugar over baking tray
  19. Place the tray in a 350ºF oven for 15-18 minutes. Rotate your tray halfway through baking to ensure even browning. hand placing baking tray of cookies into oven
  20. Remove the ladyfingers from the oven and let them cool.  Once they have cooled gently remove them from the parchment paper to avoid them sticking and tearing later. tray of baked ladyfinger circles

Set the lady fingers aside and begin making your Bavarian cream filling. 

Bavarian Cream Step by Step

  1. Sprinkle the gelatin over the 3oz of cold milk and set aside to bloom. hand holding whisk and bowl of powdered gelatin over bowl of milk
  2. Pour your first measurement of cream, salt, and half of the sugar into a medium sized pot. Bring to a boil over medium heat. hand pouring bowl of sugar into pot of vanilla and cream
  3. Scrape the vanilla seeds out of the pod with a small knife and place them into the cream.pot of cream with vanilla inside
  4. While the cream is heating, whisk together the egg yolks and the other half of sugar in a separate bowl. Whisk immediate or the sugar will make your yolk lumpy.hand pouring sugar into bowl of egg yolks
  5. Once the cream starts boiling, remove it from the heat, then slowly pour ⅓ of your cream into the egg yolk mixture while whisking to prevent the eggs from curdling. This is called tempering your yolks. hand holding whisk and pouring bowl of cream into bowl off egg yolks
  6. Pour your egg yolk mixture back into the pot with the remaining cream, and start heating it again on medium heat while stirring constantly or until the mixture thickens slightly and coats the back of a spoon smoothly (a la nappe). hand holding spoon over pot of cream
  7. Strain the mixture to remove the vanilla pod and fibers (and any cooked bits of egg).hand pouring pot of cream over owl and strainer
  8. While the mixture is still hot, add the bloomed gelatin and stir with a hand whisk  until smooth and combined.hand pouring bowl of gelatin into bowl of cream
  9. Set it in the fridge to cool to room temperature. If you are in a hurry you can also cool the mixture over an ice bath. 
  10. Once the mixture is at room temperature, whip the other measurement of cream in your stand mixer with the whisk attachment until it reaches medium to stiff peaks.hand holding whisk with whipped cream
  11. Fold ⅓ of the whipped cream into the cooled egg mixture until combined to lighten the density. hand holding whisk, whisking batter
  12. Add the remaining whipped cream to the mixture and fold lightly with a spatula until everything is combined. Place it in your fridge until you are ready to use it. hand holding spatula mixing bowl of bavarian cream

Simple Syrup Step by Step

  1. Pour your water and sugar in a medium sized pot over medium heat and bring to a boil. hand pouring sugar into pot
  2. Once the syrup boils, remove from the stove and set aside to cool to room temperature.pot of boiling syrup
  3. Infuse the syrup by placing vanilla beans into your container of choice, then pouring the syrup over leaving to infuse a minimum of 30 min. Store at room temperature. hand pouring syrup into container

Assembling The Charlotte Cake

  1. Cut the lady fingers in half down the middle evenly. hand holding knife cutting lady fingers
  2. On the back of the lady fingers, brush with a layer of simple syrup. hand holding brush painting syrup onto tray of cookies
  3. Place the cake ring on the plate that you will be serving it. Line the interior of the ring with the rows of lady fingers. Place the ladyfinger round in the bottom of the ring. Using the trimming from the ladyfingers to fill any gaps around the bottom edge. hand placing ladyfingers into cake ring
  4. Brush the bottom with a layer of simple syrup. 
  5. Spread a thin layer of strawberry reduction on the first layer of cake. Hand pouring strawberry filling onto layer of cake
  6. Pour half of your Bavarian cream into the cake ring and smooth.hand holding piping bag piping bavarian cream onto cake layer
  7. Add a layer of sliced strawberries on top of the jam.picture of strawberries inside cake
  8. Place the second round of cake and repeat the process of brushing with simple syrup, reduction, sliced strawberries and the second half of the Bavarian cream, smooth the top.hand placing second layer of cake onto fillings
  9. Pipe some Bavarian cream along the wall of the ladyfingers on top.piping bag piping cream on top of cake
  10. OPTIONAL: To make your strawberries topping extra shiny, mix 1 part water and 1 part apricot jam to make a shiny glaze. You can also buy neutral glaze instead.hand holding bowl of water over jam
  11. OPTIONAL: Strain the jam over your bowl of strawberries to get rid of lumps. Mix your strawberries with the jam to make extra shiny.hand straining jam over bowl of strawberries
  12. Arrange your remaining strawberries in a pattern in the middle, or pile them high, whatever you choose. Brush the berries with warm apricot glaze to keep them fresh and shiny. hand placing strawberries on top of cake
  13. Place the Charlotte Cake in the fridge for at least 4 hours to set or overnight. This can be made a day ahead. Keep leftovers covered and refrigerated. 
  14. When ready to display, gently remove the cake ring by lifting up slowly. hand removing cake ring from cake
  15. Decorate by tying a ribbon around the center of the cake and topping with fresh fruit of your choice. Cut and serve the Charlotte Cake as you would any cake. close up of charlotte cake

Frequently Asked Questions

1. What is a charlotte cake?

 It is a French molded dessert. It can be served hot or cold. Also referred to as an "icebox cake" where bread, sponge cake or cookies are used to line a mold, which is then filled with fruit puree, mousse, or custard.

2. How far in advance should I plan ahead for this cake?

You can make this as far in advance as you like. It actually is preferred to make a day ahead so it can completely firm up overnight. It can be kept in the fridge for up to 2 weeks

 3. Can I use store-bought ladyfingers?

Yes, they will be harder and more crunchy so make sure you add more layers of simple syrup so they become nice and soft.

 4. Can I add other fillings? 

Yes you can add any filling you want as long as it stays soft in the fridge (Lemon curd, strawberry puree, stabilized whipped cream, bavarian cream). Refrain from anything that will harden such as buttercream or ganache. 

5. Can I freeze this cake?

Yes! Just make sure to put it in the fridge a day before serving so it can thaw properly. 

More Recipes You'll Love

Homemade Ladyfingers

Vanilla Bean Panna Cotta

Crème Brûlée

Homemade Pastry Cream

Notes

  1. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  3. Make sure your ingredients (e.g. butter, eggs, milk) are at room temperature or a little warm. Why? Because we want to create an emulsion and allow the ingredients to fully mix together. 
  4. Make sure to dust a generous amount of powder sugar on top of the ladyfingers before and after baking. This helps them puff up nicely. 
  5. When piping the ladyfingers on the baking tray, pinch the end of the piping bag when finishing because the batter tends to be runny.

Recipe

charlotte cake on a blue plate
Print Recipe
4.85 from 13 votes

Charlotte Cake

My very light melt in your mouth charlotte cake thats the perfect treat for spring and summer
Prep Time7 hours hrs
Cook Time18 minutes mins
Total Time7 hours hrs 18 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: French
Servings: 1 cake
Calories: 6280kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 1 Piping Bag
  • 1 Metal Piping Tip 806 optional
  • 1 Funnel optional
  • 2 Circular Paper Templates optional

Ingredients

Simple Syrup

  • 8 ounces water
  • 8 ounces sugar
  • 2 beans vanilla split

Ladyfingers

  • 7 large eggs seperated yolks and whites
  • 6 ounces sugar seprate 1 oz of sugar
  • 7 ounces all purpose flour
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
  • 5 ounces powdered sugar

Bavarian Cream

  • 1 bean vanilla split and seperated
  • 12 ounces heavy cream
  • ¼ teaspoon salt
  • 3.5 ounces granulated sugar
  • 6 egg yolks
  • ½ ounce powdered gelatin
  • 3 ounces cold milk
  • 12 ounces whipped cream whipped to medium-stiff peaks

Berry Filling

  • 24 ounces strawberry jam
  • 30 ounces strawberries sliced

Toppings

  • 10 ounces strawberries
  • 3 ounces apricot jam
  • 1 ounce water
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Making Ladyfingers Step-by-Step

  • Preheat oven to 350ºF
  • Place egg yolks into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Turn the mixer on low and sprinkle in your first measurement of sugar. 
  • Once it's combined, increase the speed to medium-high and whip it until the mixture triples in volume, is pale in color, and forms a thick ribbon on the surface of the batter when you drizzle it onto itself. This should take 3-4 minutes.
  • Combine your flour and salt together in a bowl. 
  • Sift half the flour mixture over the egg mixture and gently fold it in using a spatula.
  • Once it's incorporated, sift in the second half of the flour and continue folding until everything is combined. Set it aside.
  • In a separate mixer bowl, add in your egg whites with your whisk attachment. 
  • While mixing on medium speed, sprinkle in the second measurement of sugar, then increase the speed to medium-high. 
  • Continue whipping until you reach medium stiff peaks. 
  • Fold in ⅓ of the meringue into the egg yolk mixture using a spatula to lighten its density. This might take a few minutes to work all the meringue in but just keep folding.
  • Add in your vanilla extract.
  • Add in the rest of your meringue and continue folding carefully until its homogeneous. Be careful not to over-mix because you will knock out the air inside your batter and your ladyfingers will not rise as much.
  • Place your printed templates under parchment paper on 2 sheet pans (one for rounds and one for fingers).
  • Fit a large piping bag with an 809 piping tip then fill it with the batter. 
  • Pipe the batter on top of the circle template while holding the tip about ½" away from the pan so that the batter is not too thick. Stop piping about ¼" away from the outline of the circle because the batter will spread. 
  • Place your 8.5"x11" sheet of paper on top of the baking sheet and place some parchment on top. 
  • Pipe your batter in 8" long lines, leaving about ⅛" of space in between each line. You will have leftover batter, I suggest piping extra cookies or another tray of lady fingers as a backup just in case you have gaps (like I did). 
  • Sift an even layer of powdered sugar over all of the lady fingers including your circular ones and let it soak in for about 2 minutes. Without the powdered sugar the fingers don't rise as much. 
  • Place the tray in a 350ºF oven for 15-18 minutes. Rotate your tray halfway through baking to ensure even browning. 
  • Remove the ladyfingers from the oven and let them cool.  Once they have cooled gently remove them from the parchment paper to avoid them sticking and tearing later. 
  • Set the lady fingers aside and begin making your Bavarian cream filling. 

Bavarian Cream Step-by-Step

  • Sprinkle the gelatin over the 3oz of cold milk and set aside to bloom.
  • Pour your first measurement of cream, salt, and half of the sugar into a medium sized pot. Bring to a boil over medium heat. 
  • Scrape the vanilla seeds out of the pod with a small knife and place them into the cream.
  • While the cream is heating, whisk together the egg yolks and the other half of sugar in a separate bowl. Whisk immediate or the sugar will make your yolk lumpy.
  • Once the cream starts boiling, remove it from the heat, then slowly pour ⅓ of your cream into the egg yolk mixture while whisking to prevent the eggs from curdling. This is called tempering your yolks.
  • Pour your egg yolk mixture back into the pot with the remaining cream, and start heating it again on medium heat while stirring constantly or until the mixture thickens slightly and coats the back of a spoon smoothly.
  • Strain the mixture to remove the vanilla pod and fibers (and any cooked bits of egg).
  • While the mixture is still hot, add the bloomed gelatin and stir with a hand whisk until smooth and combined.
  • Set it in the fridge to cool to room temperature. If you are in a hurry you can also cool the mixture over an ice bath.
  • Once the mixture is at room temperature, whip the other measurement of cream in your stand mixer with the whisk attachment until it reaches medium to stiff peaks.
  • Fold ⅓ of the whipped cream into the cooled egg mixture until combined to lighten the density.
  • Add the remaining whipped cream to the mixture and fold lightly with a spatula until everything is combined. Place it in your fridge until you are ready to use it.

Simple Syrup Step-by-Step

  • Pour your water and sugar in a medium sized pot over medium heat and bring to a boil.
  • Once the syrup boils, remove from the stove and set aside to cool to room temperature.
  • Infuse the syrup by placing vanilla beans into your container of choice, then pouring the syrup over leaving to infuse a minimum of 30 min. Store at room temperature.

Assembling The Charlotte Cake

  • Cut the lady fingers in half down the middle evenly.
  • On the back of the lady fingers, brush with a layer of simple syrup.
  • Place the cake ring on the plate that you will be serving it. Line the interior of the ring with the rows of lady fingers. Place the ladyfinger round in the bottom of the ring. Using the trimming from the ladyfingers to fill any gaps around the bottom edge. 
  • Brush the bottom with a layer of simple syrup.
  • Spread a thin layer of strawberry reduction on the first layer of cake. 
  • Pour half of your Bavarian cream into the cake ring and smooth.
  • Add a layer of sliced strawberries on top of the jam.
  • Place the second round of cake and repeat the process of brushing with simple syrup, reduction, sliced strawberries and the second half of the Bavarian cream, smooth the top.
  • Pipe some Bavarian cream along the wall of the ladyfingers on top.
  • OPTIONAL: To make your strawberries topping extra shiny, mix 1 part water and 1 part apricot jam to make a shiny glaze. You can also buy neutral glaze instead.
  • OPTIONAL: Strain the jam over your bowl of strawberries to get rid of lumps. Mix your strawberries with the jam to make extra shiny.
  • Arrange your remaining strawberries in a pattern in the middle, or pile them high, whatever you choose. Brush the berries with warm apricot glaze to keep them fresh and shiny. 
  • Place the Charlotte Cake in the fridge for at least 4 hours to set or overnight. This can be made a day ahead. Keep leftovers covered and refrigerated. 
  • When ready to display, gently remove the cake ring by lifting up slowly.
  • Decorate by tying a ribbon around the center of the cake and topping with fresh fruit of your choice. Cut and serve the Charlotte Cake as you would any cake. 

Video

Notes

Frequently Asked Questions
1. What is a charlotte cake?
 It is a French molded dessert. It can be served hot or cold. Also referred to as an “icebox cake” where bread, sponge cake or cookies are used to line a mold, which is then filled with fruit puree, mousse, or custard.
2. How far in advance should I plan ahead for this cake?
You can make this as far in advance as you like. It actually is preferred to make a day ahead so it can completely firm up overnight. It can be kept in the fridge for up to 2 weeks
 3. Can I use store-bought ladyfingers?
Yes, they will be harder and more crunchy so make sure you add more layers of simple syrup so they become nice and soft.
 4. Can I add other fillings? 
Yes you can add any filling you want as long as it stays soft in the fridge (Lemon curd, strawberry puree, stabilized whipped cream, bavarian cream). Refrain from anything that will harden such as buttercream or ganache. 
5. Can I freeze this cake?
Yes! Just make sure to put it in the fridge a day before serving so it can thaw properly. 

Notes

  1. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  3. Make sure your ingredients (e.g. butter, eggs, milk) are at room temperature or a little warm. Why? Because we want to create an emulsion and allow the ingredients to fully mix together. 
  4. Make sure to dust a generous amount of powder sugar on top of the ladyfingers before and after baking. This helps them puff up nicely. 
  5. When piping the ladyfingers on the baking tray, pinch the end of the piping bag when finishing because the batter tends to be runny.
 

Nutrition

Serving: 1cake | Calories: 6280kcal | Carbohydrates: 963g | Protein: 105g | Fat: 240g | Saturated Fat: 137g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 17g | Monounsaturated Fat: 67g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 2010mg | Sodium: 1877mg | Potassium: 2917mg | Fiber: 23g | Sugar: 752g | Vitamin A: 9584IU | Vitamin C: 510mg | Calcium: 978mg | Iron: 20mg
Cake decorated to look like the Encanto house and cupcake toppers

April 15, 2022 Paid Video

Encanto Cake with Cupcake Toppers

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Kyong Bell joins us for this awesome Encanto-themed birthday cake project! Learn how to create every character from the movie as a cupcake topper with fondant, how to make patterned fondant and panel a cake with it, and how to make a light-up candle on the cake.

In addition to all of this, you will also learn how to create the special doors on the house from the film, and how to draw and paint details on fondant.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

2:03:17 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • Learn how to create an Encanto birthday cake with cupcake toppers of every character from the film
  • How to make a patterned fondant panel and panel a cake
  • Learn how to make a light-up candle topper
  • How to paint and draw details on fondant

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Making Isabela 0:49
  2. Making Abuela 14:47
  3. Making Bruno 26:46
  4. Making Luisa 33:53
  5. Making Dolores 42:10
  6. Making Mirabel 46:38
  7. Adding Details To Bruno 52:05
  8. Adding Details To Abuela 56:37
  9. Making The Butterflies 1:12:29
  10. Rolling Out The Fondant 1:18:36
  11. Making The Flower Pattern 1:22:24
  12. Paneling The Fondant 1:26:35
  13. Covering The Cake Board 1:34:04
  14. Making The Doors 1:37:33
  15. Adding The Doors And People 1:47:18
  16. Making The Candle Topper 1:53:02
  17. Finishing Touches 2:02:05

Downloads

Materials List

Cake decorated to look like the Encanto house and cupcake toppers

April 15, 2022 Course Preview

Encanto Cake with Cupcake Toppers Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Kyong Bell joins us for this awesome Encanto-themed birthday cake project! Learn how to create every character from the movie as a cupcake topper with fondant, how to make patterned fondant and panel a cake with it, and how to make a light-up candle on the cake.

In addition to all of this, you will also learn how to create the special doors on the house from the film, and how to draw and paint details on fondant.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

2:03:17 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • Learn how to create an Encanto birthday cake with cupcake toppers of every character from the film
  • How to make a patterned fondant panel and panel a cake
  • Learn how to make a light-up candle topper
  • How to paint and draw details on fondant

Cake decorated to look like the house from Encanto with cupcake toppers

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Making Isabela 0:49
  2. Making Abuela 14:47
  3. Making Bruno 26:46
  4. Making Luisa 33:53
  5. Making Dolores 42:10
  6. Making Mirabel 46:38
  7. Adding Details To Bruno 52:05
  8. Adding Details To Abuela 56:37
  9. Making The Butterflies 1:12:29
  10. Rolling Out The Fondant 1:18:36
  11. Making The Flower Pattern 1:22:24
  12. Paneling The Fondant 1:26:35
  13. Covering The Cake Board 1:34:04
  14. Making The Doors 1:37:33
  15. Adding The Doors And People 1:47:18
  16. Making The Candle Topper 1:53:02
  17. Finishing Touches 2:02:05

Downloads

Materials List

lady fingers on a plate

April 14, 2022 Biscuits and Scones

Homemade Ladyfingers

Ladyfingers are a great recipe to learn how to make because they are a main ingredient in many popular desserts such as tiramisu, charlotte cake, and trifles. They are super light and fluffy, making them a perfect snack during your next coffee break.lady fingers on a plate

Ladyfingers are meringue-based cookies which makes them super spongey. That makes them great cookies for soaking up any kind of liquid they come into contact with. They are way softer than the ladyfingers you'd find at a store, so they can hold more liquid to enhance your desserts.

What's In This Blog Post

  • LADYFINGER INGREDIENTS
  • LADYFINGERS STEP BY STEP
  • FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS
  • MORE RECIPES YOU'LL LOVE

LADYFINGER INGREDIENTS

The best part about this recipe is that there are no special ingredients you need to go hunting for to make this recipe. There are only five ingredients and they are probably already in your pantry if you are a regular baker. ( PHEW! No extra trip to the store necessary.)

picture of ingredients with ingredient names

Vanilla: For this recipe we are using extract, but you can use a vanilla bean or vanilla paste. I am using vanilla extract from Neilson Massey.

LADYFINGERS STEP BY STEP

  1. Preheat your oven to 350º F.
  2. Prepare a sheet pan with some parchment paper
  3. Place your egg yolks into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Turn the mixer on low and sprinkle in your first measurement of sugar. Hand pouring sugar into mixing bowl
  4. Once the egg yolks are combined, increase the speed to medium-high. Whip until the mixture triples in volume, is pale in color, and forms a thick ribbon on the surface of the batter when you drizzle it onto itself. This may take about 3-4 minutes.Whisk attachment covered in lady finger batter over mixing bowl
  5. Combine your flour and salt together in a separate bowl.
  6. Sift half of the flour mixture over the egg mixture, then gently fold it using a spatula.Sifter on top of bowl with flour inside
  7. Once your flour and egg mixture is incorporated, sift in the second half of the flour. Continue folding until everything is combined. Set aside.spatula inside bowl of batter.
  8. In a separate mixer bowl, add in your egg whites with your whisk attachment.
  9. While mixing on medium speed, sprinkle in the second measurement of sugar, then increase the speed to medium-high.Hand pouring sugar into mixing bowl.
  10. Continue whipping until you reach medium-stiff peaks. 
  11. Fold ⅓ of the meringue into the egg yolk mixture using a spatula to lighten its density. This might take a few minutes to work all the meringue in but just keep folding. hand holding spatula covered in batter over mixing bowl
  12. Then add in the rest of your meringue and continue folding carefully until it's homogeneous. Be careful not to over mix because you will knock out the air inside your batter and your lady fingers will not rise well.Spatula inside mixing bowl filled with batter.
  13. Fit a large piping bag fitted with an 806 piping tip then fill it with the batter. ( If you don't have a piping tip you can just cut a decent sized hole in the piping bag.)
  14. Pipe your batter in 4" long lines, leaving about 1" of space in between each line.hand holding piping bag filled with batter piping cookies onto tray.
  15. Sift an even layer of powdered sugar over all of the ladyfingers and let it soak in for about 2 minutes. Without the powdered sugar, the fingers don't rise as much. 
  16. Place the tray in a 350" oven for 15-18 minutes. Rotate the tray halfway through baking to ensure even browning. Tray filled with lady finger cookies.
  1. Remove the ladyfingers from the oven and let them cool.  Once they have cooled gently remove them from the parchment paper to avoid them sticking and tearing later. 

They are now ready to eat!

hand holding cookie dipping in cup of coffee.

FREQUENTLY ASKED QUESTIONS

Why are they called Lady Fingers?

They are called ladyfingers because their shape resemble fingers of a woman.

Can I make this gluten-free?

Yes! You just need to replace the flour with an extra part of cornstarch or almond flour.

Is the texture supposed to be soft or crunchy?

It can be either! Typically store bought ladyfingers are very crunchy, so making them homemade is ideal if you want them super soft and able to soak up more moisture.

What can I use ladyfingers for?

They are great to absorb any liquid which makes for a great soft and flavorful dessert. You can also eat them on their own and dip them in your coffee or hot chocolate.

MORE RECIPES YOU'LL LOVE

Elegant Lemon Tartes

Macaron Recipe

Mini Pavlova With Berry Chantilly Cream

Charlotte Cake

Recipe

lady fingers on a plate
Print Recipe
4.50 from 8 votes

Homemade Ladyfingers

These are easiest and softest homemade ladyfingers you can make from scratch. They will soak up a lot of moisture, and they are perfect to dip in your coffee or add into your next dessert.
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time18 minutes mins
Total Time28 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: French
Servings: 24 cookies
Calories: 86kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • 1 Piping Bag
  • 1 Sifter
  • 1 Round Piping Tip

Ingredients

  • 7 Large Eggs (Separate the yolks and whites)
  • 6 ounces Granulated Sugar (Separate 1 ounce of the sugar)
  • 7 ounces All Purpose Flour
  • ¼ teaspoon Salt
  • 2 teaspoons Vanilla Extract
  • 1.5 ounces Powdered Sugar (Used for dusting)
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

  • Preheat your oven to 350ºF.
  • Place your egg yolks into the bowl of a stand mixer with the whisk attachment. Turn the mixer on low and sprinkle in your 1 ounce measurement of sugar and the vanilla.
  • Once it's combined, increase the speed to medium high and whip until the mixture triples in volume, is pale in color and forms a thick ribbon on the surface of the batter when you drizzle it onto itself. This will take about 3-4 minutes.
  • Combine your flour and salt together in a separate bowl.
  • Sift half of the flour mixture over the egg mixture and gently fold it using a spatula.
  • Once it's incorporated, sift in the second half of the flour and continue folding until everything is combined. Set aside.
  • In a separate mixer bowl, add in your egg whites with your whisk attachment.
  • While mixing on medium speed, sprinkle in the second measurement of sugar, then increase the speed to medium high. Continue whipping until you reach medium-stiff peaks.
  •  Fold ⅓ of the meringue into the egg yolk mixture using a spatula to lighten its density. This might take a few minutes to work all the meringue in but just keep folding. 
  • Then add in the rest of your meringue and continue folding carefully until it's homogeneous. Be careful not to over mix because you will knock out the air inside your batter and your lady fingers will not rise well.
  • Place your printed templates under parchment paper on 2 sheet pans (one for rounds and one for fingers) 
  • Fit a large piping bag fitted with an 806 piping tip then fill it with the batter. ( If you don't have a piping tip you can just cut a decent sized hole in the piping bag).
  • Pipe the batter on top of the circle template while holding the tip about ½ away from the pan so that the batter is not too thick. Stop piping about ¼" away from the outline of the circle because the batter will spread.
  • Place your 8.5"x11" sheet of paper on top of the baking sheet and place some parchment on top. Pipe your batter in 8" long lines, leaving about ⅛" of space in between each line. You will have leftover batter, I suggest piping extra cookies or another tray of lady fingers as a backup just in case you have gaps (like I did).
  • Sift an even layer of powdered sugar over all of the lady fingers and let it soak in for about 2 minutes.
  • Without the powdered sugar the fingers don't rise as much. Place the tray in a 350" oven for 15-18 minutes. Rotate the tray halfway through baking to ensure even browning. 
  • Remove the ladyfingers from the oven and let them cool.  Once they have cooled gently remove them from the parchment paper to avoid them sticking and tearing later. 

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start
  1. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  3. Make sure your ingredients (e.g. butter, eggs, milk) are at room temperature or a little warm. Why? Because we want to create an emulsion and allow the ingredients to fully mix together. 
  4. Make sure to dust a generous amount of powder sugar on top of the ladyfingers before and after baking. This helps them puff up nicely. 
  5. When piping the ladyfingers on the baking tray, pinch the end of the piping bag when finishing because the batter tends to be runny.

Nutrition

Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 86kcal | Carbohydrates: 15g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 1g | Saturated Fat: 1g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 1g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 54mg | Sodium: 45mg | Potassium: 30mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 9g | Vitamin A: 79IU | Calcium: 10mg | Iron: 1mg
cake sculpted to look like a football, soccer ball, baseball, golf ball and baseball

April 1, 2022 Course Preview

Sportsball Cake Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

Batter up! This online course features something I know almost nothing about- SPORTS!!

For this cake, I wanted to try putting together all of the sports-related balls and make a gravity-defying project with a twist... all of the chocolate spheres except the bottom are hollow, made from tempered chocolate, with candy inside for a smashing surprise.

In this tutorial, you'll learn how to mold a football, basketball, baseball and golf ball out of chocolate, how to fill them with candies and provide support, how to make the soccer ball out of cake and decorate it to look just like the real thing.

50:44 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a gravity-defying cake that looks like a realistic basketball, soccer ball, football, golf ball and baseball
  • Learn how to make several balls out of tempered chocolate with candy inside like a pinata
  • How to create an internal structure that supports the gravity-defying structure

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Molding The Chocolate 0:29
  2. Stacking The Cakes 1:57
  3. Assembling The Soccer Ball Cake 3:57
  4. Coloring The Chocolate 9:13
  5. Molding The Basketball 10:52
  6. Painting The Basketball 11:43
  7. Putting The Basketball Together 12:21
  8. Molding The Chocolate Football 15:12
  9. Unmolding The Football 17:29
  10. Painting The Football 17:55
  11. Putting The Football Together 19:26
  12. Molding The Baseball 21:08
  13. Coloring The Chocolate 22:09
  14. Putting The Baseball Together 23:11
  15. Making The Golf Ball 24:45
  16. Making The Chocolate Pipes 26:07
  17. Covering The Cake Board In Fondant 27:19
  18. Adding The Threaded Rod 29:45
  19. Covering The Soccer Ball In Fondant 31:31
  20. Adding The Chocolate Pipe 37:47
  21. Adding The Fondant Panels 40:48
  22. Adding The Buttercream Grass 45:06
  23. Putting It All Together 46:58

Downloads

Materials List

cake sculpted to look like a football, soccer ball, baseball, golf ball and baseball

April 1, 2022 Paid Video

Sportsball Cake

Skill level: Intermediate

Batter up! This online course features something I know almost nothing about- SPORTS!!

For this cake, I wanted to try putting together all of the sports-related balls and make a gravity-defying project with a twist... all of the chocolate spheres except the bottom are hollow, made from tempered chocolate, with candy inside for a smashing surprise.

In this tutorial, you'll learn how to mold a football, basketball, baseball and golf ball out of chocolate, how to fill them with candies and provide support, how to make the soccer ball out of cake and decorate it to look just like the real thing.

50:44 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a gravity-defying cake that looks like a realistic basketball, soccer ball, football, golf ball and baseball
  • Learn how to make several balls out of tempered chocolate with candy inside like a pinata
  • How to create an internal structure that supports the gravity-defying structure

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Molding The Chocolate 0:29
  2. Stacking The Cakes 1:57
  3. Assembling The Soccer Ball Cake 3:57
  4. Coloring The Chocolate 9:13
  5. Molding The Basketball 10:52
  6. Painting The Basketball 11:43
  7. Putting The Basketball Together 12:21
  8. Molding The Chocolate Football 15:12
  9. Unmolding The Football 17:29
  10. Painting The Football 17:55
  11. Putting The Football Together 19:26
  12. Molding The Baseball 21:08
  13. Coloring The Chocolate 22:09
  14. Putting The Baseball Together 23:11
  15. Making The Golf Ball 24:45
  16. Making The Chocolate Pipes 26:07
  17. Covering The Cake Board In Fondant 27:19
  18. Adding The Threaded Rod 29:45
  19. Covering The Soccer Ball In Fondant 31:31
  20. Adding The Chocolate Pipe 37:47
  21. Adding The Fondant Panels 40:48
  22. Adding The Buttercream Grass 45:06
  23. Putting It All Together 46:58

Downloads

Materials List

naked wedding cake decorated with flowers

March 28, 2022 Blog

How to Bake, Assemble, and Deliver a Naked Wedding Cake

This trendy naked wedding cake has a classic rustic style and tastes delicious thanks to my popular easy vanilla cake recipe and easy buttercream frosting. You can learn to make this even if you've never made a wedding cake before! Plus tips and tricks for stable stacking and applying fresh flowers safely. No one will know how easy this naked wedding cake was to make because it looks so beautiful and professional!

A naked wedding cake is much easier to put together than a standard wedding cake because you don't have to worry about that final layer of buttercream. Overall, the key to a beautiful naked wedding cake is using good cake pans to make nice straight cake layers and using a bench scraper to get the sides nice and straight.

Here is a link to all the tools and equipment you will need to make a naked wedding cake. Nothing fancy but you'll definitely need a few things before you get started.

equipment on table

What's In This Blog Post

  • Naked Wedding Cake Ingredients
  • Cake Terminology
  • How to Calculate How Much Cake You Need
  • Making The Cake Layers
  • Easy Buttercream Instructions
  • Preparing Cake Tiers
  • Assembling the Naked Wedding Cake
  • Packaging the Wedding Cake for Delivery
  • Decorating Your Cake with Fresh Flowers Safely
  • FAQ
  • Expert Tips
  • More Posts You'll Love

Naked Wedding Cake Ingredients

Buttermilk: This cake calls for buttermilk. Why does it use buttermilk? Buttermilk works to break down the gluten in the all-purpose flour and is what will give your naked wedding cake a velvety, soft texture.

If you do not have buttermilk, you can create your own buttermilk substitute to achieve a tender, naked wedding cake texture.

Pasteurized egg whites: This easy buttercream frosting recipe calls for pasteurized egg whites. Pasteurization is what makes eggs safe to eat without cooking.

If you can't find pasteurized egg whites, you can pasteurize them yourself and just use the egg whites. NOTE: all eggs in the USA are already pasteurized so you can use shelled egg whites separated from the yolk as well.

Cake Terminology

If you've never made a naked wedding cake or any kind of cake, you might be curious about some of these terms we are about to talk about. I hope I covered them all but if not, feel free to leave me a comment and I'll try to answer your question as soon as I can.

  • Cake Layer - One single layer of cake.
  • Cake Tier - Usually made up of two or three layers of cake with frosting or filling in between and then covered in more frosting and sometimes other decor on the outside.
  • Cake cardboard - A cardboard round that is the same size as the cake tier and is placed under the tier to help support the weight of the cake if stacked and to allow you to move the tiers around as you're working on the cake.
  • Cake Supports - Thick milkshake straws or sometimes dowels that are cut to the same height as the cake tier and are used to support the weight of the cake teir stacked on top. Without cake supports, the cake tier above will crush the cake tier below.
  • Cake Board - A thick cardboard drum or cake platter that is used to support all the wedding cake tiers. A thin cardboard will not suffice and could bend during transport and also doesn't look that great.

How to Calculate How Much Cake You Need

styrofoam cake tiers numbered

Not sure how many servings of cake you will need? No problem, you can download my free cake calculation guide and cake cutting chart or take a look at the image above. Each number represents roughly how many servings of cake you will get from each tier.

Making The Cake Layers

  1. First, preheat the oven to 335ºF (168ºC).
  2. Prepare two 8" cake pans with cake goop or another pan release.
  3. Then, measure out all of your ingredients using a digital kitchen scale and make sure your eggs, milk and butter are all room temperature or even a little on the warm side so everything mixes together properly.ingredients in clear bowls surrounding digital kitchen scale
  4. In a mixing bowl, combine together the buttermilk, melted butter, oil, eggs, and vanilla. Your wet ingredients should all be slightly warm. I microwave my buttermilk for about 30 seconds and place my eggs (still in the shell) in a bowl of warm water.easy vanilla cake wet ingredients
  5. Next, in the bowl of your stand mixer using a paddle attachment, combine the flour, sugar, salt, baking soda, and baking powder. Let the mixer slowly combine for a few seconds.easy vanilla cake dry ingredients
  6. While the mixer is on low, pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients.adding wet ingredients into dry ingredients
  7. Then, turn the mixer up to medium speed and mix until the batter is combined. Scrape the bowl to make sure all of the ingredients are combined.
  8. Let the batter mix on medium speed for 1 minute. It should look kind of like pancake batter.close up of easy vanilla cake batter
  9. Divide the batter evenly between the prepared cake pans and place them into the oven on a middle rack.pouring cake batter into the cake pan
  10. Bake the cakes for 40-50 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
  11. Finally, allow the cake to cool for 10 minutes and flip out onto a cooling rack. If you plan to frost and decorate the cake on the same day, you can place the cakes into the freezer unwrapped for about an hour or until they are cold (but not frozen). PRO TIP: If you plan to decorate your cake at a later date, then you will wrap the cakes in plastic wrap first before placing them in the freezer.two vanilla cakes cooling on a rackcake wrapped in plastic wrap

Easy Buttercream Instructions

This is my favorite buttercream recipe. It is a mock swiss meringue recipe and isn't too sweet. It doesn't crust and is a huge hit with people who say they don't even like buttercream!

  1. First, place the egg whites and the powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine the ingredients on low, and then whip them on high for 4-5 minutes (until shiny) to dissolve the powdered sugar.close up of egg whites and powdered sugar in a mixing bowl
  2. Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract. If you are adding in any food coloring, this is the point where you would do that. PRO TIP: Use a toothpick to transfer 1-2 drops of food coloring to your frosting to avoid putting too much color in your buttercream.
  3. Next, add in your softened butter piece-by-piece, and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine. It will look curdled at first. This is definitely normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping.adding butter to buttercream mixture
  4. If your buttercream looks curdled, remove about 2 cups of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.close up of cold buttercreampouring melted buttercream back into the mixer
  5. Optional: Add in 2 tiny specks of purple food coloring to make the buttercream whiter. You can use any food coloring you want, but if you want my recommendation, I use Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!
  6. Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until the buttercream is white, light, and shiny. Taste test the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!close up of whipped buttercream
  7. Finally, switch to a paddle attachment and mix the buttercream on low speed for up to 15-20 minutes to make the buttercream ultra smooth and remove any air bubbles. Ultimately, this step is optional. But, if you want really creamy frosting, then you don't want to skip this final step.close up of mixed buttercream

Preparing Cake Tiers

  1. First, trim off the dome of your cake layers. Do not trim off the sides of the cake. If you trim off the sides of the cake, then your cake will lose moisture quicker since this is a naked cake and the sides won't be covered in buttercream.trimming cake dome
  2. Then, trim your cake boards to be a little bit smaller than the width of the cake. I made mine ½" smaller.trimming cake board with scissors
  3. Apply a small amount of tape to your turntable, and then place your cake board on top. This will keep the cake board from sliding around.hands placing a piece of tape down
  4. Next, place your cake on top of the cake board.hands holding cake
  5. Spread a thin layer of buttercream on top of the cake using an offset spatula. The layer of buttercream should be between ¼″ to ½" thick. When smoothing out the buttercream onto the cake, keep the buttercream as level as possible (i.e. avoid large bumps of buttercream).spatula smoothing buttercream on top of cake
  6. Then, repeat this process with the second cake layer, and then add your final layer of cake on top.hands placing the second cake layerhands touching top cake layer
  7. Spread a very thin layer of buttercream around the sides and top of the cake. This thin layer will seep into the small air bubbles of the cake and help seal in the moisture.hand holding cake tier partially frostedcake tiers covered in buttercream frosting
  8. Next, use a bench scraper to remove the buttercream from the sides of the cake.bench scraper removing buttercream from sides of cake tiers
  9. Finally, use a spatula to smooth out the buttercream on top of the cake.spatula on top of frosted cake
  10. Repeat this process as needed for any additional layers of cake you have left depending on how many tiers your naked wedding cake has.
  11. Place your cake tiers into the fridge for at least an hour before stacking. I typically refrigerate my cakes overnight before assembly to give them time to settle which can help prevent cracking in your buttercream later.

Assembling the Naked Wedding Cake

  1. Download my cake support guide to help get you started!
  2. Begin with your bottom cake tier in front of you.
  3. Grab the cake pan you used that is the same size as the smaller cake tier you want to stack on top of your bottom cake tier. Place the smaller cake pan right on top of the bottom tier so that the cake pan is sitting on top of the buttercream.
  4. Use a spatula to trace along the edge of the cake pan to mark a line. This will show you where you need to place your straws and skewers to support the weight of the next cake tier.cake pan on top of cake tier and knife tracing the cake pan
  5. Place a straw through the top of the bottom tier cake right in the center. After you've placed the straw through the cake tier, move your thumb to the spot where the top of the cake ends and then use scissors to trim off the excess straw. You don't want to see any straw popping out of the top of the cake.inserting a straw into the center of the top of a caketrimming a straw with scissors
  6. Then, use the trimmed straw as a guide to cut all of your remaining straws so they are all the same height as the cake tier.trimming the height of straws with scissors
  7. Next, stick your straws through your cake about ¼″ inward from the line you created using the cake pan in a circle. If you're unsure how many straws you need, generally, you need 1 straw per inch of cake you're needing to support (i.e. for a 6" cake, you need 6 straws as supports beneath it to keep the top cake from collapsing).pushing straw into cakestraws inserted all the way down into top layer of cake
  8. Then, after you've placed the straws, use a spatula to smooth buttercream over the top to hide the straw holes.
  9. Now you are ready to place your smaller cake tier on top of the bottom (larger) cake tier.hands placing cake tiers on top of cake
  10. Make sure the cake tier is centered, and then insert a skewer through the center of the top cake tier. Place the skewer all of the way inside the cake (it will puncture the cake board and that is okay). Cover the spot where the skewer is with a little bit of buttercream and smooth it out.placing skewer into center of cake
  11. Repeat as needed until all of your cake tiers are stacked onto your cake.naked wedding cake on cake plate
  12. Place the cake in the refrigerator overnight until you need to deliver the cake to the wedding or event.

Packaging the Wedding Cake for Delivery

  1. You will need a box that is the same width as the the cake board. So if your cake board is 12" then you will need a 12" square box that is tall enough to fit your stacked cake. I usually get my boxes in bulk from ULINE in common sizes so I have them on hand or you can buy one at a time from FedEX.
  2. First, you trim your box to create a flap on one side. Use an X-acto blade to cut downwards along 2 corners of the box, and then bend that side downward to create a flap where your cake will enter in and out of the box. hand trimming cardboard box with knife
  3. If you have a piece of cardboard on the bottom that is sticking up where your cake is going to be, use a piece of tape to stick it down. placing tape inside of cardboard box
  4. Next, carefully slide your cake on top of the flap and into the cardboard box. naked cake inside cardboard box
  5. If your cake is taller than your cardboard box, then you can move the box flaps upward and use tape to join the flaps with the corners so the box becomes taller. tape on cardboard box
  6. Want additional coverage on top? You can cover the exposed top of the box with some plastic wrap to protect the cake. This is especially helpful if it's a windy day and you're worried about dust, debris, or rain getting on the cake.
  7. Now your cake is ready to travel to the venue! When you arrive at the wedding and it's time to unbox your cake, remove the tape from the box and slide it out and move it to the cake table. 

Decorating Your Cake with Fresh Flowers Safely

Interested in what types of flowers are best for a wedding cake? Check out my friend Shani's very comprehensive downloadable book on the subject.

  1. Now that you've arrived at the wedding venue and it's time to decorate the cake with flowers. Flowers are typically provided by the florist and are aleady at the venue by the time you arrive. If you are buying your own flowers, I like to get mine from places like Trader Joes that have a big assortment of flowers for making bouquets.
  2. Use a small amount of buttercream to fill in any gaps where the cake tiers meet and along the bottom of the cake tier on the cake plate. Smooth out the buttercream you added. piping buttercream on bottom of cakehand smoothing buttercream on cake
  3. First, prepare your fresh flowers by trimming them down so that you have about 2"-3" of stem. Remove any of the bad petals that appear bruised. fresh flowershand holding fresh flower stemshand holding small flower by the stem
  4. Then, wrap all of your flower and plant stems in plastic wrap. This will keep the water from the flower trapped inside of the stem which will not only keep the flowers fresh for longer, but it will protect the cake from being contaminated by the plant. wrapping flower stem with plastic wrap
  5. Next, insert your flower that is wrapped in plastic wrap into a straw. pink flower inside a straw next to cake
  6. Insert the straw into the cake where you want the flower to sit. If you find yourself hitting the cardboard, take the straw out of the cake and remove the flower from the straw and trim it down and try again. close up of flower on naked wedding cake
  7. Then, repeat until you have decorated your cake with flowers and plants to your liking.close up of flowers on naked wedding cakenaked wedding cake decorated with flowersnaked wedding cake decorated with flowers

FAQ

What is inside a naked cake?

Naked cakes are made up of layers of cake stacked between buttercream or ganache.

What is the difference between a naked cake and a semi-naked cake?

A naked cake is made up of cake layers that are entirely exposed on the sides. A semi-naked cake has a thin layer of buttercream along the sides added and then scraped off to have a semi-transparent edge exposing the sides of the cake.

Will naked cakes dry out?

No, they will not dry out. If you are baking your cakes and storing them until you are ready to frost and stack them, wrap them in plastic wrap to trap the moisture and keep the cakes moist. You can also brush a layer of simple syrup on the outside of the cakes before frosting them to help keep them moist.

How do I cut and serve a wedding cake?

Start by removing all of the flowers and set them aside. Then, take the top cake tier off of the bottom tier and place it in front of you. PRO TIP: Keep your cake cutting knife warm by warming it up with a glass of warm water. Your cake will cut a lot easier if the knife is hot.

Slice the front of the cake about 1" thick. Let the slice fall onto a plate or cutting board. Cut into 2" Thick pieces. Watch my video on how to cut a wedding cake.

Expert Tips

  • Download my straw support cake guide to get started! 
  • Bake your cakes 2 days before the wedding or event. For instance, if your event is on Saturday, then bake your cakes on Thursday. On Friday, focus on frosting and stacking the cakes. Then, when Saturday comes, all you'll need to focus on is delivering the cake to its final destination and then adding in any fresh flowers after you arrive at the venue. 
  • In the long run, a chilled cake is going to transfer much easier than a freshly frosted cake. Ultimately, this is why it's crucial to take several days to prepare the wedding cake so you can freeze or refrigerate your frosted and stacked cake until it is ready to travel to the event. 
  • Generally speaking, when you are choosing what flowers to use to decorate your cake, think about how big the cake is. If you don't have a huge cake, then you don't want huge flowers. Think about the ratio of how big a flower looks on a cake tier, and use a little bit of greenery in addition to colorful flowers. Ultimately, use the bouquet/boutonniere as your guide to decide what flowers to include and how much. When in doubt, stick with the rule of 3s (three of the same flower, three types of flowers/plants, groups of three grouped together, etc).
naked wedding cake decorated with flowers

More Posts You'll Love

Easy Vanilla Cake (One Bowl Recipe)

Easy Buttercream Frosting

White Cake Recipe from Scratch

How to Decorate Your First Cake

Recipe

naked wedding cake decorated with flowers
Print Recipe
4.73 from 40 votes

Naked Wedding Cake

In this recipe tutorial, I will walk you through step-by-step how to bake, assemble, decorate, and transport a naked wedding cake! This naked wedding cake is made using my easy vanilla cake recipe and my easy buttercream recipe!
Prep Time20 minutes mins
Cook Time40 minutes mins
Decorating1 hour hr
Total Time2 hours hrs
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 36 servings
Calories: 680kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • turntable (or a large lazy susan)
  • cake boards for each size tier that you're making (for this tutorial, we're using 8" and 6")
  • Cake Pans
  • Bench scraper
  • Offset Spatula
  • milkshake straws
  • skewers
  • If you are decorating the cake with flowers, you will also need plastic wrap, straws, and scissors to safely add the flowers to the cake. 

Ingredients

Naked Wedding Cake

  • 32 ounces all purpose flour
  • 32 ounces granulated sugar
  • 2 teaspoons salt
  • 2 teaspoons baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon baking powder
  • 6 large eggs room temperature
  • 10 ounces vegetable oil
  • 20 ounces buttermilk room temperature
  • 8 ounces melted unsalted butter (melted, but not hot)
  • 4 teaspoons vanilla extract

Easy Vanilla Buttercream

  • 48 ounces unsalted butter room temperature. You can use salted butter, but it will affect the taste and you need to leave out additional salt.
  • 48 ounces powdered sugar sifted if not from a bag
  • 4 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 12 ounces pasteurized egg whites room temperature
  • 2 TINY drops purple food coloring (optional) for whiter frosting
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

Making the Naked Wedding Cake Batter

  • First, preheat the oven to 335ºF (168ºC).
  • Prepare two 8" cake pans with cake goop or another pan release.
  • Then, measure out all of your ingredients using a digital kitchen scale. You can mix the wet and dry ingredients separately for a finer texture, or just measure and add directly into the bowl of your stand mixer for fewer dishes.
  • In a mixing bowl, combine and mix together the buttermilk, butter, oil, eggs, and vanilla. Your wet ingredients should all be slightly warm. I microwave my buttermilk for about 30 seconds and place my eggs (still in the shell) in a bowl of warm water.
  • Next, in the bowl of your stand mixer using a paddle attachment, combine the flour, sugar, salt, baking soda, and baking powder. Let the mixer slowly combine for a few seconds.
  • While the mixer is on low, pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients.
  • Then, turn the mixer up to medium speed and mix until the batter is combined. Scrape the bowl to make sure all of the ingredients are combined.
  • Let the batter mix on speed 2 for 1 minute. It should look kind of like pancake batter.
  • Divide the batter evenly between the prepared cake pans and place them into the oven on a middle rack.
  • Bake the cakes for 40-50 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
  • Finally, allow the cake to cool for 10 minutes and flip out onto a cooling rack. If you plan to frost and decorate the cake on the same day, you can place the cakes into the freezer unwrapped for about an hour or until they are cold (but not frozen). PRO TIP: If you plan to decorate your cake at a later date, then you will wrap the cakes in plastic wrap first before placing them in the freezer.

Easy Buttercream Instructions

  • First, place the egg whites and the powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine the ingredients on low, and then whip them on high for 4-5 minutes (until shiny) to dissolve the powdered sugar.
  • Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract. If you are adding in any food coloring, this is the point where you would do that. PRO TIP: Use a toothpick to transfer 1-2 drops of food coloring to your frosting to avoid putting too much color in your buttercream.
  • Next, add in your softened butter piece-by-piece, and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine. It will look curdled at first. This is definitely normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping.
  • If your buttercream looks curdled, remove about 1 cup of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.
  • Optional: Add in 2 drops of purple food coloring to make the buttercream whiter. You can use any food coloring you want, but if you want my recommendation, I use Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!
  • Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until the buttercream is white, light, and shiny. Taste test the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!
  • Finally, switch to a paddle attachment and mix the buttercream on low speed for up to 15-20 minutes to make the buttercream ultra smooth and remove any air bubbles. Ultimately, this step is optional. But, if you want really creamy frosting, then you don't want to skip this final step.

Preparing the Naked Wedding Cake Tiers

  • First, trim off the dome of your cake layers. Do not trim off the sides of the cake. If you trim off the sides of the cake, then your cake will lose moisture quicker since this is a naked cake and the sides won't be covered in buttercream.
  • Then, trim your cake boards to be a little bit smaller than the width of the cake.
  • Apply a small amount of tape to your turntable, and then place your cake board on top. This will keep the cake board from sliding around.
  • Next, place your cake on top of the cake board.
  • Spread a thin layer of buttercream on top of the cake using an offset spatula. The layer of buttercream should be between ¼″ to ½" thick. When smoothing out the buttercream onto the cake, keep the buttercream as level as possible (i.e. avoid large bumps of buttercream).
  • Then, repeat this process with the second cake layer, and then add your final layer of cake on top.
  • Spread a very thin layer of buttercream around the sides and top of the cake. This thin layer will seep into the small air bubbles of the cake and help seal in the moisture.
  • Next, use a bench scraper to remove the buttercream from the sides of the cake.
  • Finally, use a spatula to smooth out the buttercream on top of the cake.
  • Then, repeat this process as needed for any additional layers of cake you have left depending on how servings of cake you are making.
  • If you need to transfer your cake from your turntable to your cake stand, then use an offset spatula to carefully and gently lift one side of the cake so that you can get your fingers underneath it. Then, you can lift the cake by the cake board to move it to wherever it needs to go like the freezer for storage or moving it onto a cake stand.

Assembling the Naked Wedding Cake

  • Download my cake support guide to help get you started!
  • Begin with your bottom cake tier in front of you.
  • Grab the cake pan you used that is the same size as the smaller cake tier you want to stack on top of your bottom cake tier. Place the smaller cake pan right on top of the bottom tier so that the cake pan is sitting on top of the buttercream.
  • Use a spatula to trace along the edge of the cake pan to mark a line. This will show you where you need to place your straws and skewers to support the weight of the next cake tier.
  • Place a straw through the top of the bottom tier cake right in the center. After you've placed the straw through the cake tier, move your thumb to the spot where the top of the cake ends and then use scissors to trim off the excess straw. You don't want to see any straw popping out of the top of the cake.
  • Then, use the trimmed straw as a guide to cut all of your remaining straws so they are all the same height as the cake tier.
  • Next, stick your straws through your cake about ¼″ inward from the line you created using the cake pan in a circle. If you're unsure how many straws you need, generally, you need 1 straw per inch of cake you're needing to support (i.e. for a 6" cake, you need 6 straws as supports beneath it to keep the top cake from collapsing).
  • Then, after you've placed the straws, use a spatula to smooth buttercream over the top to hide the straw holes.
  • Now you are ready to place your smaller cake tier on top of the bottom (larger) cake tier.
  • Make sure the cake tier is centered, and then insert a skewer through the center of the top cake tier. Place the skewer all of the way inside the cake (it will puncture the cake board and that is okay). Cover the spot where the skewer is with a little bit of buttercream and smooth it out.
  • Repeat as needed until all of your cake tiers are stacked onto your cake.
  • Place the cake in the refrigerator overnight until you need to deliver the cake to the wedding or event.

Packaging the Wedding Cake for Delivery

  • You will need a box that is the same width as the bottom (largest) tier of your cake. For instance, if your bottom cake tier is 10" x 10", you will use a 10" x 10" width cardboard box.
  • First, you trim your box to create a flap on one side. Use an X-acto blade to cut downwards along 2 corners of the box, and then bend that side downward to create a flap where your cake will enter in and out of the box.
  • If you have a piece of cardboard on the bottom that is sticking up where your cake is going to be, use a piece of tape to stick it down.
  • Next, carefully slide your cake on top of the flap and into the cardboard box.
  • If your cake is taller than your cardboard box, then you can move the box flaps upward and use tape to join the flaps with the corners so the box becomes taller.
  • Want additional coverage on top? You can cover the exposed top of the box with some plastic wrap to protect the cake. This is especially helpful if it's a windy day and you're worried about dust, debris, or rain getting on the cake.
  • Now your cake is ready to travel to the venue! When you arrive at the wedding and it's time to unbox your cake, remove the tape from the box and slide it out and move it to the cake table.

Decorating Your Cake with Fresh Flowers Safely

  • Now that you've arrived at the wedding venue and it's time to decorate the cake with flowers, use a small amount of buttercream to fill in any gaps where the cake tiers meet and along the bottom of the cake tier on the cake plate. Smooth out the buttercream you added.
  • First, prepare your fresh flowers by trimming them down so that you have about 2"-3" of stem. Remove any of the bad petals that appear bruised.
  • Then, wrap all of your flower and plant stems in plastic wrap. This will keep the water from the flower trapped inside of the stem which will not only keep the flowers fresh for longer, but it will protect the cake from being contaminated by the plant.
  • Next, insert your flower that is wrapped in plastic wrap into a straw.
  • Insert the straw into the cake where you want the flower to sit. If you find yourself hitting the cardboard, take the straw out of the cake and remove the flower from the straw and trim it down and try again.
  • Repeat until you have decorated your cake with flowers and plants to your liking.

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start:
  1. Download my straw support cake guide to get started! 
  2. Bake your cakes 2 days before the wedding or event. For instance, if your event is on Saturday, then bake your cakes on Thursday. On Friday, focus on frosting and stacking the cakes. Then, when Saturday comes, all you'll need to focus on is delivering the cake to its final destination and then adding in any fresh flowers after you arrive at the venue. 
  3. In the long run, a chilled cake is going to transfer much easier than a freshly frosted cake. Ultimately, this is why it's crucial to take several days to prepare the wedding cake so you can freeze or refrigerate your frosted and stacked cake until it is ready to travel to the event. 
  4. Generally speaking, when you are choosing what flowers to use to decorate your cake, think about how big the cake is. If you don't have a huge cake, then you don't want huge flowers. Think about the ratio of how big a flower looks on a cake tier, and use a little bit of greenery in addition to colorful flowers. Ultimately, use the bouquet/boutonniere as your guide to decide what flowers to include and how much. When in doubt, stick with the rule of 3s (three of the same flower, three types of flowers/plants, groups of three grouped together, etc).
  5. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  6. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  7. Need more help with making your first cake? Check out my how to decorate your first cake blog post. 
  8. Make sure all of your cold ingredients (e.g. butter, eggs, milk) are at room temperature or a little warm. Why? Because we want to create an emulsion and allow the ingredients to fully mix together. 
  9. Make your own pan release (cake goop!) The best pan release ever! 
  10. If you want to add food coloring to this frosting, then you will add in any food coloring while you are mixing the egg whites with the powdered sugar (before you add in the butter). PRO TIP: Use a toothpick to transfer 1-2 drops of food coloring to your frosting to avoid putting too much color in your buttercream.
  11. You can use whichever food coloring you have, but if you want a recommendation I would suggest the Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 680kcal | Carbohydrates: 83g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 37g | Saturated Fat: 23g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 124mg | Sodium: 346mg | Potassium: 83mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 63g | Vitamin A: 1250IU | Calcium: 42mg | Iron: 2mg

Cakes stacked and sculpted to look like books

March 15, 2022 Course Preview

Stacked Books Wedding Cake Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Shani Christenson joins us to make this beautiful stacked book wedding cake. In this tutorial, you will learn how to imprint book titles into the covers, how to hand-paint the lettering and binding details for the greatest visual effect, how to create and arrange sugar rose flowers, variegated foliage. In addition, Shani breaks down how to decorate your cake boards to compliment the design with decorative paper, making the board stain-proof and how to finish the edges.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

2:34:43 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a cake sculpted to look like a stack of books
  • Learn to make floral arrangements out of gumpaste and edible materials
  • How to decorate and add features to your cake board to elevate the entire design
  • Learn how to dowel this tall-standing cake to provide support and structure

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Making The Cake Board 0:56
  2. Cutting Out The Cake Boards 13:05
  3. Carving The Cakes 15:15
  4. Covering The Cakes In Butter Cream 19:13
  5. Rolling Out The Fondant Book Spines 27:44
  6. Adding The Book Titles 37:08
  7. Decorating The Spines 40:55
  8. Making The Book Covers 44:49
  9. Painting The Spines 52:24
  10. Making The Fondant Pages 56:37
  11. Covering The Books In Fondant 59:40
  12. Stacking The Cakes 1:13:15
  13. Painting The Pages 1:22:09
  14. Making The Sugar Roses 1:25:01
  15. Making The Rose Leaves 1:41:33
  16. Making The Filler Flowers Pt.1 1:46:40
  17. Making The Filler Flowers Pt.2 1:55:03
  18. Making The Ivy Leaves 2:02:04
  19. Making The Filler Flowers Pt.3 2:08:57
  20. Color Dusting The Flowers 2:12:14
  21. Color Dusting The Leaves 2:17:47
  22. Making The Bundles And Posies 2:23:44
  23. Finishing Touches 2:39:10

Downloads

Materials List

Cake Layer Template 01

Cake Layer Template 02

Cake Cutting Guide

Cake Cover Size Chart

Cakes stacked and sculpted to look like books

March 15, 2022 Paid Video

Stacked Books Wedding Cake

Skill level: Intermediate

Guest instructor Shani Christenson joins us to make this beautiful stacked book wedding cake. In this tutorial, you will learn how to imprint book titles into the covers, how to hand-paint the lettering and binding details for the greatest visual effect, how to create and arrange sugar rose flowers, variegated foliage. In addition, Shani breaks down how to decorate your cake boards to compliment the design with decorative paper, making the board stain-proof and how to finish the edges.

There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

2:34:43 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a cake sculpted to look like a stack of books
  • Learn to make floral arrangements out of gumpaste and edible materials
  • How to decorate and add features to your cake board to elevate the entire design
  • Learn how to dowel this tall-standing cake to provide support and structure

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Making The Cake Board 0:56
  2. Cutting Out The Cake Boards 13:05
  3. Carving The Cakes 15:15
  4. Covering The Cakes In Butter Cream 19:13
  5. Rolling Out The Fondant Book Spines 27:44
  6. Adding The Book Titles 37:08
  7. Decorating The Spines 40:55
  8. Making The Book Covers 44:49
  9. Painting The Spines 52:24
  10. Making The Fondant Pages 56:37
  11. Covering The Books In Fondant 59:40
  12. Stacking The Cakes 1:13:15
  13. Painting The Pages 1:22:09
  14. Making The Sugar Roses 1:25:01
  15. Making The Rose Leaves 1:41:33
  16. Making The Filler Flowers Pt.1 1:46:40
  17. Making The Filler Flowers Pt.2 1:55:03
  18. Making The Ivy Leaves 2:02:04
  19. Making The Filler Flowers Pt.3 2:08:57
  20. Color Dusting The Flowers 2:12:14
  21. Color Dusting The Leaves 2:17:47
  22. Making The Bundles And Posies 2:23:44
  23. Finishing Touches 2:39:10

Downloads

Materials List

Cake Layer Template 01

Cake Layer Template 02

Cake Cutting Guide

Cake Cover Size Chart

chocolate mini cake shaped as a tiffany box

March 14, 2022 Blog

Tiffany Gift Box Mini Cake Recipe

This mini cake recipe is made with super moist, decadent chocolate cake and paired with light and creamy buttercream frosting! Decorated to look like a gift box from Tiffany & Co, this mini cake recipe is the perfect dessert for engagement parties, bridal showers, and weddings!chocolate mini cake shaped as a tiffany box

These mini cakes are made with a mold so covering with fondant is WAY easier (no more frosting individual cakes). Don't want to make square mini cakes? You can use any shape! So so easy. 

The best part about this mini cake recipe is that both the easy chocolate cake recipe and the easy buttercream frosting that are used here are simple recipes that ANY baker can master! Follow this step-by-step recipe and decoration tutorial to create these beautiful, delicious mini cakes decorated to look like wrapped gift boxes! 

What's In This Blog Post

  • Mini Cake Recipe Ingredients
  • Making the Chocolate Cake
  • Easy Buttercream Frosting Instructions
  • Assembling the Chocolate Mini Cakes
  • Preparing the Mini Cake Molds
  • Covering the Mini Cakes with Fondant
  • Decorating the Mini Cakes
  • FAQ
  • Expert Tips
  • More Recipes You'll Love

Mini Cake Recipe Ingredients

ingredients from above
ingredients from above

Buttermilk: The buttermilk not only adds moisture to the cake, but it's also acidic which breaks down the gluten in the all-purpose flour. Buttermilk is what gives this cake its tender and moist crumb!

If you do not have buttermilk, you can create your own buttermilk substitute. 

Hot coffee (or hot water): The chocolate cake used to make this mini cake recipe calls for hot coffee. Hot coffee intensifies the flavor of the chocolate, and it doesn't make the cake taste like coffee at all. 

If you do not want to use coffee, you can substitute a dark beer like Guinness (heated) or just use hot water. 

Pasteurized egg whites: For this frosting recipe, you will need pasteurized egg whites. Pasteurization is what makes eggs safe to eat without cooking. 

If you can't find pasteurized egg whites, you can pasteurize eggs yourself and just use the egg whites. NOTE: all eggs in the USA are already pasteurized, so you can use shelled egg whites separated from the yolk as well.

Don't want to use my buttercream recipe? You can use American buttercream, Swiss meringue, or even French buttercream but stay away from cream cheese frosting or whipped cream because it will melt the fondant.

White Fondant: You can use any kind of white fondant you have, but I would recommend you use my marshmallow fondant recipe. 

Vegetable Shortening: If you are working with fondant, then you will need shortening. Why? Because if you apply shortening to your hands, then you will keep the fondant from sticking to you while you are kneading and pulling it and the shortening keeps the fondant from drying out.

Purple food coloring: Purple food coloring is optional for this recipe. Professional bakers have a hack where they add 1 tiny drop of purple food coloring to make their frosting appear more white! But, you do not have to do this step if you don't want to. 

You can use any purple food coloring you have, but if you would like my recommendation, I would suggest the Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!

Making the Chocolate Cake

  1. Preheat the oven to 350ºF and prepare two 9"x 13' sheet pans with parchment paper and cake goop.hand placed on parchment paper inside baking sheet
  2. Combine the flour, sugar, cocoa powder, baking powder, baking soda, and salt in the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment. Mix everything on low speed for about 5 seconds, or just until everything is combined.pouring ingredient into mixing bowl
  3. Then, add in the room temperature eggs, room temperature buttermilk, oil, and vanilla.pouring ingredient into mixing bowl
  4. Mix on medium speed withthe paddle attachment for 2 minutes and then scrape the bowl.stand mixer mixing cake batter
  5. Turn the mixer down to low speed, and then add in the hot coffee and mix it in until it's just combined.pouring ingredient into mixing bowl
  6. Next, pour the cake batter into the prepared pans about halfway full.pouring cake batter into a baking sheet
  7. Bake the cakes at 335ºF for 15 minutes, or until it is fully baked. While your cake is baking, you can prepare the easy buttercream frosting.hand smoothing out cake batter using a spatula

Easy Buttercream Frosting Instructions

  1. First, place the egg whites and the powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine the ingredients on low.hand pouring egg whites into bowl of stand mixer
  2. Whip them on high for 4-5 minutes (until shiny) to dissolve the powdered sugar.
  3. Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract.hand pouring ingredient into bowl of stand mixer
  4. Next, add in your room temperature butter piece-by-piece, and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine. It will look curdled at first. This is definitely normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping.hand holding a piece of butter showing it's softfrosting inside mixing bowl with whisk attachment
  5. If your buttercream continues to look curdled, remove about 2 cups of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.hand scooping frosting into large, tall measuring cuppouring warm buttercream into mixing bowl
  6. Optional: Add in 1 drop of purple food coloring to make the buttercream whiter. You can use any food coloring you want, but if you want my recommendation, I use Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!
  7. Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until the buttercream is white, light, and shiny. Taste test the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!spatula inside bowl of buttercream
  8. Ultimately, this step is optional. But, if you want really creamy frosting with no bubbles, then you don't want to skip this final step. Switch to a paddle attachment, and then mix the buttercream at low speed for up to 15-20 minutes to make the buttercream ultra smooth and remove any air bubbles.bowl of buttercream

Assembling the Chocolate Mini Cakes

  1. Once the cakes have finished baking and are fully cooled, place it in the freezer for about an hour so that it is very cold but can still be cut.taking chocolate cake out of the oven
  2. Trim the dome off the cake so that it is level. I use the cake pan as my guide.hand holding a bread knife next to chocolate cakecutting off dome of cake
  3. Remove the cakes from the pan, and then cut the sheet cake in half. You want to have 2 even pieces of cake because you are going to layer them together.trimming cake in half
  4. Do the same thing to the other cake. Then, spread buttercream on one half of the cake, and then place the other half of the cake on top.smoothing buttercream on top of chocolate cake2 layers of chocolate cake together with buttercream
  5. Next, place the prepared cake in the freezer for about an hour.stacking 2 layers of chocolate cake together with buttercream
  6. The size of your silicone molds will determine the size of the square you cut from the cake. We are using 2" square silicone molds, so I am cutting my layered cake in 1-½" cubes. Using a metal ruler, I cut down one direction of the cake to make 1-½" strips, and then the other direction to make cubes.trimming cake down to fit into square moldtrimming cake down to fit into square moldhand holding up a chocolate mini cake
  7. Then, place the cut cake cubes in the freezer while you prepare the mold.hand grabbing a chocolate mini cake

Preparing the Mini Cake Molds

  1. First, fill a piping bag with buttercream fitted with a medium plain tip.filling a piping bag with buttercream
  2. Pipe soft buttercream into the corners of the square mold to avoid pockets of air trapped in the corners. I gave my mold a little tap to be sure. Then, continue to pipe around the inside of the square mold, leaving the center hollow to place the cake.piping buttercream into square mold
  3. Then, once your molds are coated with buttercream and your cake cubes are fully chilled, carefully place a cube into the center of the mold and press down until the bottom is flush. Repeat with the remaining cubes.placing cake into square mold on top of buttercreamcake inside of mold filled with buttercream
  4. Next, use a spatula to clean off the excess buttercream that may have pushed out. The silicone mold is soft and can bulge out as you push the cake down. Gently reshape the exterior of the cubes so the sides are straight.
  5. Place the mold in the freezer for approximately 30 minutes (or overnight is okay, too).hand holding square cake mold filled with frosted cakes
  6. Gently peel the cake out of the mold. You will want to work quickly so that the buttercream doesn't have a chance to soften.removing cake from square cake mold
  7. Place the mini cakes on a single serving board or a platter and finish decorating them with fondant. See my video for the full tutorial. Store them in the refrigerator to keep them cool while you work with your fondant.

Covering the Mini Cakes with Fondant

  1. First, add 1 drop of neon bright blue food coloring to your white fondant and 1 drop of teal. This is the food coloring combination I've found that is closest to the iconic Tiffany Blue®. You can use any food coloring you have, but if you would like to know what I used for these mini cakes I used Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!adding food coloring to fondant
  2. Then, put on a pair of gloves and apply some shortening to your hands.
  3. Using your hands, work the food coloring into the fondant. Knead the fondant and pull it like taffy until it is smooth and the color is evenly distributed. If there are still rough spots or the fondant is tearing, you can warm it up in the microwave for 30-40 seconds to make it hot and pull like taffy. Then, with shortening on your hands, you can continue to knead and pull it without it breaking.food coloring added to fondant
  4. Sprinkle a little bit of powdered sugar onto your fondant, and then roll your fondant out so that it's thin (about 1/16th of an inch). The thinner your fondant, the sharper your corners will be!hands holding fondant to show it is thin
  5. Next, place the fondant over your cake cube. Smooth out the top, and then work your way down by pressing the fondant up against the cake.covering a square cake with fondantfinger pressing down on fondant on top of cakehands pressing edges of cake covered fondant
  6. Once you're happy with how your fondant looks, trim the excess fondant while leaving about ¼ inch of fondant around the base of the cake.trimming off excess fondant
  7. Then, flip the fondant-covered cake upside down.
  8. Fold the excess fondant over the bottom.tucking fondant into place on top of cake
  9. Repeat this process as needed until all of your cake cubes are covered with fondant.

Decorating the Mini Cakes

  1. Start by making the fondant bows. Add a little bit of vegetable shortening to your white fondant. Then, sprinkle your bow mold with some powdered sugar.
  2. Press the fondant into the mold so that it's flush to the surface.hand pressing fondant into mold
  3. Next, flip the mold over and then peel off the mold to reveal the bow-shaped fondant.taking fondant bows out of mold
  4. Now you will roll out more white fondant to create your ribbons. Roll out the fondant so that it's thin and about 1/16th of an inch. Then, cut out long pieces of fondant that are about ¼ inch wide. I like to use this tool to quickly cut strips of fondant. Fun fact: this tool is also used to make croissants! Or, if you don't have it, you could use a ruler and an x-acto knife to cut out ribbon fondant.rolling out the fondanttrimming fondant
  5. Now we are going to wrap our cake cubes to make them look like presents! Start by laying a strip of fondant down on the table horizontally. Then, layer another strip of fondant on top going the other way (vertically) so that it resembles a plus sign.fondant ribbons on top of one another in the shape of a plus sign
  6. Place the fondant-covered mini cake on top of the fondant ribbons at the center where the ribbons meet with the unfinished bottom facing upwards.hand placing mini cake covered in fondant on top of fondant ribbons
  7. Apply a small amount of water onto the strips of ribbon fondant, and then carefully wrap the fondant up around the cake so that it appears to look like a ribbon-wrapped box.painting fondant with water using a brushfolding ribbon fondant over mini caketrimming fondant ribbon
  8. Finally, apply a small amount of water onto the bottom of the fondant bow. Place it onto the top of the cake where the two seams of ribbon fondant meet. Repeat these steps as needed to decorate all of your mini cakes.brushing water onto back of fondanthand wearing a glove with hand above mini cake decorated in fondant
  9. Optional: Next, as an added decoration, you will add some flash dust or edible glitter to the mini cake using a brush. This is totally optional, but it will give your decorated cakes a radiant sparkle detail!hand sprinkling edible glitter onto a cake using a brushsquare mini cake on a round platesquare mini cake on a round plate with more mini cakes in the background

FAQ

What kind of square molds are you using?

I used a 2" square mold to create these mini cakes. 

What is the difference between petit fours and mini cakes?

Petit fours are usually bite-sized, and mini cakes are one cake serving. Another difference between petit fours and mini cakes is that petit four is a broader concept than just cake, so petit four could be sweet or savory french appetizers. 

How are these mini cakes different from lunchbox cakes?

Lunchbox cakes are smaller versions of regular cakes, and are often decorated with royal icing and served in bento-sized boxes. Unlike lunchbox cakes, mini cakes are one serving size of cake and are often decorated with fondant. 

What else could I use besides this buttercream?

If you want more frosting ideas for this chocolate cake besides my easy buttercream frosting, you could opt for a frosting that is less sweet like my Ermine frosting recipe. Big fan of chocolate? You could also double up on the chocolate flavor and prepare your mini cakes using my easy chocolate buttercream frosting! 

For a brighter, more vibrant flavored frosting, you could also add in raspberry filling or cherry filling to this buttercream recipe.

Or, skip out on buttercream entirely and go for a ganache instead! For this chocolate cake recipe, I would recommend pairing it with either my easy chocolate ganache recipe or my easy white chocolate ganache recipe.

How do I know when the cake batter is done mixing?

The cake batter will appear shiny and glossy when it is done mixing and there aren't any ingredients left on the sides of the bowl. 

Why freeze the cake after baking?

Freezing the cake for about an hour after it's cooled down will make the cake easier to cut.

Why does my buttercream frosting taste like butter?

If your buttercream tastes like butter you did not whip the frosting long enough. If you've added in all of your ingredients, you will need to whip your buttercream on high speed for 8-10 minutes. Once everything is whipped together long enough, your buttercream will appear white and should taste like melted ice cream.

Do I need to use coffee to make this chocolate cake?

No. If you do use coffee, it will enhance the chocolate flavor. But adding coffee to your cake batter is entirely optional. You could also substitute hot coffee with hot water (or one of my favorite things to substitute hot coffee for chocolate cake is with a heated, dark beer like Guinness).

What size is a mini cake?

A mini cake is a square cut of cake that's about 2 inches big. Typically, mini cakes range from 2 inches to 4 inches in size.

Expert Tips

  • Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  • Bring your butter, milk, and eggs to room temperature. Room temperature ingredients will create an emulsion properly but if any of your ingredients are cold then the batter will not mix together properly and you'll end up with a wet layer at the bottom of the cake.
  • Make your own pan release (cake goop!) The best pan release ever!
  • Any white fondant will work to decorate these mini cakes, but I highly recommend using my marshmallow fondant recipe. 
  • You can use whichever food coloring you have, but if you want a recommendation I would suggest the Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!
a group of mini cakes decorated to look like gift boxes

More Recipes You'll Love

Easy chocolate cake

Best fondant recipe

Easy vanilla cake

White cake recipe

Easy buttercream frosting

Easy chocolate buttercream frosting

Recipe

chocolate mini cake shaped as a tiffany box
Print Recipe
5 from 2 votes

Tiffany Gift Box Mini Cake Recipe

How to make mini cakes inspired by Tiffany & Co gift boxes! Moist and decadent chocolate cake paired with light and creamy buttercream frosting, wrapped in Tiffany Blue® fondant, decorated with white fondant ribbons, and topped with a cute matching bow. Follow my tutorial for how to make easy cake squares with a mold (no frosting each cake individually!)
Prep Time10 minutes mins
Cook Time15 minutes mins
Freezing Time2 hours hrs
Total Time2 hours hrs 25 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 32 2" square mini cakes (the size can vary depending on the size of your molds)
Calories: 337kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • Stand Mixer
  • 9" x 13" sheet pan
  • square silicone mold
  • bow mold

Ingredients

Easy Chocolate Cake

  • 10 ounces all-purpose flour
  • 14 ounces granulated sugar
  • 4 ounces natural cocoa powder like HERSHEYS
  • 1 ½ teaspoons baking powder
  • 2 teaspoons baking soda
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 2 large eggs (room temperature)
  • 8 ounces buttermilk (room temperature)
  • 8 ounces hot coffee or hot water (1 cup)
  • 4 ounces vegetable oil
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

Easy Buttercream Frosting

  • 24 ounces unsalted butter (room temperature). You can use salted butter, but it will affect the taste and you need to leave out additional salt.
  • 24 ounces powdered sugar sifted if not from a bag
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 6 ounces pasteurized egg whites (room temperature)
  • 1 TINY drop purple food coloring for whiter frosting (optional)

Instructions

Making the Chocolate Cake

  • Preheat the oven to 350ºF and prepare two 9"x 13' sheet pans with parchment paper and cake goop.
  • Combine the flour, sugar, cocoa powder, baking powder, baking soda, and salt in the bowl of your stand mixer with the paddle attachment. Mix everything on low speed for about 5 seconds, or just until everything is combined.
  • Then, add in the room temperature eggs, room temperature buttermilk, oil, and vanilla.
  • Mix on medium speed for 2 minutes and then scrape the bowl.
  • Turn the mixer down to low speed, and then add in the hot coffee and mix it in until it's just combined.
  • Next, pour the cake batter into the prepared pans about halfway full.
  • Bake the cakes at 335ºF for 15 minutes, or until it is fully baked. While your cake is baking, you can prepare the easy buttercream frosting.

Easy Buttercream Frosting Instructions

  • First, place the egg whites and the powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine the ingredients on low.
  • Whip them on high for 4-5 minutes (until shiny) to dissolve the powdered sugar.
  • Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract.
  • Next, add in your room temperature butter piece-by-piece, and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine. It will look curdled at first. This is definitely normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping.
  • If your buttercream continues to look curdled, remove about 2 cups of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.
  • Optional: Add in 1 drop of purple food coloring to make the buttercream whiter. You can use any food coloring you want, but if you want my recommendation, I use Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!
  • Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until the buttercream is white, light, and shiny. Taste test the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!
  • Ultimately, this step is optional. But, if you want really creamy frosting with no bubbles, then you don't want to skip this final step. Switch to a paddle attachment, and then mix the buttercream at low speed for up to 15-20 minutes to make the buttercream ultra smooth and remove any air bubbles.

Assembling the Chocolate Cake Cubes

  • Once the cakes have finished baking and are fully cooled, place it in the freezer for about an hour so that it is very cold but can still be cut.
  • Trim the dome off the cake so that it is level. I use the cake pan as my guide.
  • Remove the cakes from the pan, and then cut the sheet cake in half. You want to have 2 even pieces of cake because you are going to layer them together.
  • Do the same thing to the other cake. Then, spread buttercream on one half of the cake, and then place the other half of the cake on top.
  • Next, place the prepared cake in the freezer for about an hour.
  • The size of your silicone molds will determine the size of the square you cut from the cake. We are using 2" square silicone molds, so I am cutting my layered cake in 1-½" cubes. Using a metal ruler, I cut down one direction of the cake to make 1-½" strips, and then the other direction to make cubes.
  • Then, place the cut cake cubes in the freezer while you prepare the mold.

Preparing the Mini Cake Molds

  • First, fill a piping bag with buttercream fitted with a medium plain tip.
  • Pipe buttercream into the corners of the square mold to avoid pockets of air trapped in the corners. I gave my mold a little tap to be sure. Then, continue to pipe around the inside of the square mold, leaving the center hollow to place the cake.
  • Then, once your molds are coated with buttercream and your cake cubes are fully chilled, carefully place a cube into the center of the mold and press down until the bottom is flush. Repeat with the remaining cubes.
  • Next, use a spatula to clean off the excess buttercream that may have pushed out. The silicone mold is soft and can bulge out as you push the cake down. Gently reshape the exterior of the cubes so the sides are straight.
  • Place the mold in the freezer for approximately 30 minutes (or overnight is okay, too).
  • When you remove the mold from the freezer, trim off the bottom so that the cake will sit evenly when you flip it over.
  • Gently peel the cake out of the mold. You will want to work quickly so that the buttercream doesn't have a chance to soften.
  • Place the mini cakes on a single serving board or a platter and finish decorating them with fondant. See my video for the full tutorial. Store them in the refrigerator to keep them cool while you work with your fondant.

Covering the Mini Cakes with Fondant

  • First, add 1 drop of neon bright blue food coloring to your white fondant and 1 drop of teal. This is the food coloring combination I've found that is closest to the iconic Tiffany Blue®. You can use any food coloring you have, but if you would like to know what I used for these mini cakes I used Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!
  • Then, put on a pair of gloves and apply some shortening to your hands.
  • Using your hands, work the food coloring into the fondant. Knead the fondant and pull it like taffy until it is smooth and the color is evenly distributed. If there are still rough spots or the fondant is tearing, you can warm it up in the microwave for 30-40 seconds to make it hot and pull like taffy. Then, with shortening on your hands, you can continue to knead and pull it without it breaking.
  • Sprinkle a little bit of powdered sugar onto your fondant, and then roll your fondant out so that it's thin (about 1/16th of an inch). The thinner your fondant, the sharper your corners will be!
  • Next, place the fondant over your cake cube. Smooth out the top, and then work your way down by pressing the fondant up against the cake.
  • Once you're happy with how your fondant looks, trim the excess fondant while leaving about ¼ inch of fondant around the base of the cake.
  • Then, flip the fondant-covered cake upside down.
  • Fold the excess fondant over the bottom.
  • Repeat this process as needed until all of your cake cubes are covered with fondant.

Decorating the Mini Cakes

  • Start by making the fondant bows. Add a little bit of vegetable shortening to your white fondant. Then, sprinkle your bow mold with some powdered sugar.
  • Press the fondant into the mold so that it's flush to the surface.
  • Next, flip the mold over and then peel off the mold to reveal the bow-shaped fondant.
  • Now you will roll out more white fondant to create your ribbons. Roll out the fondant so that it's thin and about 1/16th of an inch. Then, cut out long pieces of fondant that are about ¼ inch wide. I like to use this tool to quickly cut strips of fondant. Fun fact: this tool is also used to make croissants! Or, if you don't have it, you could use a ruler and an x-acto knife to cut out ribbon fondant.
  • Now we are going to wrap our cake cubes to make them look like presents! Start by laying a strip of fondant down on the table horizontally. Then, layer another strip of fondant on top going the other way (vertically) so that it resembles a plus sign.
  • Place the fondant-covered mini cake on top of the fondant ribbons at the center where the ribbons meet with the unfinished bottom facing upwards.
  • Apply a small amount of water onto the strips of ribbon fondant, and then carefully wrap the fondant up around the cake so that it appears to look like a ribbon-wrapped box.
  • Finally, apply a small amount of water onto the bottom of the fondant bow. Place it onto the top of the cake where the two seams of ribbon fondant meet. Repeat these steps as needed to decorate all of your mini cakes.
  • Optional: Next, as an added decoration, you will add some flash dust or edible glitter to the mini cake using a brush. This is totally optional, but it will give your decorated cakes a radiant sparkle detail!

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start:
  • Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  • Bring your butter, milk, and eggs to room temperature. Room temperature ingredients will create an emulsion properly but if any of your ingredients are cold then the batter will not mix together properly and you'll end up with a wet layer at the bottom of the cake.
  • Make your own pan release (cake goop!) The best pan release ever!
  • Any white fondant will work to decorate these mini cakes, but I highly recommend using my marshmallow fondant recipe.
  • You can use whichever food coloring you have, but if you want a recommendation I would suggest the Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!

Nutrition

Calories: 337kcal | Carbohydrates: 43g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 18g | Saturated Fat: 11g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 5g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 58mg | Sodium: 204mg | Potassium: 103mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 34g | Vitamin A: 606IU | Calcium: 29mg | Iron: 1mg
Cake sculpted to look like a playstation 5 controller

March 1, 2022 Course Preview

Playstation 5 Controller Cake Tutorial

Skill level: Intermediate

They may still be hard to get online, but the Playstation gaming system is a video game console near and dear to my heart. I have always liked the shape and design of the playstation controllers and was really excited when I got the chance to make this cake for a friend's son.

In this tutorial, you will learn how to sculpt and panel out every section of the controller. Provided printable template make getting the proportions right very easy, and I break down the logo, buttons and joysticks step-by-step. This cake comes together quickly and easily and is another great option you can offer for clients that have eSports parties or gaming events.

50:37 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a cake that looks like a Playstation 5 controller
  • Learn how to make realistic edible transparent buttons
  • How to make the bottom of the controller glow

Cake sculpted to look like a playstation 5 controller

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Overview Of The Cake 0:30
  2. Stacking And Carving The Cake 6:19
  3. Making The Isomalt Buttons 18:00
  4. Making The Chocolate Analog Sticks 19:38
  5. Covering The Cake In Buttercream 21:45/li>
  6. Adding The Black Fondant 25:20
  7. Adding The White Fondant 32:06
  8. Trimming The Fondant 34:44
  9. Making The Triggers 40:02
  10. Adding The Chocolate Analog Sticks 40:52
  11. Adding The Triggers 42:27
  12. Adding The Buttons 45:11
  13. Detailing The Controller 48:08
  14. Adding The Lights 49:02

Downloads

Materials List

Controller Top Template 01

Controller Top Template 02

Controller Front Template 01

Controller Front Template 02

Controller Side Template

Buttons Template

Cake sculpted to look like a playstation 5 controller

March 1, 2022 Paid Video

Playstation 5 Controller Cake

Skill level: Intermediate

They may still be hard to get online, but the Playstation gaming system is a video game console near and dear to my heart. I have always liked the shape and design of the playstation controllers and was really excited when I got the chance to make this cake for a friend's son.

In this tutorial, you will learn how to sculpt and panel out every section of the controller. Provided printable template make getting the proportions right very easy, and I break down the logo, buttons and joysticks step-by-step. This cake comes together quickly and easily and is another great option you can offer for clients that have eSports parties or gaming events.

50:37 Minutes of Instruction

What You Will Learn

  • How to make a cake that looks like a Playstation 5 controller
  • Learn how to make realistic edible transparent buttons
  • How to make the bottom of the controller glow

Tutorial Chapters

  1. Overview Of The Cake 0:30
  2. Stacking And Carving The Cake 6:19
  3. Making The Isomalt Buttons 18:00
  4. Making The Chocolate Analog Sticks 19:38
  5. Covering The Cake In Buttercream 21:45
  6. Adding The Black Fondant 25:20
  7. Adding The White Fondant 32:06
  8. Trimming The Fondant 34:44
  9. Making The Triggers 40:02
  10. Adding The Chocolate Analog Sticks 40:52
  11. Adding The Triggers 42:27
  12. Adding The Buttons 45:11
  13. Detailing The Controller 48:08
  14. Adding The Lights 49:02

Downloads

Materials List

Controller Top Template 01

Controller Top Template 02

Controller Front Template 01

Controller Front Template 02

Controller Side Template

Buttons Template

slice of vanilla cake on a plate

February 28, 2022 Blog

Easy Vanilla Cake

This easy vanilla cake recipe is perfect for anyone who's new to baking cakes! No special mixing method! Just incredibly velvety, tender vanilla cake layered with smooth rich, decadent easy buttercream frosting! If you like my easy chocolate cake recipe, then you will absolutely LOVE this easy vanilla cake recipe!slice of vanilla cake on a plate
Any baker can master this easy vanilla cake recipe! There's a good chance you already have the ingredients you need to make this cake in your pantry, too! What's even better is that this recipe only requires ONE BOWL (check out my FAQ section to learn how!)

What's In This Blog Post

  • Why Use A Kitchen Scale?
  • How to Make Easy Vanilla Cake
  • More Recipes You'll Love

Easy Vanilla Cake Ingredients

easy vanilla cake ingredients

Buttermilk: Buttermilk is the star of this easy vanilla cake recipe! Buttermilk works to break down the gluten in the all-purpose flour and is what will give your cake a velvety, soft texture. 
If you do not have buttermilk, you can create your own buttermilk substitute to achieve a tender cake texture.
Pasteurized egg whites: For this easy buttercream frosting recipe, you will need pasteurized egg whites. Pasteurization is what makes eggs safe to eat without cooking. 
If you can't find pasteurized egg whites, you can pasteurize them yourself and just use the egg whites. NOTE: all eggs in the USA are already pasteurized so you can use shelled egg whites separated from the yolk as well.

Why Use A Kitchen Scale?

white digital kitchen scale on white background

If you've never used a kitchen scale before to measure your ingredients then you might feel intimidated but trust me, once you use a scale you'll never go back. You may not know this but using cups is a recipe for disaster. One cup of flour is not the same weight as one cup of water etc. Going by weight takes out all the guesswork.

  • More Accurate: Never again will you have a recipe fail because you accidentally put too much flour in. Especially with bigger recipes.
  • Less Dishes: When you use a scale, you can measure directly in the bowl. No dirtying multiple containers.
  • Easy to double and triple recipes: When need to make a triple batch, it's easy to scale up and quickly add ingredients when you're not having to measure everything one cup at a time.

How to Make Easy Vanilla Cake

  1. First, preheat the oven to 335ºF (168ºC).
  2. Prepare two 8" cake pans with cake goop or another pan release.
  3. Then, measure out all of your ingredients using a digital kitchen scale. You can mix the wet and dry ingredients separately for a finer texture, or just measure and add directly into the bowl of your stand mixer for fewer dishes.
  4. In a mixing bowl, combine and mix together the buttermilk, butter, oil, eggs, and vanilla. Your wet ingredients should all be slightly warm. I microwave my buttermilk for about 30 seconds and place my eggs (still in the shell) in a bowl of warm water. Whisk gently to combine. easy vanilla cake wet ingredients
  5. Next, in the bowl of your stand mixer using a paddle attachment, combine the flour, sugar, salt, baking soda, and baking powder. Mix on low to combine for a few seconds. I just put my bowl on the scale and measure everything into the same bowl, zeroing out the weight of the ingredients after each addition. Yay less dishes!easy vanilla cake dry ingredients
  6. While the mixer is on low, pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients.adding wet ingredients into dry ingredients
  7. Then, turn the mixer up to medium speed and mix until the batter is combined. Scrape the bowl to make sure all of the ingredients are combined.
  8. Let the batter mix on speed 2 for 1 minute. It should look kind of like pancake batter. close up of easy vanilla cake batter
  9. Divide the batter evenly between the prepared cake pans. Pro Tip: Weigh your cake pans to make sure each pan has the same amount of batter for more even layers. pouring cake batter into the cake panweighing cake pans on a scale
  10. Place them into the oven on a middle rack. Bake the cakes for 40-50 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
  11. Finally, allow the cake to cool for 10 minutes and flip out onto a cooling rack. If you plan to frost and decorate the cake on the same day, you can place the cakes into the freezer unwrapped for about an hour or until they are cold (but not frozen). If you plan to decorate your cake at a later date, then you will wrap the cakes in plastic wrap first before placing them in the freezer.two vanilla cakes cooling on a rack

Preparing the Easy Buttercream Frosting

This is the easiest and tastiest buttercream! So creamy and not too sweet.

  1. First, place the egg whites and the powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine the ingredients on low, and then whip them on high for 4-5 minutes (until shiny) to dissolve the powdered sugar.close up of egg whites and powdered sugar in a mixing bowl
  2. Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract. If you are adding in any food coloring, this is the point where you would do that. 
  3. Next, add in your softened butter piece-by-piece, and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine. It will look curdled at first. This is definitely normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping.adding butter to buttercream mixture
  4. After your buttercream looks like this, remove about 1 cup of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. close up of cold buttercreampouring melted buttercream back into the mixer
  5. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.
  6. Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until the buttercream is white, light, and shiny. Taste test the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!close up of whipped buttercream
  7. Finally, switch to a paddle attachment and mix the buttercream on low speed for up to 15-20 minutes to make the buttercream ultra smooth and remove any air bubbles. Ultimately, this step is optional. But, if you want really creamy frosting, then you don't want to skip this final step.close up of mixed buttercream

Stacking and Assembling the Vanilla Cake

  1. Optional: Trim the brown layer off of the top of the cake and on the sides. This is an extra step I like to take for my cakes to get a cleaner look.close up of trimming the brown edges off the cakes
  2. First, place your cake on a cake board. Or, you could use a flat plate or cake platter.adding buttercream to the first layer of cake
  3. Then, spread a layer of buttercream over the top of the cake. It should be about ½" thick since this is only a two layer cake.
  4. Next, stack the second layer of cake on top.adding buttercream to cake layers
  5. Add another layer of buttercream about ½" thick and spread it out over the top of the cake.
  6. Then, spread a thin layer of buttercream all over the cake. Scrape off any extra buttercream off of the top. This is called the "crumb coat." The crumb coat will seal in the crumbs so that they do not get into your final layer of cake.crumbcoat on a vanilla cake
  7. Put your cake in the fridge or freezer for 15 minutes, or until the buttercream is firm to the touch.
  8. Next, place your final coat of buttercream on your cake and smooth it out. PRO TIP: Start by scooping your buttercream on top of the cake and then smooth out the top first to make it flat. Then, apply a thick layer of buttercream to the sides and smooth it out.applying buttercream to the top of the vanilla cake
  9. Then, use your bench scraper to slowly scrape away the excess frosting. Hold the scraper straight up and down, and slowly turn the cake until you've removed all of the excess buttercream This will give your cake straight edges.smoothing the buttercream
  10. Wipe off any excess buttercream off the top starting at the edge of the cake and moving toward the center. Now your cake is ready to decorate!final layer of buttercream on vanilla cake

Decorating the Vanilla Cake

  1. You can decorate this cake however you prefer! If you want more cake decorating ideas or if you are new to cake decorating, you can read my tutorial on how to decorate your first cake. But for this cake decoration, here is what I did:
  2. Start by placing your spatula in the center of the top of the cake. Apply a little bit of pressure on the buttercream, and turn the cake. As you turn the cake, slowly move your spatula outwards toward the edge so you begin to create a spiral in the buttercream. If you don't like your spiral and want to start over, you can smooth the buttercream out and start over.using an offset spatula to smooth buttercream
  3. Then, after you've created your spiral, use your spatula to add small dabs of buttercream to the sides of the cake to create a rustic texture. As you transfer the buttercream to the cake, make a slight swoop (backwards "C" shape) and layer them on top of one another.adding a rustic texture to the side of the cake
  4. Next, prepare a piping bag with your buttercream. I used a Wilton 1M piping tip, but you can use whatever one you have!
  5. Pipe small dollops of buttercream along the top edge of the cake, and add one dollop of buttercream in the center.close up of piping buttercream
  6. Finally, add some confetti sprinkles or whatever sprinkles you like all around the top of the cake!adding sprinkles to vanilla

taking a slice of cake out of the vanilla cake

FAQ

Can I cover this cake in fondant?

Yes, this cake will hold up well under fondant and is great for stacking multiple tiers. Keep in mind that fondant will melt if you use cream cheese frosting or whipped cream underneath, so use frosting like my easy buttercream, Swiss meringue buttercream, or Italian buttercream recipe instead.

Can I freeze this cake?

Absolutely! If you're in a hurry, let the cakes cool in the pans for 10 minutes, flip them out onto a cooling rack, and pop that directly into the freezer for an hour to flash freeze your cakes. If you want to make your cakes the day before, flip the cakes out of the pans, wrap the cakes in plastic wrap while they're still warm, and freeze for up to 1 week. Make sure to defrost your cakes for about an hour before you frost them. Freezing your cakes locks in the moisture of the cake and it won't dry them out.

How long does this cake last after cutting?

This cake will only stay good for 3-4 after cutting into it, I recommend covering the cut slice with a piece of plastic wrap and leaving it at room temperature as much as possible. The refrigerator will dry your cake out.

How long can this cake stay out at room temperature?

This cake and buttercream are very stable and can last out at room temperature for up to 2 days. It's perfect for a wedding or event, just keep it out of direct sunlight. Keep in mind that if you add a fruit filling or use a different frosting like cream cheese or whipped cream, it can only stay out of the refrigerator for about 4 hours.

What does buttermilk do for this recipe?

Buttermilk breaks down the gluten in the cake, resulting in a very velvety and tender cake. It adds moisture and a slight tangy taste to the vanilla cake. If you don't have buttermilk on hand, you can make your own using my buttermilk substitute recipe.

What's the difference between white cake and vanilla cake?

If you use only egg whites and no egg yolks, it's a white cake. If you use whole eggs with yolks and whites, it's a vanilla cake. If you add extra egg yolks, it's a yellow cake.

Can I stack this cake for a wedding cake?

Yes, this cake is firm enough to use for stacking, just make sure to properly chill your cakes and use supports for tall cakes.

Can I reduce the amount of sugar in this recipe?

No, I do not recommend reducing the sugar for this recipe. Why? Because sugar acts as a tenderizer and helps soften the all-purpose flour so that the cake texture is velvety and soft.

Can I use cake flour in this recipe?

This recipe uses all-purpose flour because it needs structure to hold the cake together. The buttermilk breaks down the gluten in the flour, and cake flour has a lower protein and gluten content.

Why does my buttercream taste like butter?

If your easy buttercream tastes like butter, you did not whip the frosting long enough. If you've added in all of your ingredients, you will need to whip your buttercream on high speed for 8-10 minutes. Once everything is whipped together long enough, your buttercream will appear white and should taste like melted ice cream.

Do I need a scale?

Yes! Weighing your ingredients using a simple, digital kitchen scale will ensure your cake recipe does not fail. Not sure how to use a scale? Check out my tutorial on how to use a digital kitchen scale.

Can I mix this recipe in one bowl?

Absolutely! You do NOT have to separate your ingredients for this recipe. You can add all of the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients and mix them together for one minute (either by hand or in your stand mixer). However, you may have a slightly better texture if you do separate and mix the dry and wet on their own before combining them.

Would this recipe work for cupcakes?

Yes, this recipe can be used with no adjustments for cupcakes.

More Recipes You'll Love

Moist Vanilla Cake From Scratch

Easy Chocolate Cake

Strawberry Shortcake Cake

Eggless Chocolate Cake

Lemon Velvet Cake

Recipe

slice of vanilla cake on a plate
Print Recipe
4.83 from 269 votes

Easy Vanilla Cake (One Bowl)

The best easy vanilla cake recipe! This cake has a fantastic flavor and texture. Everything comes together in one bowl, no special mixing method required!
Prep Time5 minutes mins
Cook Time45 minutes mins
Total Time50 minutes mins
Course: Dessert
Cuisine: American
Servings: 8 cups
Calories: 913kcal
Author: Liz Marek

Equipment

  • Digital Kitchen Scale
  • 2 8" cake pans

Ingredients

  • 16 ounces all-purpose flour
  • 16 ounces granulated sugar
  • 1 teaspoon salt
  • 1 teaspoon baking soda
  • ½ teaspoon baking powder
  • 3 large eggs slightly warm
  • 5 ounces vegetable oil
  • 10 ounces buttermilk slightly warm
  • 4 ounces melted unsalted butter melted, but not hot
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract

Easy Buttercream Ingredients

  • 6 ounces pasteurized egg whites (from a box)
  • 24 ounces powdered sugar sifted if not from a bag
  • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
  • ½ teaspoon salt
  • 24 ounces unsalted butter, softened You can use salted butter, but it will affect the taste and you need to leave out the additional salt
  • 1 tiny drop of purple food coloring optional for white frosting
US Customary - Metric

Instructions

How to Make Easy Vanilla Cake

  • First, preheat the oven to 335ºF (168ºC).
  • Prepare two 8" cake pans with cake goop or another pan release.
  • Then, measure out all of your ingredients using a digital kitchen scale. You can mix the wet and dry ingredients separately for a finer texture, or just measure and add directly into the bowl of your stand mixer for fewer dishes.
  • In a mixing bowl, combine and mix together the buttermilk, butter, oil, eggs, and vanilla. Your wet ingredients should all be slightly warm. I microwave my buttermilk for about 30 seconds and place my eggs (still in the shell) in a bowl of warm water.
  • Next, in the bowl of your stand mixer using a paddle attachment, combine the flour, sugar, salt, baking soda, and baking powder. Let the mixer slowly combine for a few seconds.
  • While the mixer is on low, pour the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients.
  • Then, turn the mixer up to medium speed and mix until the batter is combined. Scrape the bowl to make sure all of the ingredients are combined.
  • Let the batter mix on speed 2 for 1 minute. It should look kind of like pancake batter.
  • Divide the batter evenly between the prepared cake pans and place them into the oven on a middle rack.
  • Bake the cakes for 40-50 minutes, or until a toothpick inserted in the center comes out clean.
  • Finally, allow the cake to cool for 10 minutes and flip out onto a cooling rack. If you plan to frost and decorate the cake on the same day, you can place the cakes into the freezer unwrapped for about an hour or until they are cold (but not frozen). If you plan to decorate your cake at a later date, then you will wrap the cakes in plastic wrap first before placing them in the freezer.

Preparing the Easy Buttercream Frosting

  • First, place the egg whites and the powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Attach the whisk and combine the ingredients on low, and then whip them on high for 4-5 minutes (until shiny) to dissolve the powdered sugar.
  • Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract. If you are adding in any food coloring, this is the point where you would do that. PRO TIP: Use a toothpick to transfer 1-2 drops of food coloring to your frosting to avoid putting too much color in your buttercream.
  • Next, add in your softened butter piece-by-piece, and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine. It will look curdled at first. This is definitely normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping.
  • If your buttercream looks curdled, remove about 1 cup of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.
  • Optional: Add in 1 drop of purple food coloring to make the buttercream whiter. You can use any food coloring you want, but if you want my recommendation, I use Chef Master gel food coloring.
  • Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until the buttercream is white, light, and shiny. Taste test the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!
  • Finally, switch to a paddle attachment and mix the buttercream on low speed for up to 15-20 minutes to make the buttercream ultra smooth and remove any air bubbles. Ultimately, this step is optional. But, if you want really creamy frosting, then you don't want to skip this final step.

Stacking and Assembling the Vanilla Cake

  • Optional: Trim the brown layer off of the top of the cake and on the sides. This is an extra step I like to take for my cakes to get a cleaner look.
  • First, place your cake on a cake board. Or, you could use a flat plate or cake platter.
  • Then, spread a layer of buttercream over the top of the cake. It should be about ½" thick since this is only a two layer cake.
  • Next, stack the second layer of cake on top.
  • Add another layer of buttercream about ½" thick and spread it out over the top of the cake.
  • Then, spread a thin layer of buttercream all over the cake. Scrape off any extra buttercream off of the top. This is called the "crumb coat." The crumb coat will seal in the crumbs so that they do not get into your final layer of cake.
  • Put your cake in the fridge or freezer for 15 minutes, or until the buttercream is firm to the touch.
  • Next, place your final coat of buttercream on your cake and smooth it out. PRO TIP: Start by scooping your buttercream on top of the cake and then smooth out the top first to make it flat. Then, apply a thick layer of buttercream to the sides and smooth it out.
  • Then, use your bench scraper to slowly scrape away the excess frosting. Hold the scraper straight up and down, and slowly turn the cake until you've removed all of the excess buttercream This will give your cake straight edges.
  • Wipe off any excess buttercream off the top starting at the edge of the cake and moving toward the center. Now your cake is ready to decorate!

Decorating the Vanilla Cake

  • You can decorate this cake however you prefer! If you want more cake decorating ideas or if you are new to cake decorating, you can read my tutorial on how to decorate your first cake. But for this cake decoration, here is what I did:
  • Start by placing your spatula in the center of the top of the cake. Apply a little bit of pressure on the buttercream, and turn the cake. As you turn the cake, slowly move your spatula outwards toward the edge so you begin to create a spiral in the buttercream. If you don't like your spiral and want to start over, you can smooth the buttercream out and start over.
  • Then, after you've created your spiral, use your spatula to add small dabs of buttercream to the sides of the cake to create a rustic texture. As you transfer the buttercream to the cake, make a slight swoop (backwards "C" shape) and layer them on top of one another.
  • Next, prepare a piping bag with your buttercream. I used a Wilton 1M piping tip, but you can use whatever one you have!
  • Pipe small dollops of buttercream along the top edge of the cake, and add one dollop of buttercream in the center.
  • Finally, add some confetti sprinkles or whatever sprinkles you like all around the top of the cake!

Video

Notes

Important Things To Note Before You Start
  1. The best investment you can make when you're getting started with baking is a digital kitchen scale! Weighing your ingredients will help you avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
  2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
  3. Need more help with making your first cake? Check out my how to decorate your first cake blog post. 
  4. Make sure all of your cold ingredients (e.g. butter, eggs, milk) are at room temperature or a little warm. Why? Because we want to create an emulsion and allow the ingredients to fully mix together. 
  5. Make your own pan release (cake goop!) The best pan release ever! 
  6. If you are baking your cake in a large baking sheet pan that's 10" or larger, apply cake goop or your preferred pan release and add in a layer of parchment paper. This cake cools differently in larger pans, and the added layer of parchment paper will ensure the cake comes out of the pan better.
  7. Chill your cakes before frosting and filling. You can cover a frosted and chilled cake in fondant if you wish. This cake is also great for stacking!
  8. If you want to add food coloring to this frosting, then you will add in any food coloring while you are mixing the egg whites with the powdered sugar (before you add in the butter). PRO TIP: Use a toothpick to transfer 1-2 drops of food coloring to your frosting to avoid putting too much color in your buttercream. 
  9. You can use whichever food coloring you have, but if you want a recommendation I would suggest the Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!

Nutrition

Serving: 1serving | Calories: 913kcal | Carbohydrates: 187g | Protein: 9g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 104mg | Sodium: 742mg | Potassium: 169mg | Fiber: 2g | Sugar: 142g | Vitamin A: 514IU | Calcium: 76mg | Iron: 3mg
close up of chocolate entremet

February 23, 2022 Blog

How To Make An Entremet

Learn how to make a gorgeous dark chocolate entremet cake that looks like it came straight out of the finest French bakeries. This multi-layered dessert is built with a chocolate sponge cake, silky ganache, a perfect chocolate mousse, a shiny chocolate mirror glaze, and all the mouthfeel of each layer that makes an entremet such a towering treat. Designed by pastry chefs but absolutely achievable at home, this sophisticated dessert proves that even technical skills become manageable when you break them down step by step.

close up of chocolate entremet

This chocolate mousse cake is elegant, impressive, and surprisingly doable for home cooks who aren't afraid of a little challenge. Whether this is your first entremet or you've dabbled in French pastries before, you'll learn exactly how to build the entire thing from the base to the entremet inserts to the final tower of glossy finish. HUGE thank you to my friend Chef Christophe Rull for teaching us everything we need to know.

What's In This Blog Post

  • Entremet Ingredients & Components
  • Chocolate Fudge Cake Ingredients
  • Dark Chocolate Ganache Ingredients
  • Chocolate Mirror Glaze Ingredients
  • Making the Chocolate Fudge Cake
  • Preparing the Ganache
  • Making the Chocolate Mousse
  • Assembling the Entremet Layers
  • Chocolate Mirror Glaze
  • Pouring the Glaze and Final Assembly
  • Frequently Asked Questions
  • More Recipes You'll Love

It is a two-day culinary adventure, so treat it as a labor of love. But the moment you slice into this mousse-filled mold, the whole thing becomes so worth it-one of the best sweet treats you'll ever create in your own kitchen.

This recipe makes six entremets so you'll have plenty to share or you can freeze them and enjoy them later!

Entremet Ingredients & Components

The number of ingredients might look long, but each part of the entremet plays a crucial role in the stability of the entremet, full flavor, and aesthetic appeal. For a full list of ingredients for each component, be sure to review the recipe card below.

Every entremet cake combines multiple recipes to create distinct textures-creamy, light, crunchy, chewy-so each bite feels intentional. It's a multi-layered dessert that pulls inspiration from pastry creams, crispy cookies, fragrant fruit filling, and airy mousse layers. The importance of its taste comes from how every component works together, and this original iteration focuses on classic dark chocolate.

entrement components

Chocolate Fudge Cake Ingredients

This sponge cake layer forms the core of your entremet. Moist, rich, and sturdy enough to be part of the entremet without falling apart, it sets the foundation for the hot mixture of ganache that will eventually sit on top. You can switch the chocolate cake out for any cake recipe like vanilla cake, strawberry cake, or even lemon cake!

chocolate fudge cake ingredients
  • Eggs - Add structure and richness so the sponge cake holds up inside the entremet. You can swap for carton liquid eggs if that's what you have on hand.
  • Granulated sugar - Sweetens the cake while helping keep the crumb tender. Caster sugar works just as well.
  • Vanilla extract - Rounds out all the chocolate notes and adds warmth. Almond extract or coffee extract can replace it.
  • Mayonnaise - My secret trick for an ultra-moist, fudgy sponge that never turns dry. Sour cream or Greek yogurt works, just expect a slightly thicker texture.
  • All-purpose flour - Gives the cake structure. Cake flour is a good substitute if you want a softer crumb.
  • Cocoa powder - Adds deep chocolate flavor. Dutch-process cocoa makes it smoother and richer.
  • Baking soda - Helps the sponge rise and react with the cocoa. Baking powder can be used in a pinch.
  • Baking powder - Adds a little extra lift. If you don't have any, increase the baking soda slightly.
  • Salt - Balances the sweetness and boosts the chocolate flavor. Sea salt or kosher salt both work.
  • Water - Loosens the batter and keeps the sponge moist. Hot brewed coffee is a fantastic substitution if you want to intensify the chocolate.

Dark Chocolate Ganache Ingredients

This ganache becomes the center of the mousse-filled mold. Glucose or corn syrup gives the chocolate mixture stability at room temperature, helping it stay smooth and glossy. You can also use white chocolate ganache.

ganache ingredients
  • Granulated sugar - Adds sweetness and keeps the texture smooth. Brown sugar can deepen the flavor.
  • Glucose - Gives the ganache stability and a silky finish. Corn syrup or honey can be used instead.
  • Heavy whipping cream - Creates the creamy ganache base. Coconut cream works for a dairy-free option.
  • Dark chocolate - Provides rich, intense chocolate flavor. Any real chocolate between 60-70% cocoa will work.
  • Milk chocolate - Softens the dark chocolate and creates a super smooth center. You can replace it with more dark chocolate if you prefer less sweetness.
  • Unsalted butter - Adds shine and a luxurious mouthfeel. European butter like Plugra gives the best texture, but any unsalted butter is fine.

Chocolate Mirror Glaze Ingredients

The shiny mirror glaze is what gives the final tower its stunning presentation. Gelatin, or agar-agar if needed, transforms the hot cream mixture into that flawless, glossy finish you see on professional chocolate cherry bombes and other French desserts. You can also use regular mirror glaze.

chocolate mirror glaze ingredients
  • Water - Helps dissolve the sugar and bloom the gelatin. Coffee can be used to deepen the flavor and color.
  • Granulated sugar - Creates the shiny mirror glaze and keeps it stable. Caster sugar is a great substitute.
  • Red food coloring - Just a couple drops deepen the chocolate color and enhance the shine. You can skip it or use orange coloring instead.
  • Heavy whipping cream - Adds richness and helps emulsify the cocoa powder. Coconut cream can be used for dairy-free glazing.
  • Glucose - Helps the glaze achieve that flawless, bubble-free finish. Corn syrup is an easy swap.
  • Cocoa powder - Gives the glaze its dark chocolate flavor and glossy appearance. Dutch-process cocoa gives an even smoother finish.
  • Gelatin sheets - Set the glaze so it flows beautifully over the frozen entremet. Powdered gelatin works when bloomed in cold water first.

Chocolate Mousse

Chef Christophe Rull uses 64% dark chocolate, but you can use any real chocolate-milk chocolate or white chocolate-as long as it contains cocoa butter. The whipped cream component acts as the airy ingredient, the pâte à bombe creates structure, and the ganache adds full flavor to the mass of mousse. If you want an easier version, my easy chocolate honey mousse would also work.

bowls of pâte à bombe, ganache, and whipped cream
  • Heavy whipping cream - Whipped to soft peaks to lighten the mousse and make it airy. Coconut cream is the best dairy-free alternative.
  • Dark chocolate (64%) - The base flavor of your mousse. Any real chocolate between 60-70% cocoa works beautifully.
  • Egg yolks - Used to make the pâte à bombe, which gives the mousse its structure and velvety texture. Pasteurized yolks are a safer and easier swap.
  • Granulated sugar - Sweetens and stabilizes the pâte à bombe. Caster sugar also works well.
  • Water - Used to cook the sugar syrup for the pâte à bombe. Coffee or espresso can be used instead for a deeper chocolate flavor.
  • Whipped cream - Folded in at the end to create the light, airy texture that makes mousse so irresistible. Stabilized whipped cream works too if you need extra firmness.

Making the Chocolate Fudge Cake

This fudgy cake comes together quickly and easily and is the perfect base for your entremet! You can switch the cake out with other flavors like vanilla cake, strawberry cake or even lemon cake!

pouring ingredient into mixing bowl while whisking
pouring ingredient into mixing bowl while whisking
pouring ingredient into mixing bowl while whisking
whisk inside bowl of chocolate batter
pouring cake batter into large baking sheet
smoothing out cake batter with a spatula
chocolate cake inside of large baking sheet
cake inside baking sheet wrapped in plastic wrap
  1. Line a ¼ sheet pan (9"x13") with parchment paper and preheat your oven to 350°F.
  2. In the bowl of your stand mixer fitted with the whisk attachment, combine sugar, flour, cocoa powder, baking soda, baking powder, and salt.
  3. In a separate bowl, whisk eggs, mayonnaise, water, and vanilla until smooth.
  4. Pour the egg mixture into the dry ingredients on low speed, then increase to high speed to combine fully.
  5. Spread the batter evenly across the prepared pan.
  6. Bake the cake for 15-20 minutes or until the center is set.
  7. Cool the cake for 15 minutes, then remove the cake from the pan to cool fully.
  8. Use cling wrap or plastic wrap to cover once baked and cooled, then freeze so it's easier to trim later with a cookie cutter.

Preparing the Ganache

pouring ingredient into saucepan
pouring ingredient into saucepan
hand mixing with spatula inside saucepan
pouring cream over chocolate inside mixing bowl
spatula dripping with chocolate
immersion blender inside of pitcher with chocolate
  1. Combine your glucose, granulated sugar, and cream together and bring the pan to a boil in a medium-sized saucepan.
  2. Then, in a heat-proof or glass bowl, pour in about ⅓ of your boiling mixture over your chocolate and mix them together until you reach a shiny and smooth consistency. Then, repeat this step in thirds until you've added all your cream. If you put all of your cream in at once, then your ganache may separate.
  3. Next, place your butter into a tall container, and then pour the melted chocolate into the pitcher over the butter.
  4. Then, using an immersion blender, mix the chocolate and the butter together until it is shiny. PRO TIP: Hold the mixer at a slight angle to prevent incorporating air into the ganache.
  5. Cover the ganache with plastic wrap. Do this by pressing the plastic wrap right up against the surface of the ganache. This step will prevent any water in the air from being added to the ganache.
  6. Finally, let the ganache set. Set it aside for at least 5-6 hours at room temperature (or you can put it in the refrigerator and cut the time in half). The texture is smoother if you leave it at room temperature.

Making the Chocolate Mousse

This chocolate mousse is made up of three components: pâte à bombe, ganache, and whipped cream. I will walk you through how to make each of them.

chocolate batter inside of mixing bowl

Whipped cream adds a lightness and airiness to the mousse.

hand mixer held above bowl of whipped cream
mixing bowl filled with whipped cream
  1. Whip the heavy cream in a large bowl until soft peaks form.
  2. Set it aside.

Ganache adds flavor and structure to the mousse.

pouring cream over chocolate inside mixing bowl
using spatula inside mixing bowl
  1. Bring the heavy cream to JUST boiling and then pour it over the chocolate.
  2. Allow it to sit for 5 minutes, then whisk until smooth.
  3. Set it aside.

Pâte à bombe is a light, creamy base made with cooked sugar syrup and egg yolks, similar to Italian meringue but using yolks instead of egg whites.

taking temperature of saucepan
pouring ingredients from saucepan into mixing bowl while whisking
hand mixer lifted just above mixing bowl showing ribbons of batter in the bowl
  1. Begin by cooking the sugar and water in a saucepan over medium-high heat to 244°F.
  2. Place the egg yolks into the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment attached.
  3. While mixing on medium speed, slowly pour the sugar mixture into the stand mixer.
  4. Whisk until the egg yolk mixture reaches ribbon stage.
hand holding spatula mixing ganache
hand holding spatula mixing ganache
hand holding spatula mixing ganache
pouring mixture into mixing bowl
hand holding spatula mixing ganache
chocolate batter inside of mixing bowl
  1. To build the chocolate mousse, fold ½ of the whipped cream into the ganache to lighten it.
  2. Then add in the rest of the whipped cream by folding gently.
  3. Then fold in the pâte à bombe to create the perfect mousse for the entremet.

    Assembling the Entremet Layers

    Now it's time to bring it all together!

    hand placing cake ring into cake
    hand trimming chocolate cake
    piping ganache on top of chocolate cake
    placing acetate sheets into entremet pans
    hand piping mousse into entremet pans
    hand pushing cake down into entremet pan
    spatula scraping over the top of chocolate entremet
    1. First, remove the plastic wrap from the frozen cake.
    2. Next, use a 3" cake cutter to create small cake rounds. 
    3. Prepare a piping bag with a large round tip (an 8 or 9 tip) and fill it with your chocolate ganache.
    4. Then, pipe your chocolate ganache on top of the center of your cake rounds.
    5. Freeze the cake rounds with ganache on top for 1 hour or until they are set.
    6. While the cake rounds with ganache are in the freezer, prepare your 4" cake rings/entremet mold for assembly.
    7. You will start by coating the inside of the cake rings with cooking spray.
    8. Cut your acetate sheets to 2" x 9.25", and cut out squares of acetate that will cover the entire bottom of the cake rings.
    9. Then, line the inside of your non-stick cake rings with acetate sheets. Next, place a square sheet of acetate on a baking sheet. Then, place your cake ring that is lined with acetate on top of the square.
    10. Once the cake rounds with ganache have set in the freezer for 1 hour, remove them from the freezer.
    11. Prepare a piping bag and fill it with your chocolate mousse.
    12. Now it is time to assemble the entremet. PRO TIP: Before you begin piping your mousse ensure that the acetate squares on the bottom are in place so none of the mousse will escape.
    13. Start by piping chocolate mousse into the acetate-lined cake rings about ¾ of the way to the top of the cake rings.
    14. Next, hold the cake round topped with ganache and place it mousse side down into the center of the ganache (cake side should be on top). Gently press the cake round into the mousse until the mousse moves up to the top. You will see a ring of mousse form around the cake and that is when you know the mousse is filled on the sides.
    15. Then, flatten out the mousse and scrape off any excess from the cake ring so that it's level.
    16. Freeze the entremets for a minimum of 3 hours. Chef Christophe recommends freezing them overnight. This will allow all of the layers to fully set in place.

    Chocolate Mirror Glaze

    This mirror glaze is super shiny, smooth, and sets the perfect finish for our entremet.

    holding gelatin sheets above bowl of water
    pouring water into saucepan
    holding bowl of sugar above saucepan
    adding red food coloring to saucepan
    thermometer and whisk inside of saucepan
    pouring mixture into pitcher
    pouring cream into saucepan while whisking
    hand pouring cocoa powder into saucepan
    whisk inside of saucepan filled with chocolate
    pouring chocolate into pitcher
    immersion blender inside of chocolate glaze
    immersion blender inside of chocolate glaze
    1. Bloom gelatin sheets in cold water.
    2. Cook sugar, water, and optional food coloring to 222°F. Food coloring adds depth of color to the final mirror glaze.
    3. Separately warm the glucose and cream, then combine with the sugar syrup.
    4. Slowly pour the warmed glucose and cream mixture into the large saucepan of your sugar and water while whisking continuously to combine.
    5. Then, bring the mixture to a boil.
    6. Add the cocoa powder, turn off the heat, and mix until smooth.
    7. Pour over the bloomed gelatin and blend with an immersion blender until fully emulsified and free of bubbles.
    8. Cool the glaze to 104°F before using.

    Pouring the Glaze and Final Assembly

    Congratulations! It's time to glaze and finish your gorgeous entremet!

    using heat gun to warm up pan with chocolate entremet inside
    removing the chocolate entremet from a pan
    removing acetate from chocolate entremet
    pouring chocolate glaze over chocolate entremet
    hand rolling chocolate entremet in bowl of edible gold sprinkles
    hand placing toothpick inside of chocolate entremet
    hand placing edible gold on top of chocolate entremet using tweezers
    hand placing ring inside of edible gold
    hand adding edible gold decorations to chocolate entremet
    chocolate entremets on a plate with edible gold decorations
    1. Unmold the frozen entremets using a heat gun, peel away acetate, and set each one on a cooling rack over a baking sheet lined with plastic wrap to catch excess glaze.
    2. Pour glaze over the top of the cake and along the sides for full coverage.
    3. After it sets, pour a second layer for a truly flawless finish.
    4. Decorate with gold leaf, chocolate shards, nuts, or crispy cookies.
    5. Transfer the finished dessert using a skewer inserted in the center, then twist it out and cover the hole with gold leaf or another decoration for a delicious display that rivals the nation's culinary standards.

    Frequently Asked Questions

    What is an entremet?

    An entremet is a dessert that is made up of multiple layers with different combinations of different textures used to enhance a certain flavor profile-like chocolate!

    How is an entremet different from cake?

    Entremet is composed of multiple layers of dessert, including layers of cake, mousse, ganache, etc. Unlike cake, entremets come in all kinds of textures and contain several components to them making them a more advanced dessert than your average cake.

    What can I substitute for glucose?

    If you do not have glucose, you can use honey or corn syrup.

    Can I put the chocolate ganache in the refrigerator to set it faster?

    For this recipe, yes. You can put this ganache in the refrigerator to speed up the setting time. You will just want to allow yourself time to let it warm back up again because it will be difficult to pipe if the ganache is hard. PRO TIP: The best temperature to pipe chocolate ganache is 72ºF (22ºC).

    If you are making a chocolate ganache for another recipe like Chef Christophe's chocolate raspberry galaxy bonbons, you may not be able to put ganache in the fridge to speed up the setting process. Why? Because putting ganache in the refrigerator will add moisture to it and that can interfere with some desserts such as bonbons. Always check the recipe instructions before you assume all ganaches can be refrigerated.

    Can I use powdered gelatin?

    Yes! Replace the gelatin sheet with an equal amount of powdered gelatin. Simply sprinkle the gelatin over the water and let it absorb for 5 minutes.

    Can I use anything other than gelatin to set the chocolate glaze?

    Yes, you can use agar-agar. Keep in mind, if you use agar-agar as a substitute you will have slightly different (firmer) results.

    More Recipes You'll Love

    Death by chocolate cake

    Easy chocolate ganache recipe

    Chocolate mirror glaze recipe

    Chocolate honey mousse

    Recipe

    close up of chocolate entremet
    Print Recipe
    4.72 from 42 votes

    Chocolate Entremet Cake

    Learn how to make a chocolate entremet with layers of chocolate cake, chocolate ganache, mousse, and a flawless shiny chocolate glaze from Chef Christophe Rull
    Prep Time2 days d
    Cook Time30 minutes mins
    freezing6 hours hrs
    Total Time2 days d 6 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: French
    Servings: 6 servings
    Calories: 1416kcal
    Author: Liz Marek

    Equipment

    • Thermometer
    • Stand mixer or hand mixer
    • Baking sheet
    • 3" x 2" cake rings/entremet mold
    • 2.5" cake cutter cake cutter should be slightly smaller than cake ring/entremet mold
    • acetate sheets
    • Wire cooling rack
    • plastic wrap
    • skewer
    • pitcher or large measuring cup
    • immersion blender or burr mixer
    • white nonpareil sprinkles (optional)
    • edible gold powder (optional)
    • edible gold leaf (optional)

    Ingredients

    Chocolate Fudge Cake

    • 100 grams eggs room temperature
    • 220 grams granulated sugar
    • 4 grams vanilla extract
    • 160 grams Mayonaise room temperature
    • 180 grams all purpose flour
    • 50 grams cocoa powder
    • 4 grams baking soda
    • 2 grams baking powder
    • 2 grams salt
    • 180 grams water

    Dark Chocolate Ganache

    • 15 grams granulated sugar
    • 10 grams glucose
    • 110 grams heavy whipping cream
    • 50 grams dark chocolate
    • 40 grams milk chocolate
    • 10 grams unsalted butter European butter or "Plugra" works best

    Chocolate Glaze

    • 100 grams water
    • 340 grams granulated sugar
    • 2 drops red food coloring I use chef master
    • 220 grams heavy whipping cream
    • 120 grams glucose
    • 130 grams cocoa powder
    • 16 grams gelatin sheets For powdered gelatin, bloom 16g of gelatin with 80g of water.

    Chocolate Mousse

    • 200 grams heavy whipping cream
    • 200 grams 64% dark chocolate
    • 60 grams egg yolks
    • 60 grams granulated sugar
    • 60 grams water
    • 200 grams whipped cream

    Instructions

    Making the Chocolate Fudge Cake

    • Prepare a ¼" sheet pan (9"x13") with parchment paper and preheat your oven to 350ºF (180ºC).
    • In the bowl of your stand mixer with the whisk attachment, combine the sugar, flour, cocoa powder, baking soda, baking powder, and salt. Stir to combine.
    • Then, in a separate bowl, combine the eggs, mayonnaise, water, and vanilla and whisk them to combine.
    • While the mixer is turning on low, gradually add the wet ingredients into the dry ingredients. Then, increase the mixer speed to 2 and continue to mix for about 1 minute or until the batter is fully combined and smooth. Remember to scrape the bowl to ensure all of the ingredients are incorporated.
    • Next, spread the cake batter evenly on a parchment lined ¼ sheet baking pan. PRO TIP: I also use cake goop around the edges to make the cake release easier.
    • Bake the cake at 350°F (182°C) for 15-20 minutes, or until the cake is finished baking and the center of the cake is set.
    • Finally, after the cake has been removed from the oven and cooled for about 15 minutes, remove the cake from the pan and wrap it in plastic wrap. Then, place the wrapped cake in the freezer until you are ready to start assembling the entremet. Chef Christophe recommends freezing the cake for at least 2-3 hours.

    Preparing the Dark Chocolate Ganache

    • Combine your glucose, granulated sugar, and cream together and bring the pan to a boil in a medium sized saucepan.
    • Then, in a heat-proof or glass bowl, pour in about ⅓ of your boiling mixture over your chocolate and mix them together until you reach a shiny and smooth consistency. Then, repeat this step in thirds until you've added all your cream. If you put all of your cream in at once, then your ganache may separate.
    • Next, place your butter into a tall container, and then pour the melted chocolate into the pitcher over the butter.
    • Then, using an immersion blender, mix the chocolate and the butter together until it is shiny. PRO TIP: Hold the mixer at a slight angle to prevent incorporating air into the ganache.
    • Cover the ganache with plastic wrap. Do this by pressing the plastic wrap right up against the surface of the ganache. This step will prevent any water in the air from being added to the ganache.
    • Finally, let the ganache set. Set it aside for at least 5-6 hours at room temperature (or you can put it in the refrigerator and cut the time in half). The texture is smoother if you leave it at room temperature.

    How to Make the Chocolate Mousse (Pâte à bombe, Ganache, and Whipped Cream)

    • This chocolate mousse is made up of three components: pâte à bombe, ganache, and whipped cream. I will walk you through how to make each of them.
    • First, in a large mixing bowl, prepare your whipped cream. Use a hand mixer to whip your heavy cream. You do not need stiff peaks, but the whipped cream should be stable. Once you have soft peaks, set it aside.
    • Next, fill a heatproof bowl with your chocolate.
    • Then, in a saucepan, bring your heavy cream to a boil in a saucepan and then pour about ⅓ of the boiling cream over your chocolate. Mix it until all of the chocolate is melted.
    • Pour ⅓ more of the boiling cream into the chocolate and mix until it is combined. Repeat this process once more with the remaining ⅓ of the hot heavy cream and mix it into the chocolate ganache. Then, set it aside.
    • Next, prepare the pâte à bombe. Start by filling a large saucepan with water and sugar mixed together. Then, place your egg yolks in a heatproof bowl.
    • Heat the water and sugar in the stovetop pan to 244°F (118°C) using a thermometer.
    • Once the pâte à bombe reaches 244°F (118°C), slowly pour it into the bowl with the egg yolks while whisking continuously (similar to how you would make an Italian meringue).
    • Whip the egg yolks until they reach the ribbon stage (this is when the texture has thickened, the volume has doubled, and will be lighter in color/appear pale yellow). Once you've reached the ribbon stage, your pâte à bombe is ready.
    • Now you will combine your three elements (pâte à bombe, chocolate ganache, and whipped cream) to make your mousse. Begin by transferring the whipped cream into the bowl of the chocolate ganache, and then mix to combine. The reason you will mix the whipped cream into the chocolate ganache first is to lighten up the ganache texture so that it is more airy and will mix easier with the pâte à bombe.
    • Then, pour the pâte à bombe into the bowl of the mixed chocolate ganache and whipped cream, and fold it in until it is fully combined.

    Assembling the Cake, Ganache, and Mousse Layers

    • First, remove the plastic wrap from the frozen cake.
    • Next, use a 3" cake cutter to create small cake rounds. The height of the cake should be about ¼ of the height of the cake ring/entremet mold you are using. Trim the cakes to 0.5" tall.
    • Prepare a piping bag with a large round tip (an 8 or 9 tip) and fill it with your chocolate ganache.
    • Then, pipe your chocolate ganache on top of the center of your cake rounds.
    • Freeze the cake rounds with ganache on top for 1 hour or until they are set.
    • While the cake rounds with ganache are in the freezer, prepare your 4" cake rings/entremet mold for assembly.
    • You will start by coating the inside of the cake rings with cooking spray.
    • Cut your acetate sheets to 2" x 9.25", and cut out squares of acetate that will cover the entire bottom of the cake rings.
    • Then, line the inside of your non-stick cake rings with acetate sheets. Next, place a square sheet of acetate on a baking sheet. Then, place your cake ring that is lined with acetate on top of the square.
    • Once the cake rounds with ganache have set in the freezer for 1 hour, remove them from the freezer.
    • Prepare a piping bag and fill it with your chocolate mousse.
    • Now it is time to assemble the entremet. PRO TIP: Before you begin piping your mousse ensure that the acetate squares on the bottom are in place so none of the mousse will escape.
    • Start by piping chocolate mousse into the acetate-lined cake rings about ¾ of the way to the top of the cake rings.
    • Next, hold the cake round topped with ganache and place it mousse side down into the center of the ganache (cake side should be on top). Gently press the cake round into the mousse until the mousse moves up to the top. You will see a ring of mousse form around the cake and that is when you know the mousse is filled on the sides.
    • Then, flatten out the mousse and scrape off any excess from the cake ring so that it's level.
    • Freeze the entremets for a minimum of 3 hours. Chef Christophe recommends freezing them overnight. This will allow all of the layers to fully set in place.

    Chocolate Glaze Instructions

    • First, fill a bowl with cold water and place your gelatin sheets in the bowl one at a time to prevent clumping. This will allow your gelatin sheets to bloom and absorb the water. Set aside for about 5 minutes.
    • In a large saucepan, combine the water, sugar, and a few drops of red or orange food coloring. Adding the food coloring is entirely optional. This is a professional pastry chef. PRO TIP: When you add red food coloring, it will intensify the color and shine of your finished chocolate glaze.
    • Then, stir to combine everything and bring the mixture to 222°F (106°C).
    • Next in a separate container, mix your glucose with your cream. Then, warm it up in the microwave for 1 minute and whisk to mix them together.
    • Slowly pour the warmed glucose and cream mixture into the large saucepan of your sugar and water while whisking continuously to combine.
    • Then, bring the mixture to a boil.
    • Add the cocoa powder. Turn off the heat and continue to mix until combined.
    • Next, squeeze out the excess water from your bloomed gelatin sheets and then add the gelatin to a pitcher (or large measuring cup).
    • Pour the cocoa mixture on top of the gelatin, and mix the glaze using an immersion blender. Mix until all of the bubbles are gone. PRO TIP: Hold the immersion blender at a slight angle to avoid adding any air bubbles into the glaze. The smoother and bubble free the glaze is, the better the shine.
    • Finally, place your pitcher (or large measuring cup) filled with your glaze into an ice bath and cool it 104°F (40°C). Then, set it aside until you are ready to pour the glaze over your entremet.

    Adding the Glaze and Final Assembly Instructions

    • First, you will unmold the frozen entremets. Heat up the side of the frozen cake ring using a heat gun (or if you don't have a heat gun you could use a hair dryer). Gently use your finger to push the entremet out of the cake ring.
    • Then, peel off the acetate sheet.
    • Next, place your entremets on a cooling rack. Chef Christophe prepared a baking sheet with plastic wrap and topped it with a cooling rack. Why? Because the plastic wrap will catch any leftover glaze so that you can reuse it!
    • Your glaze should be 104°F (40°C).
    • Pour your chocolate glaze over your entremets so that it covers it all along the top and the sides.
    • Using a flat spatula to gently scrape across the top of the entremets so that they are level and doing so will remove any excess glaze. PRO TIP: Chef Christophe recommends glazing your entremets in 2 layers. Start by pouring the glaze over the entremet and then put it in the freezer for 1 hour to allow it to set. After 1 hour has passed, pour a 2nd layer of glaze on top of your entremets. Ultimately, the first layer will cover any air bubbles and the 2nd layer will be shiny.
    • Then, prepare your decorations for your entremet! Chef Christophe mixed small white nonpareil sprinkles with some gold powder in a bowl. If you don't want to use sprinkles you could use streusel, nuts, toasted coconut flakes, chocolate cookie crumbs, or anything you desire! The possibilities are endless!
    • Next, pick up and transfer the chocolate entremets by sticking a skewer into the center to gently lift it up off the cooling rack.
    • (Optional) Now it's time to decorate! While lifting it up by the skewer, carefully roll the entremet into the sprinkles so they stick along the bottom of the entremet.
    • Transfer the entremet to your plate.
    • Remove the toothpick by twisting it and pulling it out at the same time.
    • Finally, place gold leaf in the center to cover the hole. Mix a little gold dust with grand marnier and decorate the top of the entremet.

    Video

    Notes

    Important Things To Note Before You Start:
    • This is a 2-day dessert! On day 1, you will prepare the cake, ganache, mousse, and assemble the entremets. On day 2, you will prepare the glaze and finish the entremet.
    • The chocolate you use matters! Avoid using chocolate chips from the grocery store. Why? Because they contain thickeners that stop the chocolate from melting smoothly. Chef Christophe recommends using Cacao Barry Extra-Bitter Guayaquil. Ideally, you need to use a "real chocolate" that is derived from a cocoa pod and contains cocoa butter ( with real chocolate that is at least 60-70% cocoa content).
    • Weigh your ingredients to avoid failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
    • Make sure all your cold ingredients are room temperature or slightly warm (butter, milk, eggs, to create a cohesive batter. Curdled batter causes cakes to collapse.
    • Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1servings | Calories: 1416kcal | Carbohydrates: 185g | Protein: 19g | Fat: 76g | Saturated Fat: 36g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 15g | Monounsaturated Fat: 21g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 332mg | Sodium: 605mg | Potassium: 760mg | Fiber: 12g | Sugar: 124g | Vitamin A: 1823IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 185mg | Iron: 8mg

    close up of pistachio cake

    February 15, 2022 Blog

    Pistachio Cake with Raspberry Filling and French Buttercream

    This tender pistachio cake is made with homemade pistachio paste (so easy you won't ever buy it again) and layered with fresh raspberry reduction and a rich French buttercream that tastes like ice cream! Pistachio lovers go CRAZY for this cake!

    close up of pistachio cake

    If you've never had pistachio then you've got to give it a chance! It's such a unique flavor. Rich, nutty, earthy, and very distinct. This cake doesn't use any artificial pistachio flavor so it's a great recipe to try if you want to experience true pistachio flavor. 

     

    What's In This Blog Post

    • Ingredients
    • How to Make Pistachio Cake
      • How to Make Pistachio Butter
      • Preparing the Raspberry Filling
      • Making the French Buttercream
      • Assembling the Pistachio Cake
    • FAQ
    • More Recipes You'll Love

    Ingredients

    pistachio cake ingredients

    Pistachio butter: If you do not have pistachio butter on hand you can make your own using pistachios and oil! Keep scrolling and I will walk you through how to make your own pistachio butter. So easy and much cheaper than buying it!

    Clear Jel: Clear Jel is a thickening agent that you will use to make the raspberry filling. If you do not have Clear Jel, then you can use cornstarch as a substitute. Cornstarch is stronger than Clear Jel. If you're substituting Clear Jel with cornstarch, then you will cut the amount needed in half (e.g. 2 ounces Clear Jel = 1 ounce cornstarch).

    How to Make Pistachio Cake

    1. Prepare three 6" round cake pans with cake goop or another preferred pan spray. You can prepare round sheets with parchment paper if you're nervous about the cakes sticking.
    2. Preheat your oven to 335ºF (168ºC).
    3. First, in the bowl of your stand mixer, combine the dry ingredients. This includes flour, sugar, brown sugar, salt, baking soda, and baking powder. Mix them to combine.adding dry ingredients to the bowl of a stand mixer
    4. Then, in a separate bowl, combine the room temperature eggs, buttermilk, and vanilla. Whisk gently to combine and set aside.
    5. Next, using a large measuring cup, combine the oil and the pistachio butter. It is ok if these don't completely mix together. Ultimately, the mixer will do most of the work for you.
    6. In the bowl of your stand mixer, add the egg and buttermilk mixture to the dry ingredients while mixing on low speed. This is called the reverse creaming method, instead of creaming together the butter and sugar, we're adding the liquid ingredients after to create. a beautiful, velvety texture.adding buttermilk mixture to dry ingredients
    7. Once it has evenly combined into the dry ingredients and thoroughly moistened it, add in the oil and pistachio butter.add the pistachio mixture to the batter
    8. Fold in your chopped pistachios at the end. adding chopped pistachios to batter
    9. Mix your cake batter on medium speed until the batter is fully incorporated and smooth. Scrape the bowl to ensure that all of the ingredients are combined.
    10. Next, add in your desired amount of green food coloring to achieve the "pistachio color" you are wanting. I use one drop of avocado green. When you bake the batter, it will be slightly green but it tends to look more yellow if you do not use any green food coloring.adding green food coloring to pistachio cake batter
    11. Divide the cake batter evenly into your prepared cake pans, and bake them at 335ºF (168ºC) for 30-35 minutes or until a toothpick comes out from the center cleanly. Add 5 more minutes at a time until the cake is finished baking.pistachio cake batter divided into cake pans
    12. Finally, cool your cakes for 10 minutes inside the cake pans before attempting to remove them from their pans onto a cooling rack. Freeze them for 1 hour before frosting.baked pistachio cakes

    How to Make Pistachio Butter

    close up of pistachio butter in a jar

    Don't have pistachio butter on hand? No problem! You can make your own! 

    Here is what you will need to make pistachio butter:

    • 1 cup shelled pistachios (roasted or raw is fine)
    • 1-2 tablespoons neutral oil (e.g. grapeseed)

    How to make pistachio butter step-by-step:

    1. In a food processor, add your pistachios with the chopping attachment. adding pistachios to a food processor
    2. Begin blending and scrape as needed until they are pretty finely chopped.close up of finely chopped pistachios
    3. Then, add in about 1-2 tablespoons of oil (grapeseed oil would work or another neutral oil) and blend it until you have a peanut butter texture. This will take anywhere from 7 to 10 minutes depending on your food processor. It will start to look like a dough ball at first, just scrape and keep mixing until it forms a butter.closeup of blended pistachio butter
    4. As an optional step, add in 1-2 drops of food coloring. If you have roasted pistachios, neon green food coloring is best. If you have unroasted pistachios, avocado green food coloring is better. You can use whichever green food coloring you have, but if you want a recommendation I would suggest the Chef Master gel food coloring. Use code "SUGARGEEKTEN" to get 10% off your order!adding green food coloring to pistachio butterclose up of pistachio butter

    Preparing the Raspberry Filling

    1. First, combine the raspberries and sugar in a saucepan and bring them to a boil.pouring sugar onto raspberries in a saucepan
    2. Then, use an immersion blender to make the filling smooth (or leave it chunky if you prefer). No need for red food coloring here unless your raspberries are dull in color.
    3. In a separate container, combine your Clear Jel (or cornstarch) and water to make a slurry. Mix until smooth.combining clear jel and water
    4. Then, pour it into the raspberry mixture and let it simmer until the mixture is clear and thickened.adding clear gel slurry to the raspberry mixture
    5. Remove the raspberry filling from heat, and then stir in the lemon juice and zest.adding lemon zest to raspberry mixture
    6. Pour the filling into a heatproof bowl and cover with plastic wrap so it's touching the surface of the filling to prevent skin from forming.adding raspberry mixture to a clear bowl
    7. Finally, cool the raspberry filling entirely before using it. Store any leftovers in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 6 months.

    Making the French Buttercream

    1. In the bowl of your stand mixer, combine the eggs and salt and whisk them until the yolks and whites are combined.
    2. Then, add in your sugar and whisk it to combine. I do not recommend using powdered sugar for this.adding eggs to a mixing bowl
    3. Next, place the bowl over a water bath of simmering water over medium heat.mixing bowl on a pot of simmering water
    4. Periodically stir the eggs and watch them to ensure they do not heat unevenly. If you don't occasionally stir and watch the eggs, they will likely cook on the side of the bowl. Another thing to look out for is the sugar can sink to the bottom of the bowl causing uneven heating. Store bought eggs come pre-pasteurized, so heating them to a particular temperature is unnecessary. However, you must have the sugar dissolved for the meringue to whip properly.whisking egg mixture in a bowl
    5. Once you don't feel any grains in between your fingers when you touch the egg mixture then the sugar is dissolved and is ready to whip. rubbing the egg mixture between fingers
    6. Then, once the eggs and sugar are ready, move the bowl to your mixer and begin to whip them at high speed using your whip attachment.
    7. After about 5-8 minutes, the meringue will almost double in size and form into firm (but not stiff) peaks. FYI: The addition of the egg yolks will keep the meringue from becoming stiff like an all-white meringue.close up of whipped egg mixture
    8. Once the meringue has cooled (feel the bowl with your hand), begin to add in your butter in chunks while mixing on low. adding butter to whipped egg mixture
    9. Then, after you add in all of your butter, whip the buttercream a few more minutes until the texture changes to a whipped cream-like texture. Once you have the right consistency, add in your vanilla extract. You can use the seeds of one vanilla bean in place of vanilla extract for an even better taste!adding vanilla to french buttercream
    10. Stop whipping the buttercream when it does not have a strong butter flavor anymore, and it is light and creamy in texture. Switch to the paddle attachment.close up of french buttercream on a whip
    11. While the paddle is mixing, add 2 oz of pistachio butter, and 1-2 drops of green food color to reach your desired color. adding pistachio paste to french buttercream
    12. Allow the French buttercream to mix on low for about 5 minutes. Ultimately, this will push out the air bubbles to get you the most desirable texture. closeup of pistachio buttercream

    Assembling the Pistachio Cake

    This pistachio cake is simple enough that you do not need cake decorating experience. But, if you want to learn cake decorating basics, tools, and techniques, check out my blog post on how to decorate your first cake.

    how to make a cake tutorial
    1. First, trim off the dome of your cake layers and the brown edges around the sides and bottom.trimming pistachio cake layerstrimming pistachio cake layers
    2. Place the first cake layer onto your cardboard cake round. Then, spread a thin layer of raspberry filling on top of the cake.adding raspberry filling to pistachio cake layer
    3. Next, spread on about ¼″ of your buttercream, and then add your next layer of cake.adding buttercream to pistachio cake
    4. Repeat this process with layer two, and then add your final layer of cake on top.adding the top layer of cake to the pistachio cake
    5. Cover the entire cake in a thin layer of buttercream. This is called the "crumb coat."crumb coating the pistachio cake
    6. Then, place your cake into the fridge or freezer for 20 minutes to set the buttercream layer.
    7. Apply your final coat of buttercream and add a nice rustic finish with your offset spatula if you desire. adding a rustic texture to buttercream with an offset spatula
    8. Next, scoop up a handful of chopped up pistachios and carefully press them into the buttercream around the bottom of your cake.adding pistachios to a frosted cake
    9. Sprinkle more chopped up pistachios on top of the cake in a circle around the edge.sprinkling pistachios on top of the pistachio cake
    10. Finally, as an optional step, pipe a few dollops of buttercream using a piping bag and a star tip and then place a few fresh raspberries on top. The reason you want to include pistachios and raspberries into your cake decoration is because you want someone to look at the cake and know what's inside of it without having to cut into it!piping dollops of buttercreamadding fresh raspberries to pistachio cakeclose up of pistachio cake slice

    FAQ

    What is pistachio cake made of?

    Pistachio cake batter is made using pistachio butter. Pistachio butter is made by grinding up pistachios and oil in a food processor. In addition to pistachio butter, pistachio cake is made of all-purpose flour, sugar, brown sugar, salt, baking soda, baking powder, buttermilk, eggs, vanilla extract, and a hint of green food coloring. 

    How do I know if my pistachios are bad?

    Shriveled, dehydrated-looking pistachios have gone bad. Use pistachios that are round and full in shape, and are yellow or green in color (dark brown indicates they are definitely bad).

    Do I need to use food coloring?

    No. Food coloring is optional. However, if you do not use food coloring, then your cake may not appear green.

    Can I use cake flour?

    No. For this recipe, you want to use all-purpose flour. You want to use all-purpose flour because this cake is made with buttermilk which tenderizes the gluten in the flour (and makes it moist and tender). 

    I don't have pistachio butter. What else can I use?

    If you do not have pistachio butter, you can make your own! Using a food processor, combine 1 cup of roasted pistachios and 1-2 tablespoons of neutral oil (e.g. grapeseed oil) until you reach a butter consistency.

    What flavors go well with pistachio?

    Pistachio goes great with fruits and chocolates! Want a few ideas to change up this pistachio cake recipe? You can pair this pistachio cake with a tangy, cream cheese frosting that tastes incredible with the raspberry filling.

    Or, if you're a chocolate fanatic, switch up the raspberry filling for chocolate ganache. If you really want to make this pistachio cake to the next level and the ultimate chocolate lover's dream, top your pistachio cake with a decadent, chocolate drip and some white chocolate chips! The chocolate flavor goes surprisingly well with pistachio.

    Why is there no butter in this cake recipe?

    When you work with pistachio butter (either from the store or homemade), you do not need to use additional unsalted butter in the recipe. Why? Because your cake will get its fat content from the pistachios with the oil in the pistachio butter.

    More Recipes You'll Love

    Pistachio macarons

    Raspberry filling

    Cream cheese frosting

    Easy chocolate ganache

    Recipe

    close up of pistachio cake
    Print Recipe
    4.85 from 132 votes

    Pistachio Cake with Raspberry Filling and French Buttercream

    Moist and tender pistachio cake layered with tart raspberry filling and creamy, sweet French buttercream. This pistachio cake is a pistachio lover's dream come true! Made with homemade pistachio butter.
    Prep Time30 minutes mins
    Cook Time40 minutes mins
    chilling10 minutes mins
    Total Time1 hour hr 20 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 8 cups
    Calories: 1569kcal
    Author: Liz Marek

    Equipment

    • Food processor

    Ingredients

    Raspberry Filling

    • 13 ounces fresh or frozen raspberries
    • 5 ounces granulated sugar
    • 1 ounce lemon zest
    • 1 ounce fresh lemon juice
    • 2 ounces water
    • 1 ounce Clear Jel or cornstarch

    Pistachio Cake

    • 14 ounces all purpose flour
    • 7 ounces granulated sugar
    • 7 ounces brown sugar
    • 1 teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon baking soda
    • ½ teaspoon baking powder
    • 10 ounces buttermilk (room temperature)
    • 2 eggs (room temperature)
    • 6 ounces oil
    • 4 ounces pistachio butter
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon green food color (optional)
    • 4 oz chopped pistachios plus more for garnish

    French Buttercream

    • 8 large eggs
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 14 ounces granulated sugar
    • 24 ounces unsalted butter
    • 2 teaspoons vanilla extract
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    • For timing purposes, I recommend you start with the raspberry filling to let it chill, then make the pistachio butter if you aren't buying it, then make the pistachio cake, and while the cakes are cooling, make the buttercream.

    Raspberry Filling

    • First, combine the raspberries and sugar in a saucepan and bring them to a boil.
    • Then, use an immersion blender to make the filling smooth (or leave it chunky if you prefer).
    • In a separate container, combine your Clear Jel (or cornstarch) and water to make a slurry.
    • Then, pour it into the raspberry mixture and let it simmer until the mixture is clear and thickened.
    • Remove the raspberry filling from heat, and then stir in the lemon juice and zest.
    • Pour the filling into a heatproof bowl and cover with plastic wrap so it's touching the surface of the filling to prevent skin from forming.
    • Finally, cool the raspberry filling entirely before using it. Store any leftovers in the fridge for up to a week or in the freezer for up to 6 months.

    Pistachio Cake

    • Prepare three 6" round cake pans with cake goop or another preferred pan spray.
    • Preheat your oven to 335ºF (168ºC).
    • First, in the bowl of your stand mixer, combine the dry ingredients. This includes flour, sugar, brown sugar, salt, baking soda, and baking powder. Mix them to combine.
    • Then, in a separate bowl, combine the room temperature eggs, buttermilk, and vanilla. Whisk gently to combine and set aside.
    • Next, using a large measuring cup, combine the oil and the pistachio butter. It is ok if these don't completely mix together. Ultimately, the mixer will do most of the work for you.
    • In the bowl of your stand mixer, add in the buttermilk/egg mix to the dry ingredients while mixing on low speed.
    • Once it has evenly combined into the dry ingredients and thoroughly moistened it, add in the oil and pistachio butter.
    • Mix your cake batter on medium speed until the batter is fully incorporated and smooth. Scrape the bowl to ensure that all of the ingredients are combined.
    • Next, add in your desired amount of green food coloring to achieve the "pistachio color" you are wanting. I use one drop of avocado green. When you bake the batter, it will be slightly green but it tends to look more yellow if you do not use any green food coloring.
    • Divide the cake batter evenly into your prepared cake pans, and bake them at 335ºF (168ºC) for 30-35 minutes or until a toothpick comes out from the center cleanly. Add 5 more minutes at a time until the cake is finished baking.
    • Finally, cool your cakes for 10 minutes inside the cake pans before attempting to remove them from their pans onto a cooling rack. Freeze them for 1 hour before frosting.

    French Buttercream

    • In the bowl of your stand mixer, combine the eggs and salt and whisk them until the yolks and whites are combined.
    • Then, add in your sugar and whisk it to combine.
    • Next, place the bowl over a water bath of simmering water over medium heat.
    • Whisking occasionally, heat the eggs and sugar until the sugar is dissolved. It should feel smooth when you rub it together with your fingers.
    • Periodically stir the eggs and watch them to ensure they do not heat unevenly. If you don't occasionally stir and watch the eggs, they will likely cook on the side of the bowl. Another thing to look out for is the sugar can sink to the bottom of the bowl causing uneven heating.
    • Store bought eggs come pre-pasteurized, so heating them to a particular temperature is unnecessary. However, you must have the sugar dissolved for the meringue to whip properly.
    • Then, once the eggs and sugar are ready, move the bowl to your mixer and begin to whip them at high speed using your whip attachment.
    • After about 5-8 minutes, the meringue will almost double in size and form into firm (but not stiff) peaks. FYI: The addition of the egg yolks will keep the meringue from becoming stiff like an all-white meringue.
    • Once the meringue has cooled (feel the bowl with your hand), begin to add in your butter in chunks while mixing on low.
    • Then, after you add in all of your butter, whip the buttercream a few more minutes until the texture changes to a whipped cream-like texture. Once you have the right consistency, add in your vanilla extract.
    • Stop whipping the buttercream when it does not have a strong butter flavor anymore, and it is light and creamy in texture.
    • While the paddle is mixing, add 2 oz of pistachio butter, and 1-2 drops of green food color to reach your desired color. Allow to mix on low to combine completely. Next, switch to your paddle attachment on your stand mixer and allow the meringue to paddle on low for 8-10 minutes. Ultimately, this will push out the air bubbles to get you the most desirable texture.
    • Finally, prepare a piping bag to use your buttercream, or wrap it up and refrigerate it until you are ready to use it (or store it in the freezer as you would with Swiss meringue buttercream).

    Assembling the Pistachio Cake

    • First, trim off the dome of your cake layers and the brown edges around the sides and bottom.
    • Place the first cake layer onto your cardboard cake round. Then, spread a thin layer of raspberry filling on top of the cake.
    • Next, spread on about ¼″ of your buttercream, and then add your next layer of cake.
    • Repeat this process with layer two, and then add your final layer of cake on top.
    • Cover the entire cake in a thin layer of buttercream. This is called the "crumb coat."
    • Then, place your cake into the fridge or freezer for 20 minutes to set the buttercream layer.
    • Apply your final coat of buttercream and smooth out any edges you don't like.
    • Next, with clean hands, scoop up a handful of chopped up pistachios and carefully press them into the buttercream around the bottom of your cake.
    • Sprinkle more chopped up pistachios on top of the cake in a circle around the edge.
    • Finally, as an optional step, pipe a few dollops of buttercream using a piping bag and then place a few fresh raspberries on top. The reason you want to include pistachios and raspberries into your cake decoration is because you want someone to look at the cake and know what's inside of it without having to cut into it!

    Video

    Notes

    Important Things To Note Before You Start
    1. Weigh your ingredients to avoid cake failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
    2. Make sure all your cold ingredients are room temperature or slightly warm (butter, milk, eggs, to create a cohesive batter. Curdled batter causes cakes to collapse.
    3. No buttermilk? You can make your own buttermilk 
    4. Need more help with making your first cake? Check out my how to decorate your first cake blog post. 
    5. Make your own pan release (cake goop!) The best pan release ever! 
    6. Chill your cakes before frosting and filling. You can cover a frosted and chilled cake in fondant if you wish. This cake is also great for stacking. I always keep my cakes chilled in the refrigerator before delivery for easy transporting. 

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cup | Calories: 1569kcal | Carbohydrates: 163g | Protein: 15g | Fat: 98g | Saturated Fat: 48g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 10g | Monounsaturated Fat: 34g | Trans Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 414mg | Sodium: 716mg | Potassium: 347mg | Fiber: 5g | Sugar: 121g | Vitamin A: 2530IU | Vitamin C: 18mg | Calcium: 152mg | Iron: 4mg
    Cake sculpted to look like a gravity-defying house in the Disney movie Encanto

    February 15, 2022 Course Preview

    Encanto House Cake Tutorial

    Skill level: Intermediate

    I got the chance to make an Encanto-themed birthday cake recently and wanted it to feature the house Casita from the movie. There's many ways to approach house cakes, but for this project, I wanted to make something gravity-defying that felt like an homage to the popular topsy-turvy cakes that were really big when I was first getting into cake decorating so many years ago.

    In this tutorial, you will learn how to build the cake structure to support this unique design, how to add all the details to the house, and you will learn how to create an edible stucco texture on the cake tiers to make them look authentic. We also go over how to make edible tree leaves, how to pipe foliage details, and how to insert real flowers into the cake in a food-safe way.

    Please note: the Encanto figurines are not part of this tutorial, they are 1.5" tall action figures that were purchased at a retail store separately.

    1:20:02 Minutes of Instruction

    What You Will Learn

    • How to make a gravity-defying Encanto house cake
    • Learn how to create a realistic stucco texture
    • How to create edible roofing tiles
    • Learn how to make edible tree leaves
    • Liz's tips and tricks to add details to this unique cake design

    Cake sculpted to look like the House from the movie Encanto

    Tutorial Chapters

    1. Overview Of The Structure 0:46
    2. Adding The Threaded Rod 9:09
    3. Coloring The Ganache 12:52
    4. Stacking The Lower Tier 13:19
    5. Texturing The Lower Tier 15:12
    6. Preparing The Second Tier 19:11
    7. Covering The Top Tier In Fondant 21:13
    8. Texturing The Second Tier Pt.2 24:45
    9. Making The Roof 26:13
    10. Texturing The Top Tier Pt.1 28:08
    11. Making The Roof Pt.2 29:47
    12. Texturing The Top Tier Pt.2 30:25
    13. Stacking The Middle Tier 30:49
    14. Making The Roof Pt.3 34:10
    15. Adding The Top Tier And Roof 34:32
    16. Coloring The Modeling Chocolate 39:23
    17. Making The Blue Door 43:06
    18. Preparing The Orange Tiles 46:16
    19. Dry Brushing The Cake 46:53
    20. Adding The Rock Texture 48:01
    21. Adding The Door Frame 50:02
    22. Adding The Blue Tiles 51:01
    23. Adding The Orange Tiles 52:23
    24. Making The Gold Door 54:48
    25. Making The Stairs 58:01
    26. Adding The Blue Details 59:24
    27. Preparing The Pink Window 59:41
    28. Adding The White Details 59:55
    29. Adding The Pink Window 1:00:55
    30. Adding The Orange Tiles & Details 1:01:13
    31. Adding The Turquoise Panel 1:04:10
    32. Preparing The Turquoise Square 1:05:29
    33. Adding The Blue Windows Pt.1 1:05:50
    34. Adding The Turquoise Square 1:06:23
    35. Coloring The Brown Modeling Chocolate 1:07:42
    36. Adding The Tree 1:08:41
    37. Painting The Gelatin Leaves 1:09:14
    38. Touching Up The House 1:10:18
    39. Adding The Brown Siding 1:11:07
    40. Adding The Candle 1:12:17
    41. Adding The Palm Tree 1:12:41
    42. Adding The Flowers 1:14:52
    43. Adding The Figurines 1:18:43

    Downloads

    Materials List

    Door Template

    Roof Template

    Encanto Reference

    Cake sculpted to look like a house from the Disney movie Encanto

    February 15, 2022 Paid Video

    Encanto House Cake

    Skill level: Intermediate

    I got the chance to make an Encanto-themed birthday cake recently and wanted it to feature the house Casita from the movie. There's many ways to approach house cakes, but for this project, I wanted to make something gravity-defying that felt like an homage to the popular topsy-turvy cakes that were really big when I was first getting into cake decorating so many years ago.

    In this tutorial, you will learn how to build the cake structure to support this unique design, how to add all the details to the house, and you will learn how to create an edible stucco texture on the cake tiers to make them look authentic. We also go over how to make edible tree leaves, how to pipe foliage details, and how to insert real flowers into the cake in a food-safe way.

    Please note: the Encanto figurines are not part of this tutorial, they are 1.5" tall action figures that were purchased at a retail store separately.

    1:20:02 Minutes of Instruction

    What You Will Learn

    • How to make a gravity-defying Encanto house cake
    • Learn how to create a realistic stucco texture
    • How to create edible roofing tiles
    • Learn how to make edible tree leaves
    • Liz's tips and tricks to add details to this unique cake design

    Tutorial Chapters

    1. Overview Of The Structure 0:46
    2. Adding The Threaded Rod 9:09
    3. Coloring The Ganache 12:52
    4. Stacking The Lower Tier 13:19
    5. Texturing The Lower Tier 15:12
    6. Preparing The Second Tier 19:11
    7. Covering The Top Tier In Fondant 21:13
    8. Texturing The Second Tier Pt.2 24:45
    9. Making The Roof 26:13
    10. Texturing The Top Tier Pt.1 28:08
    11. Making The Roof Pt.2 29:47
    12. Texturing The Top Tier Pt.2 30:25
    13. Stacking The Middle Tier 30:49
    14. Making The Roof Pt.3 34:10
    15. Adding The Top Tier And Roof 34:32
    16. Coloring The Modeling Chocolate 39:23
    17. Making The Blue Door 43:06
    18. Preparing The Orange Tiles 46:16
    19. Dry Brushing The Cake 46:53
    20. Adding The Rock Texture 48:01
    21. Adding The Door Frame 50:02
    22. Adding The Blue Tiles 51:01
    23. Adding The Orange Tiles 52:23
    24. Making The Gold Door 54:48
    25. Making The Stairs 58:01
    26. Adding The Blue Details 59:24
    27. Preparing The Pink Window 59:41
    28. Adding The White Details 59:55
    29. Adding The Pink Window 1:00:55
    30. Adding The Orange Tiles & Details 1:01:13
    31. Adding The Turquoise Panel 1:04:10
    32. Preparing The Turquoise Square 1:05:29
    33. Adding The Blue Windows Pt.1 1:05:50
    34. Adding The Turquoise Square 1:06:23
    35. Coloring The Brown Modeling Chocolate 1:07:42
    36. Adding The Tree 1:08:41
    37. Painting The Gelatin Leaves 1:09:14
    38. Touching Up The House 1:10:18
    39. Adding The Brown Siding 1:11:07
    40. Adding The Candle 1:12:17
    41. Adding The Palm Tree 1:12:41
    42. Adding The Flowers 1:14:52
    43. Adding The Figurines 1:18:43

    Downloads

    Materials List

    Door Template

    Roof Template

    Encanto Reference

    mini pavlova decorated with Chantilly cream and topped with fresh berries

    February 9, 2022 4th of July

    Mini Pavlova with Berry Chantilly Cream

    Mini pavlova is crisp on the outside and marshmallowy soft on the inside. Filled with delicious, fresh berry compote and Chantilly cream, they make the perfect dessert for special occasions! Mini pavlova is ideal for spring and summer family gatherings or even a small wedding because they are elegant and the flavor is the perfect combination of crunchy, sweet, and chewy!

    mini pavlova on a plate decorated with fresh strawberries, blueberries, and raspberries

    Fresh, bright, and sweet, every bite of this mini pavlova tastes like spring! This mini pavlova recipe is great for family gatherings like Mother's Day, baby showers, and bridal showers. Decorate your mini pavlova with Chantilly cream and fresh berries, and you will have elegant, bite-sized treats at your fingertips!

    This step-by-step recipe from Chef Christophe Rull can make up to 18 individual mini pavlovas, or if you prefer, one or two larger pavlovas that can be cut and served in portions.

    What's In This Blog Post

    • Mini Pavlova Ingredients
    • How to Make Mini Pavlova
    • Preparing the Mixed Berry Compote
    • Making the Vanilla Chantilly Cream
    • Assembling the Mini Pavlova
    • FAQ
    • Extra Tips for Making Pavlova
    • What is the Origin of Pavlova?
    • More Recipes You'll Love

    Mini Pavlova Ingredients

    bird's-eye view of pavlova ingredients on the table

    Egg whites: The key ingredient of this pavlova is room temperature egg whites. Be sure to give your eggs enough time to warm up before you begin the recipe. This will help ensure your meringue whips up nicely.

    Cream of tartar: You technically don't need cream of tartar. But, if you use cream of tartar, it will help stabilize the egg whites so they don't collapse and will help the egg whites stay extra white.

    Fresh berries: You can use frozen berries to prepare this mixed berry compote. However, fresh berries are preferred for this recipe because they will hold their shape better. If you have trouble keeping berries fresh for more than a couple of days, learn how to make them last longer using berry wash.

    Adapt the fruit compote to whichever variation of fruits you prefer! You could do all one fruit, or you could opt for other kinds of fruits to use in this recipe like peach filling or cherry filling. If you're feeling creative you could even make your own compote using fruits like nectarines, kiwi, pineapple, passionfruit, cherries, and more!

    How to Make Mini Pavlova

    1. Preheat your oven to 200°F (93°C). Before you begin making the pavlova, ensure that your mixing bowl is entirely clean and fully dry. Even a little bit of water, oil, or grease could throw off your entire recipe! Then, wipe down your clean mixing bowl and your attachments with vinegar!hand shown wiping down the stand mixer with a clothhands holding whisk attachments
    2. First, using your stand mixer, whip the room temperature egg whites and cream of tartar on medium speed to a soft peak in a clean and dry mixing bowl.hand shown pouring ingredient into stand mixerhand pouring a small amount of ingredients into stand mixerstand mixer mixing ingredients
    3. Then, while it is mixing, slowly add your granulated sugar. Continue to mix until you reach stiff peaks.hand pouring ingredients into large mixing bowlhand holding whisk attachment with cream on it upside down
    4. Next, sift the powdered sugar over the stiff peaks. Gently fold the powdered sugar into the egg whites. Be careful not to deflate the meringue too much.hand shown pouring mixture into bowlspatula being used to mix creambowl of cream with spatula inside
    5. Prepare a piping bag with plain tip #804. Fill the piping bag with meringue.hand holding a piping baghand shown filling a piping bag with cream
    6. Then, on the backside of the silicone sphere mold, pipe the meringue around the sphere. Make sure there are no spaces or gaps in the meringue.silicone sphere mold placed upside down with round half facing upmini pavlova piped onto the back of a sphere silicone moldmini pavlova piped onto the back of every other alternating sphere silicone mold
    7. Bake the meringue for 6-8 hours until it is firm and crunchy.
    8. Next, let the meringue cool completely.
    9. Then, after the meringue is completely cooled, gently peel the silicone mold away while being careful to not to break the shell.hand flipping over baked mini pavlova shell to show the hollow side
    10. Finally, when you are ready to assemble the pavlova, carefully scrape the point off of the bottom using a microplane so it will sit level on the plate.hand using a microplane to shave off bottom of pavlovahand holding mini pavlova shell

    Preparing the Mixed Berry Compote

    1. First, use a paring knife to split and scrape the vanilla bean. Put the split vanilla bean into a heavy bottom saucepan.hands shown scraping vanilla bean pod
    2. Now you will prepare your mixed berries. Dice the strawberries into quarters, cut the raspberries in half, and leave the blueberries whole. PRO TIP: Fresh berries will keep their shape better, but frozen berries will work as well.hand shown cutting a strawberrybowl of cut berries
    3. Add the prepared mixed berries into the heavy bottom saucepan along with the vanilla bean.
    4. Then, add in the sugar and the lemon juice and stir everything to combine.pouring fresh berries into a bowlmixing strawberries, raspberries, and blueberries in a large bowl using a spatula
    5. Next, in a separate mixing bowl, combine the cornstarch and water. Mix until it is smooth.hands shown mixing dry ingredients
    6. Add the cornstarch mix to the berries in the saucepot and mix to combine.hand shown pouring mixture into berry sauce
    7. Cook the berries over medium to low heat and continue to stir gently. Be careful not to scald the berries with high heat. The berries will begin to soften and release juices over medium to low heat.spatula holding up berry sauce mixture
    8. When the berry juice mixture begins to boil, remove the saucepan from the heat and transfer the berry compote to another bowl to cool down.pouring berry sauce mixture into a bowl
    9. Cover the berry compote with plastic wrap. Do this by pressing the plastic wrap right up against the surface of the berries. This step will prevent a layer of skin from forming over the berries mixture.placing plastic wrap on top of berry sauce in bowl
    10. Then, once the berries are covered in plastic wrap, place the bowl in the refrigerator until it is completely cool.
    11. Finally, when you are ready to assemble the pavlova, you can remove the vanilla bean pod from the berry compote.

    Making the Vanilla Chantilly Cream

    1. Start with a clean mixing bowl. Use your stand mixer to whip cream, the seeds of 1 vanilla pod, and powdered sugar on medium speed until it reaches a stiff peak (but is still smooth in texture).
    2. Then, fill a large pastry bag fitted with your desired tip, and set it aside to pipe the cream on the pavlovas.

    Assembling the Mini Pavlova

    1. First, place the mini pavlova hollow side up while making sure it stands balanced. If it won't stay up on its own or is unbalanced, use a microplane to even it out by gently scraping the bottom to a flat surface.
    2. Then, scoop about 1 tablespoon of berry compote into the pavlova.spoon pouring berry compote into mini pavlova shell
    3. Next, pipe a dollop of Chantilly cream on top of the berry compote making sure to fully cover the filling so that it does not leak out.hand piping cream into mini pavlova shellhand piping cream into mini pavlova shell
    4. Finally, garnish the mini pavlova with fresh fruit, mint, or any other topping of your choice. Chef Christophe used dehydrated berries to grate directly on top of the finished pavlova.hand sprinkling over a mini pavlova on a platemini pavlova decorated with Chantilly cream and topped with fresh berries

    FAQ

    What is a pavlova?

    Pavlova is a meringue-based dessert that is topped with whipped cream and fresh fruit.

    What is the difference between a meringue and a pavlova?

    The biggest difference between meringue and pavlova is that a pavlova recipe has cornstarch. Cornstarch is a softening agent that keeps the center softer than the crisp, outer shell.

    Both desserts are made from egg whites and equally delicious, but they taste quite different! Meringue is dry and crispy throughout. Pavlova is white, crisp, and glossy on the outside, and slightly chewy on the inside.

    Can I make this dairy-free?

    Yes! Switch out the heavy whipping cream for coconut milk to make it dairy-free. PRO TIP: Take your can of coconut milk and leave it in the refrigerator overnight. Meanwhile, this will allow the liquid and the fat to separate. Then, when you're ready to make your Chantilly cream, strain the liquid out and then use the remaining coconut fat to whip it into a dairy-free whipped cream!

    What other kinds of fruit can I use?

    Besides strawberries, blueberries, and raspberries, you can use any fruit variation you like to make your compote! A few ideas include nectarines, kiwi, pineapple, passionfruit, peach filling, or cherry filling!

    What if I want to make a bigger pavlova?

    Pipe larger discs of meringue on a piece of parchment paper, or on the back of a larger sphere mold using a larger piping tip (this method will create a hollow inside to fill inside).

    Can I make pavlova ahead of time?

    Yes, you can make pavlova a day in advance and store them in an airtight container. Then, fill them with berry compote and top them with Chantilly cream when you are ready to serve them.

    How do I know when my pavlova is done?

    Cooked pavlova is pale white with slight browning on the peaks.

    Why is my pavlova chewy?

    Pavlova tastes chewy when it was not properly cooled and dried out. You can avoid an unpleasant, chewy texture by allowing the pavlova to cool in the oven for as long as possible. In order to get that desirable, extra crispy outer layer, you need to allow the pavlova to properly set while it cools and dries.

    Can I leave my pavlova in the oven overnight?

    Yes! The best way to ensure your pavlova is entirely cooled is by leaving it untouched in the oven overnight (or at least several hours later).

    Why is my pavlova brown?

    Your pavlova may turn brown if your oven is too hot or has hot spots. You can fix this by cooking them at a slightly lower temperature for a little bit longer.

    Why is my pavlova flat?

    Not enough air was incorporated into the egg white mixture. While making pavlova, once you add sugar to the egg whites, the mixture will appear flat or deflated. The good news is that this is totally normal! And nothing is "wrong" with your pavlova as this is to be expected.

    Extra Tips for Making Pavlova

    • First, before you begin making pavlova, ensure that your mixing bowl is entirely clean and fully dry. Even a little bit of water, oil, or grease could throw off your entire recipe! For example, just a streak of grease in your bowl could prevent you from whisking your egg whites into frothy peaks.
    • Wipe down your clean mixing bowl and your attachments with vinegar! Why? Because you want to make sure there isn't any butter residue on any of your attachments. In the long run, this will help ensure your meringue will whip up beautifully.
    • Definitely be sure to fully wash and thoroughly hand dry your bowl before you begin.
    • Avoid baking pavlova if the weather is especially humid. We want to create an ideal environment for our pavlova to dry thoroughly. If you have a portable space heater, you can place that in your kitchen to remove excess humidity from the air and help the pavlova dry out.
    • While a KitchenAid Stand Mixer is a great investment if you are baking regularly, you do not need one for this recipe. However, you do need a handheld electric beater if you don't have a stand mixer.

    What is the Origin of Pavlova?

    Pavlova gets its name from a Russian ballerina named Anna Pavlova who was a superstar in the early 20th century.

    Anna Pavlova was a ballerina who was internationally known for her beauty and grace on the stage. Some people enjoyed her work so much so they decided to name a dessert after her!

    Originating in Australia, the Davis Gelatine Corporation developed an early version of the pavlova that looks and tastes nothing like the pavlova we know and love! In fact, their version of pavlova was a dessert with multiple layers of gelatine and one layer of milk.

    The more accurate and modern version of pavlova that you and I know was re-introduced in the 1950s in New Zealand and became a well-loved, holiday dessert around the 1980s. Fun fact: the pavlova recipe steadily became more popular as the cost of eggs went down!

    berry compote spilling out of mini pavlova

    More Recipes You'll Love

    Stabilized whipped cream

    How to make fresh berries last longer

    Berry Chantilly cake

    Recipe

    mini pavlova on a plate decorated with fresh strawberries, blueberries, and raspberries
    Print Recipe
    5 from 2 votes

    Mini Pavlova with Berry Chantilly Cream

    A meringue-based dessert that is filled with a fresh berry compote, and topped with a dollop of fresh whipped cream that has been sweetened to perfection!
    Prep Time20 minutes mins
    Cook Time2 hours hrs
    Total Time2 hours hrs 20 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: Australian
    Servings: 18 Servings
    Calories: 205kcal
    Author: Liz Marek

    Equipment

    • piping bag and plain tip #804
    • Silicone sphere molds 2"
    • microplane

    Ingredients

    Pavlova

    • 100 grams egg whites room temperature
    • 100 grams granulated sugar
    • 100 grams powdered sugar
    • 1 Pinch cream of tartar

    Mixed Berry Compote

    • 80 grams sugar
    • 30 grams lemon juice
    • 1 vanilla bean (scraped)
    • 240 grams fresh strawberries (leaves removed)
    • 36 grams fresh blueberries
    • 40 grams fresh raspberries
    • 15 grams water
    • 10 grams cornstarch

    Vanilla Chantilly

    • 300 grams heavy whipping cream
    • 30 grams powdered sugar
    • 1 vanilla bean (seeds scraped)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Making the Pavlova

    • Preheat your oven to 200°F (93°C). Before you begin making pavlova, ensure that your mixing bowl is entirely clean and fully dry. Even a little bit of water, oil, or grease could throw off your entire recipe! Then, wipe down your clean mixing bowl and your attachments with vinegar!
    • First, using your stand mixer, whip the room temperature egg whites and cream of tartar on medium speed to a soft peak in a clean and dry mixing bowl.
    • Then, while it is mixing, slowly add your granulated sugar. Continue to mix until you reach stiff peaks.
    • Next, sift the powdered sugar over the stiff peaks. Gently fold the powdered sugar into the egg whites. Be careful not to deflate the meringue too much.
    • Prepare a piping bag with plain tip #804. Fill the piping bag with meringue.
    • Then, on the backside of the silicone sphere mold, pipe the meringue around the sphere. Make sure there are no spaces or gaps in the meringue.
    • Bake the meringue for 6-8 hours until it is firm and crunchy.
    • Next, let the meringue cool completely.
    • Then, after the meringue is completely cooled, gently peel the silicone mold away while being careful to not to break the shell.
    • Finally, when you are ready to assemble the pavlova, carefully scrape the point off of the bottom using a microplane so it will sit level on the plate.

    Preparing the Mixed Berry Compote

    • First, use a paring knife to split and scrape the vanilla bean. Put the split vanilla bean into a heavy bottom saucepan.
    • Now you will prepare your mixed berries. Dice the strawberries into quarters, cut the raspberries in half, and leave the blueberries whole. PRO TIP: Fresh berries will keep their shape better, but frozen berries will work as well.
    • Add the prepared mixed berries into the heavy bottom saucepan along with the vanilla bean.
    • Then, add in the sugar and the lemon juice and stir everything to combine.
    • Next, in a separate mixing bowl, combine the corn starch and water. Mix until it is smooth.
    • Add the cornstarch mix to the berries in the saucepot and mix to combine.
    • Cook the berries over medium to low heat and continue to stir gently. Be careful not to scald the berries with high heat. The berries will begin to soften and release juices over medium to low heat.
    • When the berry juice mixture begins to boil, remove the saucepan from the heat and transfer the berry compote to another bowl to cool down.
    • Cover the berry compote with plastic wrap. Do this by pressing the plastic wrap right up against the surface of the berries. This step will prevent a layer of skin from forming over the berries mixture.
    • Then, once the berries are covered in plastic wrap, place the bowl in the refrigerator until it is completely cool.
    • Finally, when you are ready to assemble the pavlova, you can remove the vanilla bean pod from the berry compote.

    Making the Vanilla Chantilly Cream

    • Start with a clean mixing bowl. Use your stand mixer to whip cream, the seeds of 1 vanilla pod, and powdered sugar on medium speed until it reaches a stiff peak (but is still smooth in texture).
    • Then, fill a large pastry bag fitted with your desired tip, and set it aside to pipe the cream on the pavlovas.

    Assembling the Pavlova

    • First, place the mini pavlova hollow side up while making sure it stands balanced. If it won't stay up on its own or is unbalanced, use a microplane to even it out by gently scraping the bottom to a flat surface.
    • Then, scoop about 1 tablespoon of berry compote into the pavlova.
    • Next, pipe a dollop of Chantilly cream on top of the berry compote making sure to fully cover the filling so that it does not leak out.
    • Finally, garnish the mini pavlova with fresh fruit, mint, or any other topping of your choice. Chef Christophe used dehydrated berries to grate directly on top of the finished pavlova.

    Video

    Notes

    Important Things To Note Before You Start
    1. Bring your egg whites to room temperature (or even a little warm) before beginning to make your pavlova. 
    2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
    3. Avoid baking pavlova if the weather is especially humid. We want to create an ideal environment for our pavlova to dry thoroughly. If you have a portable space heater, you can place that in your kitchen to remove excess humidity from the air and help the pavlova dry out.
    4. First, before you begin making pavlova, ensure that your mixing bowl is entirely clean and fully dry. Even a little bit of water, oil, or grease could throw off your entire recipe! For example, just a streak of grease in your bowl could prevent you from whisking your egg whites into frothy peaks.
    5. Unsure if your pavlova is done? Carefully pick up one of the pavlovas to make sure that it comes off of the parchment paper clean. If you can pick it up and there isn't any residue, it is done.

    Nutrition

    Calories: 205kcal | Carbohydrates: 30g | Protein: 2g | Fat: 9g | Saturated Fat: 6g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 3g | Cholesterol: 34mg | Sodium: 24mg | Potassium: 87mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 27g | Vitamin A: 373IU | Vitamin C: 14mg | Calcium: 22mg | Iron: 1mg
    close up of three pistachio macarons

    February 7, 2022 Cookies

    Pistachio Macaron with White Chocolate Buttercream

    This pistachio macaron recipe is based on my viral, no-fail French macaron recipe. The nuttiness of these crispy and chewy pistachio macarons pairs perfectly with the creamy, white chocolate buttercream filling! If you love pistachios, you need to save this recipe!

    close up of three pistachio macarons

    If you ask a baker which cookie has given them the biggest headache, chances are they will enthusiastically say "macarons!" They're notoriously difficult to make. Why? Because a lot could go wrong while making them. But, you won't need to reach for any aspirin today because this recipe is headache-free!

    This is a foolproof, step-by-step pistachio macaron recipe that anyone can make! Keep reading to learn step-by-step how to make your very own nutty, crispy, chewy pistachio macarons.

    Read through this blog post entirely and be sure to check out the FAQ section which will offer you additional tips, tricks, and ways to avoid common macaron mishaps!

    What's In This Blog Post

    • Pistachio Macaron Ingredients
    • How to Make Pistachio Macarons
      • Before you get started, download and print my macaron template! This is an optional step.
    • Preparing the White Chocolate Ganache
    • Making the Easy Buttercream Frosting
    • FAQs
    • Tips for the Perfect Macarons
    • More Recipes You'll Love

    Pistachio Macaron Ingredients

    pistachio macaron ingredients

    Before you get started, download and print my macaron template!

    Almond Flour: Almond flour provides flavor, texture, and structure to the macarons. You can use storebought almond flour (I typically use Bob's Red Mill super fine almond flour), or if you prefer you can make your own.

    Pistachio Flour: If you have a food processor, you can make your own pistachio flour for this recipe by grinding up pistachios to an ultra-fine texture (you will need 28 grams of pistachios). Or, you can buy pistachio flour online.

    Want to take your white chocolate ganache to the next level and try a more advanced recipe to really elevate your pistachio macarons? Be sure to check out Chef Christophe Rull's white chocolate vanilla bean ganache that we used to make bonbons!

    How to Make Pistachio Macarons

    Before you get started, download and print my macaron template! This is an optional step.

    1. First, you'll want to prepare your pistachio flour. Use a food processor to grind your pistachios up to an ultra-fine, flour-like texture. Or, if you prefer, you can buy your own pistachio flour.
    2. Next, sift your pistachio flour, almond flour, salt, and powdered sugar into a large mixing bowl. Sift these ingredients 2 times. Other than sifting out large pieces, the reason you need to sift it twice is to allow the powdered sugar to properly mix with the flours while also aerating the flour (which will make it easier to mix with the egg whites). sifting pistachio macaron ingredientslarge pieces of pistachio in a sifter
    3. Then, in the bowl of your stand mixer, add in the egg whites and mix them on medium speed using the whisk attachment until they appear foamy.adding egg whites to the bowl of your stand mixer
    4. Once the egg whites appear foamy, start to slowly sprinkle in the granulated sugar. Mix them until the egg whites turn white and you can see some lines forming in the surface from the whisk. Now, add in the cream of tartar and whip them until soft, glossy peaks form.
    5. Then, add in the vanilla extract and continue to mix until you have firm, glossy peaks. Usually, this process can take anywhere from 10 to 15 minutes. To test if your meringue is ready, turn off the mixer and remove the whisk attachment. Hold the whisk attachment to see if the meringue is firm enough to hold its shape without appearing curdled, dry, or breaking apart.close up of meringue at stiff peaks
    6. Next, add in a very small amount of green food coloring (optional). I prefer to use Americolor food color gel. Use a toothpick to grab 2 drops of green food coloring and then wipe it onto a spatula. Then, use the spatula to gently fold it into your meringue.
    7. Next, transfer ⅓ of your flour mixture into the meringue and fold it in.
    8. Once the flour is folded in and combined with the meringue, add in half of the remaining flour mixture and gently fold it in using a circular motion (like a tumble dryer).
    9. Then, add in the rest of the flour mixture and continue to gently fold it in using a circular motion. When you do this, you want to gently move your spatula around the bowl without incorporating too much air into the mixture. While you're folding, occasionally, drag your spatula through the middle and then go back to using a circular motion. Stop folding the mixture once it no longer appears goopy and the batter begins to look stretchy. If you can draw a figure 8 using the batter that's falling off of your spatula, then your batter is ready.
    10. Preheat the oven to 300ºF (149ºC).
    11. Prepare a piping bag with a medium round tip, and fill it with the batter.
    12. Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. PRO TIP: Use a few dollops of batter to 'glue' down the parchment paper to your baking sheet to keep it from moving around.
    13. Then, if you're using my macaron template, place that layer on top of your parchment paper. Finally, add another layer of parchment paper on top of the template.
    14. Pipe your batter onto the parchment paper.
    15. Next, gently tap the baking sheet onto the countertop a few times to make sure there are no bubbles on the surface. Then, go in with a toothpick to break up any leftover bubbles. If you skip this step, your macarons may explode in the oven!
    16. (Optional) Sprinkle a pinch of ground-up pistachio pieces on top to garnish the macarons.
    17. Then, set the macarons aside at room temperature to dry. Ultimately, this can take anywhere from 15 minutes to a few hours depending on how humid it is where you are. Macarons are dry and ready to be baked in the oven once you can touch them and a crust or skin has appeared on the macaron.
    18. Bake in the oven at 300ºF (149ºC) for 10 to 15 minutes. Macarons are done once you see browning around the edges. If they are not quite baked, then bake them for an additional 1 minute because cooked cookies should pull away from the parchment paper easily without sticking. If they do stick, then they were not baked enough. PRO TIP: If you bake your macarons on a silicone mat, it may take a few extra minutes for them to bake properly.

    Preparing the White Chocolate Ganache

    1. First, warm the chocolate in a microwave-safe bowl in the microwave for 1 minute. Be careful not to burn the chocolate since we only want to soften it.
    2. Next, using a saucepan, pour the heavy whipping cream into the pan and bring it to a simmer.
    3. Once the heavy whipping cream is simmering, carefully pour it over the chocolate in the microwave-safe bowl. Make sure the chocolate is fully covered.
    4. Then, let the heavy whipping cream and the chocolate set for 5 minutes.
    5. Whisk gently to combine the cream and the chocolate. Be careful not to incorporate any air into the bowl.
    6. Finally, pour it into a shallow pan or a dish to let it stiffen up. Then, stir it until it's creamy using it to fill your macarons. If your ganache is too firm, you can microwave it for 10 seconds to soften it, and then stir it until the ganache is the desired consistency. 

    Making the Easy Buttercream Frosting

    1. First, place the egg whites and powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Using the whisk attachment, combine the ingredients on low speed first, and then whip the ingredients on high for 1 minute to dissolve the powdered sugar 
    2. Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract and mix.
    3. Next, add in your butter in small chunks and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine everything. It will look curdled at first. This is normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping. 
    4. If your buttercream looks curdled, remove about ⅓ cup of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.
    5. Next, add a very small drop of purple food coloring (optional). I would recommend using a toothpick to transfer it to the bowl. Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until it is very white, light, and shiny. 
    6. Finally, taste the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!

    White Chocolate Buttercream Filling

    1. Mix your white chocolate ganache with your buttercream frosting, and you are ready to fill a piping bag with your filling and assemble your macarons!hand using a spatula to add ganache to frostinghand using a spatula to gently fold fillinghand piping filling onto a macaronhands assembling a pistachio macaronhand holding a pistachio macaronpistachio macarons stacked and laying down

    FAQs

    Do I have to make white chocolate ganache and buttercream frosting?

    Not at all! You can customize this macaron recipe if you do not want to make both. You can adjust it to include only the white chocolate ganache filling or even just the easy buttercream frosting by itself.

    What is the difference between a macaron and a macaroon?

    A macaron (mack-a-rohn) is a French cookie made with almond flour, sugar, and egg whites. It has a delicate, crispy shell and a soft and chewy center. They're not very sweet and are often brightly colored with a variety of flavors.

    A macaroon (mack-a-roon) is a cookie made from shredded coconut, egg whites, and powdered sugar. It is usually scooped or piped into small balls and baked until the edges are golden brown. The texture is chewy and the flavor is very sweet. 

    Why are my macarons flat?

    Macarons will fall flat and will be hollow in the center due to overmixing the batter.

    Why do my macarons blotchy?

    Oily blotches on the surface of your macaron are from overmixing and causing the oil from the almond flour to release into the batter. Try folding the batter more gently.

    Why are my macarons lumpy?

    Undermixing your batter or not using super fine almond flour will make lumpy or rough-textured macarons.

    Why are my macarons cracking?

    Cracked macarons are from not letting them sit at room temp for long enough so they haven't had time to develop a shell or they were not mixed enough.

    Why are my macarons hollow?

    Hollow macaron shells can result from not popping the bubbles in the surface of the macarons before baking, or from the meringue being under-whipped.

    Can I freeze macarons?

    Absolutely! You can fill the macarons and freeze them for later. Obviously, this is especially helpful if you are making macarons for a party or an event.

    Tips for the Perfect Macarons

    PRO TIP: Prepare your egg whites a day in advance before mixing in order to make a stronger meringue! To do that, place the egg whites in an uncovered bowl in the refrigerator overnight (or even a couple of days if you plan ahead). If you do this, then it allows the water to evaporative out of them and ultimately whip into an ultimately stronger meringue to make macarons!

    Additional tips and tricks:

    • Sift your ingredients before mixing
    • Weigh all your ingredients in grams for the best and most accurate results
    • Wipe the inside of your bowl and attachments well to make sure they are grease-free
    • Don't over-whip your egg whites. Ensure they are at the firm peak stage but still glossy and moist
    • If your room is very humid, put a space heater next to the macarons to help dry them out

    More Recipes You'll Love

    French macaron

    Strawberry macaron

    Chocolate macaron

    White chocolate ganache

    Recipe

    close up of three pistachio macarons
    Print Recipe
    4.92 from 12 votes

    Pistachio Macaron Recipe

    No-fail, crispy and chewy pistachio macaron recipe filled with creamy, white chocolate buttercream.
    Prep Time30 minutes mins
    Cook Time15 minutes mins
    Total Time45 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: French
    Servings: 18 filled cookies
    Calories: 500kcal
    Author: Liz Marek

    Equipment

    • Food Scale
    • Stand Mixer
    • Sifter
    • Parchment Paper
    • Piping Bag
    • 802 Round Piping Tip
    • Food processor

    Ingredients

    Pistachio Macarons

    • 1 ounce almond flour
    • 1 ounce pistachio flour
    • 4 ounces powdered sugar
    • 1 pinch salt
    • 2 ounces egg whites aged overnight in the fridge and brought to room temperature
    • ¼ teaspoon cream of tartar
    • 1 ounce granulated sugar
    • ½ teaspoon vanilla extract
    • 2 drops green gel food coloring

    White Chocolate Ganache

    • 24 ounces White chocolate
    • 8 ounces heavy whipping cream

    Easy Buttercream Frosting

    • 12 ounces unsalted butter (room temperature) You can use salted butter but it will affect the taste and you need to leave out additional salt
    • 12 ounces powdered sugar sifted if not from a bag
    • 1 teaspoon vanilla extract
    • ¼ teaspoon salt
    • 3 ounces pasteurized egg whites room temperature
    • 1 tiny drop purple food coloring (optional) for whiter frosting
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Pistachio Macarons

    • Download my macaron template to print before you get started! This is an optional step.
    • First, you'll want to prepare your pistachio flour. Use a food processor to grind your pistachios up to an ultra-fine, flour-like texture. Or, if you prefer, you can buy your own pistachio flour.
    • Next, sift your pistachio flour, almond flour, salt, and powdered sugar into a large mixing bowl. Sift these ingredients 2 times. Other than sifting out large pieces, the reason you need to sift it twice is to allow the powdered sugar to properly mix with the flours while also aerating the flour (which will make it easier to mix with the egg whites).
    • Then, in the bowl of your stand mixer, add in the egg whites and mix them on medium speed using the whisk attachment until they appear foamy.
    • Once the egg whites appear foamy, start to slowly sprinkle in the granulated sugar. Mix them until the egg whites turn white and you can see some lines forming in the surface from the whisk. Now, add in the cream of tartar and whip them until soft, glossy peaks form.
    • Then, add in the vanilla extract and continue to mix until you have firm, glossy peaks. Usually, this process can take anywhere from 10 to 15 minutes. To test if your meringue is ready, turn off the mixer and remove the whisk attachment. Hold the whisk attachment to see if the meringue is firm enough to hold its shape without appearing curdled, dry, or breaking apart.
    • Next, add in a very small amount of green food coloring (optional). I prefer to use Americolor food color gel. Use a toothpick to grab 2 drops of green food coloring and then wipe it onto a spatula. Then, use the spatula to gently fold it into your meringue.
    • Next, transfer ⅓ of your flour mixture into the meringue and fold it in.
    • Once the flour is folded in and combined with the meringue, add in half of the remaining flour mixture and gently fold it in using a circular motion (like a tumble dryer).
    • Then, add in the rest of the flour mixture and continue to gently fold it in using a circular motion. When you do this, you want to gently move your spatula around the bowl without incorporating too much air into the mixture. While you're folding, occasionally, drag your spatula through the middle and then go back to using a circular motion. Stop folding the mixture once it no longer appears goopy and the batter begins to look stretchy. If you can draw a figure 8 using the batter that's falling off of your spatula, then your batter is ready.
    • Preheat the oven to 300ºF (149ºC).
    • Prepare a piping bag with a medium round tip, and fill it with the batter.
    • Line a baking sheet with parchment paper. PRO TIP: Use a few dollops of batter to 'glue' down the parchment paper to your baking sheet to keep it from moving around.
    • Then, if you're using my macaron template, place that layer on top of your parchment paper. Finally, add another layer of parchment paper on top of the template.
    • Pipe your batter onto the parchment paper.
    • Next, gently tap the baking sheet onto the countertop a few times to make sure there are no bubbles on the surface. Then, go in with a toothpick to break up any leftover bubbles. If you skip this step, your macarons may explode in the oven!
    • (Optional) Sprinkle a pinch of ground-up pistachio pieces on top to garnish the macarons.
    • Then, set the macarons aside at room temperature to dry. Ultimately, this can take anywhere from 15 minutes to a few hours depending on how humid it is where you are. Macarons are dry and ready to be baked in the oven once you can touch them and a crust or skin has appeared on the macaron.
    • Bake in the oven at 300ºF (149ºC) for 10 to 15 minutes. Your macarons will be done once you see browning around the edges. If they are not quite baked, then bake them for an additional 1 minute. Ultimately, cooked cookies should pull away from the parchment paper easily without sticking. If they do stick, they were not baked enough. PRO TIP: If you bake your macarons on a silicone mat, then it may take a few extra minutes for them to bake properly.

    White Chocolate Ganache

    • First, warm the chocolate in a microwave-safe bowl in the microwave for 1 minute. Be careful not to burn the chocolate since we only want to soften it.
    • Next, using a saucepan, pour the heavy whipping cream into the pan and bring it to a simmer.
    • Once the heavy whipping cream is simmering, carefully pour it over the chocolate in the microwave-safe bowl. Make sure the chocolate is fully covered.
    • Then, let the heavy whipping cream and the chocolate set for 5 minutes.
    • Whisk gently to combine the cream and the chocolate. Be careful not to incorporate any air into the bowl.
    • Finally, pour it into a shallow pan or a dish to let it stiffen up. Then, stir it until it's creamy using it to fill your macarons. If your ganache is too firm, you can microwave it for 10 seconds to soften it, and then stir it until the ganache is the desired consistency. 

    Easy Buttercream Frosting

    • First, place the egg whites and powdered sugar in a stand mixer bowl. Using the whisk attachment, combine the ingredients on low speed first, and then whip the ingredients on high for 1 minute to dissolve the powdered sugar 
    • Then, add in the salt and the vanilla extract and mix.
    • Next, add in your butter in small chunks and whip it with the whisk attachment to combine everything. It will look curdled at first. This is normal. It will also look pretty yellow. Keep whipping. 
    • If your buttercream looks curdled, remove about ⅓ cup of buttercream and melt it in the microwave for 10-15 seconds until it is just barely melted. Then, pour it back into the whipping buttercream to bring it all together.
    • (Optional) Add a very small drop of purple food coloring. I would recommend using a toothpick to transfer it to the bowl. Then, whip it on high with the whisk attachment for 8-10 minutes until it is very white, light, and shiny. 
    • Finally, taste the buttercream. If it tastes like sweet ice cream, then it's ready!

    White Chocolate Buttercream Filling

    • Mix your white chocolate ganache with your buttercream frosting, and you are ready to fill a piping bag with your filling and assemble your macarons!

    Video

    Notes

    Important Things To Note Before You Start
    1. Use a scale to weigh your ingredients (including liquids) unless otherwise instructed (Tablespoons, teaspoons, pinch, etc). Metric measurements are available in the recipe card. Scaled ingredients are much more accurate than using cups and help ensure the success of your recipe. 
    2. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
    3. PRO TIP: Prepare your egg whites a day in advance before mixing in order to make a stronger meringue! To do that, place the egg whites in an uncovered bowl in the refrigerator overnight (or even a couple of days if you plan ahead). If you do this, then it allows the water to evaporative out of them and ultimately whip into an ultimately stronger meringue to make macarons!
    4. If you're already comfortable making white chocolate ganache and want to try a more advanced version than the one in this recipe, you should use Chef Christophe Rull's white chocolate vanilla bean ganache recipe that we used to make bonbons! Just swap out the white chocolate ganache in this recipe for the vanilla bean version and you will love the added vanilla flavor! 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 500kcal | Carbohydrates: 50g | Protein: 4g | Fat: 33g | Saturated Fat: 20g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 9g | Trans Fat: 1g | Cholesterol: 63mg | Sodium: 89mg | Potassium: 138mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 49g | Vitamin A: 710IU | Vitamin C: 1mg | Calcium: 92mg | Iron: 1mg

    close up of heart shaped cut out sugar cookies

    February 4, 2022 Blog

    The Best Cut Out Sugar Cookie Recipe

    This is the BEST cut out sugar cookie recipe! These cookies always hold their shape perfectly, bake up nice and soft, and have a delicious buttery and crisp edge. Perfect for decoring with my smooth royal icing. close up of heart shaped cut out sugar cookies

    You can adapt this sugar cookie recipe to any holiday by switching out the vanilla and spices for other flavors like orange, almond, lemon, strawberry, etc. The options are endless! I've switched out ¼ of flour for cocoa powder to make them into chocolate sugar cookies!

    This dough can easily be colored with regular food coloring to make fun Christmas cookies. Make a double batch and freeze your cookies to be decorated later!

    What's In This Blog Post

    • Cut Out Sugar Cookie Ingredients
    • How to Make Cut Out Sugar Cookies Step-by-Step
    • FAQ
    • More Cookie Recipes You'll Love

    Cut Out Sugar Cookie Ingredients

    How to Make Cut Out Sugar Cookies Step-by-Step

    Remember to bring your butter and eggs to room temperature so your dough does not split. Your butter should be soft enough that you can press your finger into it but not melted. I place my eggs in a bowl of hot water for 5 minutes to bring them to room temp.

    1. In the bowl of your stand mixer, place your butter, salt, and granulated sugar. adding butter to a mixing bowl
    2. Cream the butter and sugar on low using the paddle attachment. Creamed butter should be fluffy and pale yellow in color. close up of creamed butter and sugar
    3. Next, add the room temperature egg and mix it on medium speed (speed 2 on a Bosch, speed 4 on KitchenAid mixer) until it is fully incorporated. Scrape the bowl when necessary to make sure the egg incorporates.pouring an egg into sugar cookie ingredients
    4. Then, add in the vanilla extract and mix it until it's just incorporated.
    5. In a separate bowl, whisk your dry ingredients (AP flour, baking powder, salt, cinnamon, and nutmeg) together. dry ingredients in a glass bowl
    6. Add in ⅓ of your dry ingredients to the egg mixture and mix on low until incorporated. Scrape the bowl as needed to fully incorporate the ingredients. Continue adding the flour mixture in thirds until all the dry ingredients are incorporated.adding flour into the bowl of a stand mixer
    7. Then, once the flour is fully incorporated you will add the milk. Continue to mix it on low until the dough becomes a solid mass. close up of sugar cookie dough
    8. Scrape out the mixer bowl and then wrap up your sugar cookie dough in plastic wrap. sugar cookie dough on plastic wrap
    9. Chill the cookie dough in the refrigerator for 2 hours. This gives the time for the flour to absorb the moisture which prevents your cookies from spreading. Chilling is the secret! You can even make this dough a day in advance if you want. wrapped sugar cookie dough
    10. Remove the dough from the fridge and give it a quick knead to soften it.
    11. Roll the dough out to about ¼" thick using a rolling pin and a dusting of flour.
    12. Use your desired cookie cutter to cut out uniform shapes. close up of hand picking up a heart cut out sugar cookie
    13. Place the cookies on a baking sheet that's lined with parchment paper.
    14. Next, put the cookie sheet back in the refrigerator for about 15 minutes to allow the dough to chill again. Chilled cookie dough will keep their shape in the oven and not expand or warp.
    15. Bake the chilled cookies at (350ºF 177ºC) for 10-14 minutes depending on the size of the cookie. Cookies will be done once they are slightly golden brown on the edge. close up of cut out sugar cookies
    stacked heart shaped sugar cookies

    Ready to decorate your sugar cookies? Check out my blog post on how to make the perfect royal icing for decorating cookies.

    photo of sugar cookies with royal icing

    FAQ

    Can I substitute ingredients?

    You can, but it's the results will be different. Here's some advice:

    When you make substitutions in your cookie recipe, you always have to remember that not all ingredients contain the same amount of moisture.

    First, you have to consider if what you're replacing has the same properties. Because brown sugar has more moisture in it than white sugar, if you take out the brown and replace it with white, you might end up with a crunchier cookie.

    How do I make my sugar cookies light and puffy?

    If you're going for a light, puffy cookie you can try to use shortening or even margarine but cut back on the amount of fat you use. Add an extra egg and cut back on the sugar.

    Another tip for a more puffy cookie is to use cake flour or pastry flour and use baking powder instead of baking soda.

    Also, you'll want to refrigerate your dough before baking your cookies.

    What is the function of baking powder in cookies?

    Baking powder is a two-in-one chemical leavening that combines a powdered alkali with a powdered acid. Since baking powder combines both of these, it eliminates the need for extra ingredients in your dough such as buttermilk, sour cream, or an acidic addition since no activation is needed when using baking powder. When it is added to a dough or batter, a chemical reaction takes place that produces carbon dioxide gas, inflating cookies.

    If you forget the baking powder you'll probably end up with some very flat, hard cookies.

    Why do my sugar cookies spread out so much?

    Make sure your chill your dough for two hours before cutting out your sugar cookies and then chill your cut out cookies on the sheet pan before baking. This keeps the butter nice and cold and helps the cookies to keep their shape.

    How long do sugar cookies last?

    Sugar cookies are great to store if you keep them in a cool, dry cupboard or pantry. Make sure these locations are away from sinks, stoves, and ovens though. They will keep for about three weeks. You can freeze them for up to three months. Just make sure you have a seal that is secure, you can even vacuum pack a few cookies per bag. No one likes the taste of freezer burn on his or her cookies.

    How do you keep homemade cookies soft?

    Here is a little home tip for you that I do. I take a piece of bread (white is best because it doesn't transfer its taste to your cookies) and then place it in a container. Use one piece of bread per dozen cookies. The cookies will absorb moisture from the bread, therefore, keep them from drying out. This will keep your cookies soft much longer.

    More Cookie Recipes You'll Love

    Marbled Valentines Day Sugar Cookies

    Soft and Chewy Snickerdoodle Cookies

    Easy M&M Cookies

    Copycat Lofthouse Cookies

    Sea Salt Chocolate Chip Cookies

    Recipe

    close up of heart shaped cut out sugar cookies
    Print Recipe
    4.77 from 94 votes

    The Best Cut Out Sugar Cookie Recipe

    The best no spread, no fail cut out sugar cookie recipe! These cookies are soft and buttery and always hold their shape! Switch out the flavors to make this recipe work for any occasion or holiday.
    Prep Time15 minutes mins
    Cook Time15 minutes mins
    chilling2 hours hrs
    Total Time2 hours hrs 30 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: American
    Servings: 12 cookies
    Calories: 322kcal
    Author: Liz Marek

    Ingredients

    Ingredients

    • 8 ounces Unsalted butter Room temperature
    • 8 ounces Granulated sugar
    • 1 large Egg
    • 1 teaspoon Vanilla extract
    • 18 ounces AP flour
    • 1 ½ teaspoons Baking powder
    • ½ teaspoon Nutmeg
    • ½ teaspoon salt
    • 1 teaspoon Milk
    • ¼ teaspoon Cinnamon (optional)
    US Customary - Metric

    Instructions

    Simple Sugar Cookie Instructions

    • In the bowl of your stand mixer, place your room temperature butter and granulated sugar.
    • Cream the butter and sugar using the paddle attachment and mix it on low until it's smooth. Creamed butter should be fluffy and pale yellow in color.
    • Next, add an egg and mix it on medium speed (speed 2 on a Bosch, speed 4 on KitchenAid mixer) until it is fully incorporated. Scrape the bowl when necessary to make sure the egg incorporates.
    • Then, add in the vanilla extract and mix it until it's just incorporated.
    • In a separate bowl, whisk your dry ingredients (AP flour, nutmeg, cinnamon, salt and baking powder) together. 
    • Add the dry ingredients into stand mixer about ⅓ of total dry ingredients at a time using a scoop. Mix it until it's fully incorporated. Start the speed on slow until the flour starts to incorporate, then turn up the speed to a medium speed setting. Scrape the bowl as needed to fully incorporate the ingredients.
    • Then, once the flour is fully incorporated you will add the milk. Continue to mix it on slow until the dough becomes a solid mass. 
    • Scrape out the mixer bowl and then wrap up your sugar cookie dough in plastic wrap.
    • Chill the cookie dough in the refrigerator for 2 hours. 
    • Knead the cookie dough, and then roll it until it is thin enough to cut cookie shapes.
    • Use your desired cookie cutter to cut out uniform shapes.
    • Place the cookies on a baking sheet that's lined with parchment paper.
    • Next, put the cookie sheet back in the refrigerator for about 15 minutes to allow the dough to chill again. Chilled cookie dough will keep it's shape in the oven and not expand or warp.
    • Bake the chilled cookies at (350ºF 177ºC) for 10-14 minutes depending on the size of the cookie. Cookies will be done once they are slightly golden brown on the edge.

    Notes

    • Weigh your ingredients to avoid cookie failure. Using a kitchen scale for baking is super easy and gives you the best results every single time. 
    • Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start mixing to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
    • After you prepare your cookie dough, ensure you wrap it up in some plastic wrap and chill it in the refrigerator for 2 hours. 
    • Chilled cookie dough will keep its shape in the oven and not expand or warp.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1cookie | Calories: 322kcal | Carbohydrates: 40g | Protein: 3g | Fat: 16g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Cholesterol: 56mg | Sodium: 142mg | Potassium: 106mg | Sugar: 16g | Vitamin A: 495IU | Calcium: 39mg | Iron: 1.6mg
    close up of panna cotta with strawberry gelee

    February 1, 2022 gluten free

    Panna Cotta with Strawberry Gelée

    Smooth and creamy vanilla bean panna cotta and strawberry gelée are served on the diagonal in individual wine glasses. These beautiful and tasty desserts are perfect for weddings, bridal showers, or any special occasion.

    Each bite of this dessert packs a punch of vibrant strawberries paired with creamy and sweet panna cotta. This elegant dessert is excellent for celebrations like bridal showers and weddings, or even as a special dessert for a romantic date night at home!

    What's great about panna cotta is you can make it ahead of time and store it in the fridge for up to 7 days before you add in the strawberry. Chef Christophe Rull makes a beautiful presentation inside of a wine glass, but you can also prepare it in any vessel you like (it would look stunning in a martini glass, too!)

    What's In This Blog Post

    • Panna Cotta Ingredients
    • Preparing the Strawberry Gelée
    • How to Make Panna Cotta
    • Assembling the Panna Cotta
    • FAQ
    • More Recipes You'll Love

    Panna Cotta Ingredients

    panna cotta ingredients

    Gelatin: You will need gelatin (or agar-agar which is a vegetarian substitute for gelatin) in order to set your panna cotta. Either gelatin (or agar-agar) is needed to bind the ingredients together and transform the cream into a more solid form. If you do not have gelatin sheets you can also use powdered gelatin in place of the sheets (10 grams of powdered gelatin and 50 grams of water).

    Vanilla bean: For more delicate desserts like this one, the quality of the vanilla you use really matters. Don't have a vanilla bean? No problem! You can substitute with 1 teaspoon of vanilla bean paste or a high-quality vanilla extract (and you will skip the step in the recipe that requires you to strain the vanilla pod and seeds from the cream).

    Preparing the Strawberry Gelée

    1. First, you will begin by preparing the strawberry juice to make the jelly. To do this, combine the strawberries and the sugar together in a medium-sized bowl. Either frozen or fresh strawberries will work for this.pouring sugar over strawberries in a bowlmixing strawberries and sugar together with a spatula
    2. Then, wrap the top of the bowl with plastic wrap to create a steam environment in the bowl. This is to extract as much juice and flavor from the berries as possible without losing moisture.bowl of strawberries on oven covered with plastic wrap
    3. Place the bowl on a double boiler and let it cook for 1 hour over medium . Once your berries have reduced, the berries should appear to be swimming in their own juice.top down view of strawberries inside bowl sitting inside strawberry juice
    4. Next, after the berries have reduced you will strain the berries over a chinois (fine mesh strainer) lined with a cheesecloth or a paper towel. This will remove all of the berry fibers and leave a beautiful, clear strawberry juice.hands inside of a cheesecloth over a strainerhand guiding a bowl of strawberries through a strainerstrainer inside of a large measuring cup with strawberry juice dripping

    How to Make Panna Cotta

    1. In a bowl, measure 6 times the amount of cool water as gelatin. So for 8 grams of gelatin, you will need 48 grams of water. Place the sheets of gelatin in the water one at a time while making sure that they do not stick together. Let them bloom while you prepare the cream.hands holding a sheet of gelatin above a bowl of water
    2. Next, using a paring knife, split your vanilla bean and scrape the seeds from the pod. You will want to keep the pod so you can steep it in your cream.splitting a vanilla bean pod
    3. Then, in a sauce pan, combine your heavy cream, sugar, and vanilla bean (both the seeds and the pod).vanilla bean pod and seeds sauce pan on top of cream
    4. Heat the mixture over medium heat until it is boiling.whisk resting over saucepan
    5. Once the cream mixture is boiling, remove it from the heat and strain it through a fine, mesh strainer or a chinois into a bowl.hand holding a strainer with vanilla bean pod inside over a cup
    6. With your hands, squeeze out the excess water from your bloomed gelatin sheets and then add them to the strained hot cream mixture. Stir until they are combined.hands shown squeezing water out of gelatin sheethand dropping gelatin inside of a saucepan
    7. Finally, add in your buttermilk and stir until they are combined and the gelatin has fully melted.whisking in saucepan

    Assembling the Panna Cotta

    1. Prepare your serving glasses or containers. PRO TIP: We used water to decide what angle we wanted our panna cotta to set at, and then cleaned and dried the glasses to get them ready for the panna cotta to be poured into. Make sure they are stable so they can be moved to the refrigerator carefully without spilling or sloshing. We used a non-skid mat and a cupcake tin to hold our glasses steady.muffin pan with 2 cups laying at an angle inside
    2. Slowly pour your panna cotta into the glasses to your desired volume. We chose to fill ours with about 6 ounces of panna cotta mixture in each glass.pouring mixture into a wine glass that's sitting at a slight angle
    3. Place the panna cotta in the fridge to completely set (it could take 5-6 hours). It should be firm with no movement when you gently tilt or shake the glass.panna cotta sitting at an angle inside of a wine glass
    4. Now, you will bloom your gelatin sheets for the strawberry jelly. In a bowl, measure 6 times the amount of cool water as gelatin. So for 8 grams of gelatin you will need 48 grams of water.
    5. Using a scale, measure 500 grams of the strawberry juice in a pourable container.bowl of strained strawberry juice
    6. Place the sheets of gelatin in the cool water one at a time while making sure they are not stuck together. Let them bloom for about 5 minutes.
    7. Next, squeeze the excess water from the gelatin sheets and then microwave it 30 seconds at a time to melt it. You only want to melt the gelatin (be careful not to boil it).
    8. Then, carefully pour the melted gelatin into the strawberry liquid. The juice should still be warm enough to melt the gelatin once added and mixed.hands shown pouring and whisking ingredients
    9. Gently stir them until they are combined. You do not want to incorporate too many bubbles. Allow them to cool to about 70ºF (21ºC).whisk inside of large measuring bowl
    10. Remove the stems from your strawberries and slice them into sections. Add the sliced strawberries on top of the panna cotta. hands shown chopping up strawberrieshand shown dropping strawberry pieces into wine glass filled with panna cotta
    11. Next, slowly pour the jelly mix over the strawberries until the volume matches the level of the panna cotta.pouring strawberry mixture over wine glass filled with strawberries on top of panna cotta
    12. Then, carefully place the panna cotta glasses back into the fridge for another 2 hours until the strawberry jelly is set.
    13. Panna cotta is either served chilled or at room temperature. Whatever you prefer! Garnish with edible gold and enjoy! dessert plate presentation of panna cotta with strawberry

    FAQ

    What does panna cotta taste like?

    Silky, vanilla cream that has a thicker texture with a slight giggle.

    What does panna cotta mean?

    Cooked cream.

    Can you make this dairy-free?

    Absolutely! You can replace the heavy whipping cream with almond milk or coconut milk.

    Could I use raspberry instead of strawberry for this recipe?

    Yes! If you make it, be sure to tag me on Instagram or Facebook @sugargeekshow

    What's the difference between panna cotta and crème brûlée?

    Panna cotta is gelatinized sweet cream prepared in the refrigerator, and crème brûlée is an egg custard that is baked in the oven and topped with crystallized sugar.

    Is panna cotta like flan?

    Yes, both are creamy desserts that have a slight giggle to them. But they are prepared in different ways and do not share similar flavors. Panna cotta is sweet cream that is thickened with gelatin, and flan is a custard made with eggs and surrounded by liquid caramel to give it a warmer, nuttier taste.

    What kind of gelatin should I use?

    You can use any kind of gelatin (or agar-agar) you prefer. You could also make your own gelatin sheet if you plan on needing more gelatin in the future.

    Can I use anything other than gelatin to set it?

    Yes, you can use agar-agar. Keep in mind, if you use agar-agar as a substitute you will have slightly different (firmer) results.

    Can I use powdered gelatin?

    Yep! Just replace the sheet gelatin with an equal amount of powdered gelatin. Sprinkle the gelatin over the water and let it absorb for 5 minutes.

    Why is my panna cotta not setting?

    You either did not incorporate enough gelatin (or agar-agar), or it needs to sit in the refrigerator a bit longer.

    Why is my panna cotta separating?

    Your gelatin did not bloom properly, or you did not squeeze out the excess water. To avoid this, set your gelatin in water and allow it to bloom (i.e. absorb liquid) for 5 minutes before using your hands to squeeze out any excess water. When the fat from the cream separates from the water in the gelatin, it creates two distinct layers that will separate your panna cotta.

    golden spoon scooping a bite-size amount of panna cotta with strawberry gelée

    More Recipes You'll Love

    Crème brûlée

    Basic gelatin sheet recipe

    Strawberry puree

    Lemon curd recipe

    Recipe

    Print Recipe
    4.88 from 8 votes

    Vanilla Bean Panna Cotta with Strawberry Gelée

    Creamy, vanilla bean panna cotta topped with strawberry sauce is the perfect party dessert!
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time40 minutes mins
    Total Time50 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: Italian
    Servings: 6 servings
    Calories: 360kcal
    Author: Liz Marek

    Ingredients

    Strawberry Gelée

    • 1000 grams strawberries fresh or frozen
    • 200 grams sugar
    • 8 grams sheet gelatin
    • 48 Grams water

    Vanilla Panna Cotta

    • 225 grams heavy whipping cream
    • 100 grams buttermilk
    • 45 grams sugar
    • 1 whole vanilla bean
    • 8 grams sheet gelatin
    • 48 Grams water

    Instructions

    Preparing the Strawberry Gelée

    • First, you will begin by preparing the strawberry juice to make the jelly. To do this, combine the strawberries and the sugar together in a medium-sized bowl. Either frozen or fresh strawberries will work for this.
    • Then, wrap the top of the bowl with plastic wrap to create a steam environment in the bowl. This is to extract as much juice and flavor from the berries as possible without losing moisture.
    • Place the bowl on a double boiler and let it cook for 1 hour over medium heat. Once your berries have reduced, the berries should appear to be swimming in their own juice.
    • Next, after the berries have reduced you will strain the berries over a chinois lined with a cheesecloth or a paper towel. This will remove all of the berry fibers and leave a beautiful, clear red liquid.

    Making the Panna Cotta

    • In a bowl, measure 6 times the amount of cool water as gelatin. So for 8 grams of gelatin, you will need 48 grams of water. Place the sheets of gelatin in the water one at a time while making sure that they do not stick together. Let them bloom while you prepare the cream. *See the notes section below if you want to use powdered gelatin.
    • Next, using a paring knife, split your vanilla bean and scrape the seeds from the pod. You will want to keep the pod so you can steep it in your cream.
    • Then, in a sauce pan, combine your heavy cream, sugar, and vanilla bean (both the seeds and the pod).
    • Heat the mixture over medium heat until it is boiling.
    • Once the mixture is boiling, turn off the heat. Squeeze out the excess water from your bloomed gelatin sheets and then add them to the hot cream mixture. Stir until they are combined and the gelatin is melted.
    • Strain the mixture through a fine, mesh strainer or a chinois into a bowl.
    • Finally, add in your buttermilk and stir until they are combined.

    Assembling the Panna Cotta Dessert Glasses

    • Prepare your serving glasses or containers. PRO TIP: We used water to decide what angle we wanted our panna cotta to set at, and then cleaned and dried the glasses to get them ready for the panna cotta to be poured into. Make sure they are stable so they can be moved to the refrigerator carefully without spilling or sloshing.
    • Slowly pour your panna cotta into the glasses to your desired volume. We chose to fill ours with about 6 ounces each.
    • Place the panna cotta in the fridge to completely set (it could take 5-6 hours). It should be firm with no movement when you gently tilt or shake the glass.
    • Now, you will bloom your gelatin sheets for the strawberry jelly. In a bowl, measure 6 times the amount of cool water as gelatin. So for 8 grams of gelatin you will need 48 grams of water.
    • Using a scale, measure 500 grams of the strawberry juice in a pourable container.
    • Place the sheets of gelatin in the cool water one at a time while making sure they are not stuck together. Let them bloom for about 5 minutes.
    • Next, squeeze the excess water from the gelatin sheets and then add them to the strawberry liquid. The juice should still be warm enough to melt the gelatin once added and mixed.
    • Gently stir them until they are combined. You do not want to incorporate too many bubbles. Allow them to cool to about 70ºF (21ºC).
    • Stand the set panna cotta glasses upright and then add sliced strawberries to the empty void in the glass to your desired height.
    • Next, slowly pour the jelly mix over the strawberries until the volume matches the level of the panna cotta.
    • Then, carefully place the panna cotta glasses back into the fridge for another 2 hours until the strawberry jelly is set.
    • Panna cotta is either served chilled or a room temperature. Whatever you prefer! (Optional) Garnish with edible gold and enjoy!

    Video

    Notes

    Important Things To Note Before You Start
    1. You can make this a dairy-free recipe by replacing the cream with almond milk or coconut milk.
    2. If you do not have gelatin sheets you can use powdered gelatin. Mix together 10 grams of powdered gelatin and 50 grams of cold water and let it bloom for 5 minutes (one each for the panna cotta and one for the strawberry gelee).
    3. Need a vegetarian substitute for gelatin? You can use agar-agar.
    4. Once you add the gelatin to your cream, you do not want to boil the liquid again. Why? Because it will cause the cream and the gelatin to separate.
    5. Need to make this for a party? You can make and set your panna cotta for up to 7 days in the refrigerator. Just be sure to not add in any strawberry or sauce until a few hours before you're ready to serve it. 
    6. If you want an easier substitute for the strawberry concentrate, check out my strawberry reduction recipe.

    Nutrition

    Serving: 1servings | Calories: 360kcal | Carbohydrates: 56g | Protein: 5g | Fat: 15g | Saturated Fat: 9g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 1g | Monounsaturated Fat: 4g | Cholesterol: 53mg | Sodium: 40mg | Potassium: 307mg | Fiber: 3g | Sugar: 50g | Vitamin A: 599IU | Vitamin C: 98mg | Calcium: 73mg | Iron: 1mg
    Cake sculpted to look like Boba Fett

    February 1, 2022 Course Preview

    Boba Fett Cake Tutorial

    Skill level: Intermediate

    In this tutorial, you will learn how to create a bobble-head stylized Boba Fett cake. Few characters are as popular and recognizable in the Star Wars universe as the notorious Boba Fett!

    You will learn how to create this gravity-defying cake, featuring Boba Fett's iconic Mandalorian helmet shape, how to get the proportions of a Funko-Pop figure correct, adding the details including hands, boots, this helmet antenna, and his iconic blaster and jetpack.

    There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

    1:38:07 Minutes of Instruction

    What You Will Learn

    • How to create a Funko-Pop Boba Fett figure out of cake and edible materials
    • Learn how to sculpt Boba's helmet, blaster, jetpack and poncho
    • How to get the gravity-defying structure right

    Cake sculpted to look like Boba Fett

    Tutorial Chapters

    1. Making the bases 0:29
    2. Making the structure 1:07
    3. Adding the armature wire 9:57
    4. Stacking The Cakes 12:57
    5. Shaping The Cakes 16:04
    6. Coloring The Fondant 25:09
    7. Building Up The Torso 26:46
    8. Coloring The Fondant Pt. 1 32:56
    9. Covering The Cake In Fondant 34:30
    10. Making The Boots 39:17
    11. Building Up The Legs 43:28
    12. Bulking And Detailing The Torso 46:10
    13. Making The Gun 50:52
    14. Making The Antenna Pt. 1 54:39
    15. Making The Fist 56:20
    16. Painting The Helmet Pt. 1 59:28
    17. Coloring The Modeling Chocolate Pt. 2 1:01:30
    18. Detailing The Boots 1:03:38
    19. Making The Belt And Holster 1:08:47
    20. Adding The Body Armor 1:11:16
    21. Adding The Fist And Detailing 1:14:32
    22. Making The Antenna Pt. 2 1:15:42
    23. Making The Shoulder Pads 1:17:29
    24. Adding The Helmet Details 1:18:28
    25. Adding The Antenna 1:25:32
    26. Adding The Arm Cuff 1:27:35
    27. Making the Jetpack Pt. 1 1:28:21
    28. Adding The Gun And Hand 1:29:50
    29. Making And Adding The Poncho 1:31:09
    30. Making The Jetpack Pt. 2 1:32:35
    31. Painting The Helmet And Hand 1:34:28
    32. Painting The Final Details 1:35:43

    Downloads

    Materials List

    Helmet Template - Top

    Helmet Template - Bottom

    Boba Fett Reference

    Cake sculpted to look like Boba Fett

    February 1, 2022 Paid Video

    Boba Fett Cake

    Skill level: Intermediate

    In this tutorial, you will learn how to create a bobble-head stylized Boba Fett cake. Few characters are as popular and recognizable in the Star Wars universe as the notorious Boba Fett!

    You will learn how to create this gravity-defying cake, featuring Boba Fett's iconic Mandalorian helmet shape, how to get the proportions of a Funko-Pop figure correct, adding the details including hands, boots, this helmet antenna, and his iconic blaster and jetpack.

    There's a lot to cover in this tutorial, so let's get our tools together and let's get started!

    1:38:07 Minutes of Instruction

    What You Will Learn

    • How to create a Funko-Pop Boba Fett figure out of cake and edible materials
    • Learn how to sculpt Boba's helmet, blaster, jetpack and poncho
    • How to get the gravity-defying structure right

    Tutorial Chapters

    1. Making the bases 0:29
    2. Making the structure 1:07
    3. Adding the armature wire 9:57
    4. Stacking The Cakes 12:57
    5. Shaping The Cakes 16:04
    6. Coloring The Fondant 25:09
    7. Building Up The Torso 26:46
    8. Coloring The Fondant Pt. 1 32:56
    9. Covering The Cake In Fondant 34:30
    10. Making The Boots 39:17
    11. Building Up The Legs 43:28
    12. Bulking And Detailing The Torso 46:10
    13. Making The Gun 50:52
    14. Making The Antenna Pt. 1 54:39
    15. Making The Fist 56:20
    16. Painting The Helmet Pt. 1 59:28
    17. Coloring The Modeling Chocolate Pt. 2 1:01:30
    18. Detailing The Boots 1:03:38
    19. Making The Belt And Holster 1:08:47
    20. Adding The Body Armor 1:11:16
    21. Adding The Fist And Detailing 1:14:32
    22. Making The Antenna Pt. 2 1:15:42
    23. Making The Shoulder Pads 1:17:29
    24. Adding The Helmet Details 1:18:28
    25. Adding The Antenna 1:25:32
    26. Adding The Arm Cuff 1:27:35
    27. Making the Jetpack Pt. 1 1:28:21
    28. Adding The Gun And Hand 1:29:50
    29. Making And Adding The Poncho 1:31:09
    30. Making The Jetpack Pt. 2 1:32:35
    31. Painting The Helmet And Hand 1:34:28
    32. Painting The Final Details 1:35:43

    Downloads

    Materials List

    Helmet Template - Top

    Helmet Template - Bottom

    ⅓ Scale Boba Fett Turnaround Reference

    Boba Fett Scale Reference 01

    Boba Fett Scale Reference 02

    crème brûlée in a glass dish decorated with fruit and flowers

    January 25, 2022 Mother's Day

    Crème Brûlée

    Crème brûlée is a smooth, ultra-creamy custard dessert with a crisp caramel topping that you crack through with your spoon. The smooth custard and crunchy sugar make a delicious combination in your mouth so it's no surprise it's a favorite dessert for many and popular in restaurants served with fresh berries.

    crème brûlée in a glass dish decorated with fruit and flowers

    Today, chef Christophe Rull is going to walk you through step-by-step how to bake a perfectly smooth and creamy crème brûlée, how to take the presentation up a notch by using different containers, and best of all, no water bath necessary!

    What's great about this recipe is that it uses a low-temperature baking method to prevent you from overcooking the custard. This method is much safer since you do not have to worry about pouring hot water into a pan to create a water bath.

    As an added bonus, when you bake custard at a lower temperature without a water bath, it gives you more opportunities to get creative with what dish you are baking your custard inside (and if you want to opt for a more decorative, oven-safe dish that's larger than a traditional ramekin).

    What's In This Blog Post

    • Crème Brûlée Ingredients
    • How to Make Crème Brûlée
    • Caramelizing the Sugar
    • FAQ
    • More Recipes You'll Love

    Crème Brûlée Ingredients

    One of the best things about making crème brûlée is it only takes 5 common ingredients! If you don't have a vanilla bean then you can use 1 teaspoon of vanilla bean paste or extract although I do love the look of the vanilla bean seeds in the finished product!

    How to Make Crème Brûlée

    1. Preheat your oven to 200ºF (93ºC).
    2. Split your vanilla bean in half with a sharp knife and remove the seeds with the tip. Scrape the seeds into your milk. Reserve the pod to use in the next step.
    3. In a heavy bottom saucepan over medium heat, combine the cream, milk, vanilla (both the seeds and the pod), and sugar. Bring it all to a boil.cutting open a vanilla bean podwhisk inside of bowl with cream and vanilla bean
    4. Once your mixture begins to boil, remove it from the heat.
    5. Whisk your eggs gently to break them up in a separate bowl.
    6. Pour about ⅓ of the hot milk mixture into the egg yolks while continually whisking. This will temper the eggs with the milk so that they wont curdle when you add the rest of the hot milk to them.pouring creme into eggs
    7. Once the eggs and the milk are thoroughly combined, add the egg mixture back into the pot with the remaining hot milk. Whisk to combine.
    8. Next, strain the custard mixture through a strainer or sieve to remove the vanilla fibers and the vanilla pod. straining into a bowl of eggs
    9. Use an immersion blender (optional) to blend the ingredients until they are smooth and homogenous. Try not to incorporate any air by keeping the head of the blender under the surface of the mixture.hand holding blender and blending crème brûlée mixture
    10. Fill your baking containers or ramekins ¾ of the way with custard. PRO TIP: It will be easier to place the containers on a sheet pan with a silicone baking mat underneath before filling them, and then move the entire sheet pan to the oven.glass dish on top of a non-slip mat on a baking sheetpouring crème brûlée into glass dish
    11. Then, tightly cover each container or ramekin with plastic wrap. Poke a few holes in the plastic wrap to allow some airflow. The plastic wrap will keep moisture in the containers so you don't get a skin on top and the low temperature of the oven allows the crème brûlée to be baked without a waterbath. wrapping plastic wrap around crème brûlée dishpoking holes in plastic wrap on top of crème brûlée
    12. Place the sheet pan on the middle rack in the preheated oven.
    13. Bake for about 1 hour and 25 minutes. I'm baking mine in large glass bowls that serve 2 people each, but you can also use ramekins. Baking time may vary. Once your custard has somewhat solidified around the perimeter of the ramekin and has a SLIGHT jiggle in the center, it is finished baking. If your custard appears to be mostly liquid, allow it to bake longer adding 10 minutes at a time until it reaches the desired consistency.
    14. Once the ramekins have been removed from the oven, allow them to cool for about 20 minutes. Then, place them in the fridge until they are completely cool.bowl of cooked crème brûlée on a baking dish

    Caramelizing the Sugar

    1. When you are ready to serve the crème brûlée, spread a thin, even layer of sugar across the top of the custard. You can do this by placing a couple Tablespoons of sugar on top then gently turning the bowl so gravity does most of the work for you and moves the sugar around the surface.hand tiling the bowl of crème brûlée to move the sugar around the bowlhand tiling the bowl of crème brûlée to move the sugar around the bowl
    2. Using a culinary torch, heat the sugar until it reaches the desired caramelization on top. PRO TIP: Try to heat the sugar in small increments so you don't cook the custard under the sugar. The goal is to have a thin layer of crunchy caramelized (not burned) sugar on top of the cool custard. If you do not have a blow torch, place the ramekins back in the oven and broil them until the sugar has caramelized.hand holding a kitchen torch over crème brûlée
    3. Garnish with berries or fruit of your choice.hand placing fruits on top of crème brûléecrème brûlée in a glass dish decorated with fruits and a flower

    FAQ

    What is crème brûlée mostly made of?

    Cream, sugar, egg yolks, and vanilla.

    What does crème brûlée taste like?

    It is a light and airy vanilla-flavored baked custard with a slightly crunchy layer of caramelized sugar on top.

    Why is my crème brûlée eggy?

    You may have over-baked it. Eggs will contract if they are baked too much and then they squeeze all of the water out of the dish. This results in a texture similar to scrambled eggs.

    What sugar is best for crème brûlée?

    Granulated sugar is ideal for baking the custard, and sprinkling Sugar in the Raw on top works best for getting the iconic caramelized sugar layer on top using a kitchen torch.

    Why is my crème brûlée foamy?

    If it had bubbles on top before it was baked, then it will be foamy. What you can do to get rid of these bubbles is gently use a kitchen torch to blow away the bubbles before you bake your custard.

    Can I use brown sugar to make crème brûlée?

    Yes! But if you use brown sugar instead of granulated sugar, it will be darker in color.

    Is crème brûlée gluten-free?

    Generally speaking, yes! It's always important to check that your ingredients are gluten-free, but traditionally it is gluten-free.

    Do I need a torch?

    No, not if you are baking custard inside of a ramekin. With ramekins, you can broil the custard instead of using a torch. However, if you are using a different baking dish you will want to be careful before putting it under the broiler (depending on how hot the dish can get before shattering).

    spoonful of crème brûlée

    More Recipes You'll Love

    Chocolate Souffle

    Coconut Custard

    Panna Cotta With Strawberry Gelee

    Crème Anglaise Recipe

    Homemade Pastry Creme

    Recipe

    crème brûlée in a glass dish decorated with fruit and flowers
    Print Recipe
    4.67 from 9 votes

    Crème Brûlée

    A classic creamy custard dessert that balances the sweet textures of smooth and crunchy.
    Prep Time10 minutes mins
    Cook Time30 minutes mins
    Total Time40 minutes mins
    Course: Dessert
    Cuisine: French
    Servings: 4 people
    Calories: 466kcal
    Author: Liz Marek

    Equipment

    • 4 oven safe bowls/ramekins
    • pot
    • Whisk
    • strainer
    • Kitchen torch

    Ingredients

    Crème Brûlée

    • 100 grams egg yolks
    • 70 grams granulated sugar
    • 250 grams milk
    • 250 grams heavy whipping cream
    • 1 vanilla bean (seeds scraped out, pod reserved)
    • 50 grams granulated sugar or sugar in the raw (set aside) (used to caramelize the custard after it's baked)

    Garnish (Optional)

    • 155 grams fresh berries

    Instructions

    Making the Crème Brûlée

    • Preheat your oven to 200ºF (93ºC).
    • In a heavy bottom pot over medium heat, combine the milk, vanilla (both the seeds and the pod), and sugar. Bring it all to a boil.
    • Then, in a separate bowl, add in your egg yolk and gently whip it until it reaches a smooth consistency.
    • Once the milk has begun to boil, strain it to remove the vanilla pod, into your egg yolks and mix until combined.
    • Add the heavy cream.
    • Using an immersion blender, blend the custard to create an extra smooth consistency, about 15 seconds. Be sure not to allow a lot of air into the custard while it is blending.
    • Fill your baking containers or ramekins ¾ of the way with custard. PRO TIP: It will be easier to place the containers on a sheet tray before filling them, and then move the entire sheet tray to the oven. I used a silicone mat as well to avoid the bowl sliding.
    • Then, tightly cover each container or ramekin with plastic wrap. Poke a few holes in the plastic wrap to allow some airflow.
    • Carefully move your custard to the middle rack in the preheated oven.
    • Bake for about 1 hour and 25 minutes. I'm baking mine in large glass bowls that serve 2 people each, but you can also use ramekins. Baking time may vary. Once your custard has somewhat solidified around the perimeter of the ramekin and has a slight jiggle in the center, it is finished baking.
    • If your custard appears to be mostly liquid, allow it to bake longer adding 10 minutes at a time until it reaches the desired consistency.
    • Once the ramekins have been removed from the oven, allow them to cool for about 20 minutes. Then, place them in the fridge until they are completely cool.

    Caramelizing the Sugar

    • When you are ready to serve the custard, spread a thin, even layer of granulated sugar across the top of the custard. You can do this by gently turning the bowl so gravity does most of the work for you and moves the sugar around the custard.
    • Using a kitchen blow torch, heat the sugar until it reaches the desired caramelization on top. PRO TIP: Try to do heat the sugar with a blow torch in small increments so you don't cook the custard under the sugar. The goal is to have a thin layer of crunchy caramelized (not burned) sugar on top of the cool custard.
      If you do not have a blow torch, place the ramekins back in the oven and broil them until the sugar has crystallized.
    • Garnish with berries or fruit of your choice.

    Notes

    Important Things To Note Before You Start
    1. Practice Mise en Place (everything in its place). Measure out your ingredients ahead of time and have them ready before you start to reduce the chances of accidentally leaving something out.
    2. Use a scale to weigh your ingredients (including liquids) unless otherwise instructed (Tablespoons, teaspoons, pinch, etc). Metric measurements are available in the recipe card. Scaled ingredients are much more accurate than using cups and help ensure the success of your recipe. 
    3. You do not need a kitchen blow torch if you are baking your custard in ramekins. If you are using another kind of baking dish, you will want to confirm how hot it can get before it shatters before you place it under the broiler in your oven. 

    Nutrition

    Calories: 466kcal | Carbohydrates: 39g | Protein: 7g | Fat: 32g | Saturated Fat: 18g | Polyunsaturated Fat: 2g | Monounsaturated Fat: 10g | Cholesterol: 363mg | Sodium: 63mg | Potassium: 217mg | Fiber: 1g | Sugar: 35g | Vitamin A: 1385IU | Vitamin C: 23mg | Calcium: 150mg | Iron: 1mg
    « Previous Page
    Next Page »

    Primary Sidebar

    Hi, I'm Liz! I'm passionate about creating reliable, foolproof recipes that don't just tell you how to cook, but why things work - so you can skip the guesswork and confidently make the best sweet and savory dishes of your life.

    More about me →

    Our Cake Greatest Hits

    Check out our best cake recipes

    👨‍🍼 Celebrate Father's Day

    • Close up of three crispy baked chicken thighs on a plate.
      Crispy Baked Chicken Thighs
      Cook Time50 Minutes
    • close up of a sliced ribeye steak
      How To Cook A Ribeye
      Cook Time24 Hours 14 Minutes
    • close up of creamy mac and cheese on a serving spoon
      Creamy Baked Mac And Cheese
      Cook Time35 Minutes
    • close up of a keto smash burger
      Smash Burgers Recipe
      Cook Time25 Minutes
    • Hawaiian Mac Salad
      Cook Time2 Hours 20 Minutes
    • Smoked Beef Tenderloin
      Cook Time2 Hours 55 Minutes

    Popular Recipes

    • close up of ganache drizzling into a bowl
      The Best Chocolate Ganache Recipe
      Cook Time20 Minutes
    • Piping easy buttercream rosettes onto a cake using a 1M star piping tip
      Easy Buttercream Frosting
      Cook Time25 Minutes
    • close up slice of marble cake
      Moist and Fluffy Marble Cake Recipe
      Cook Time40 Minutes
    • Slice of red velvet cake with cream cheese frosting on a white plate.
      Red Velvet Cake Recipe
      Cook Time1 Hours 40 Minutes

    Footer

    ↑ back to top

    About

    • Privacy Policy
    • Terms of Service

    Newsletter

    • Sign Up! for emails and updates

    Contact

    • Contact
    • About Us

    Copyright © 2024 Sugar Geek Show, Inc. All Rights Reserved.

    Rate This Recipe

    Your vote:




    A rating is required
    A name is required
    An email is required